Ref Data Guide Help 409

SmartPlant 3D
Reference Data Guide

Version 2011 (9.0) Service Pack 1

April 2011 / August 2011

DSP3D-PE-200026J-UPDATED

Copyright
Copyright 1999-2011 Intergraph Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement;
contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade
secret law, and international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from
Intergraph Corporation.
Portions of this software are owned by Spatial Corp. 1986-2010. All Rights Reserved.
U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was
developed at private expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with
subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal
Acquisition Regulations ("FAR") and its successors, and is unpublished and all rights are reserved under the copyright laws of
the United States. For units of the Department of Defense ("DoD"): This is "commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS
252.227-7014 and the rights of the Government are as specified at DFARS 227.7202-3.
Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
Intergraph Corporation
P.O. Box 240000
Huntsville, AL 35813
Terms of Use
Use of this software product is subject to the End User License Agreement ("EULA") delivered with this software product unless
the licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the licensee has a valid signed
license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take precedence and govern the use
of this software product. Subject to the terms contained within the applicable license agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives
licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the documentation as defined in the applicable license agreement
and delivered with the software product for licensee's internal, non-commercial use. The documentation may not be printed for
resale or redistribution.
Warranties and Liabilities
All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in the EULA provided with the software
or applicable license for the software product signed by Intergraph Corporation, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this
document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. Intergraph believes
the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date.
The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable
technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document.
The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the
terms of this license. No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not
supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL
EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.
Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data.
Users should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.
Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, PDS, SmartPlant, FrameWorks, I-Convert, I-Export, I-Sketch, SmartMarine, IntelliShip, INtools,
ISOGEN, MARIAN, SmartSketch, SPOOLGEN, SupportManager, and SupportModeler are trademarks or registered trademarks
of Intergraph Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. ACIS is a registered trademark of SPATIAL TECHNOLOGY, INC. Infragistics, Presentation
Layer Framework, ActiveTreeView Ctrl, ProtoViewCtl, ActiveThreed Ctrl, ActiveListBar Ctrl, ActiveSplitter, ActiveToolbars
Ctrl, ActiveToolbars Plus Ctrl, and ProtoView are trademarks of Infragistics, Inc. Incorporates portions of 2D DCM, 3D DCM, and
HLM by Siemens Product Lifecycle Management Software III (GB) Ltd. All rights reserved. Gigasoft is a registered trademark,
and ProEssentials a trademark of Gigasoft, Inc. VideoSoft and VXFlexGrid are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
ComponentOne LLC 1991-2009, All rights reserved. Oracle, JD Edwards, PeopleSoft, and Retek are registered trademarks of
Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Tribon is a trademark of AVEVA Group plc. Alma and act/cut are trademarks of the Alma
company. Other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

SmartPlant 3D Reference Data Guide 3

Contents
Preface ........................................................................................................................................................ 15
SmartPlant 3D Documentation Set ....................................................................................................... 17
Documentation Comments ................................................................................................................... 21
What's New in Reference Data ................................................................................................................. 23
Understanding Reference Data ................................................................................................................ 25
Learning about Reference Data Types ................................................................................................. 26
Graphical Data ................................................................................................................................ 26
Non-graphical Data ......................................................................................................................... 27
Looking at How the Catalog Database Fits In ...................................................................................... 27
Using the PDS Translator ......................................................................................................................... 29
Create PDS Export Data Files ........................................................................................................ 30
Edit the Piping Translation Rules Workbook .................................................................................. 30
Populate Dimension Table Name Rules ........................................................................................ 31
Translate PDS Reference Data ...................................................................................................... 32
Define Manual Information after Translation .................................................................................. 33
Create Commodity Codes .............................................................................................................. 39
PDS Piping Reference Data Translator Dialog Box ....................................................................... 39
Using the Piping Commodity Filter Cleanup Utility ......................................................................... 40
Using the Pipe Branch Cleanup Utility ........................................................................................... 42
Using the Piping Reference Data Merge Utility .............................................................................. 43
Use the UoM Conversion Utility ..................................................................................................... 45
Using the OD to NPD Utility ........................................................................................................... 46
Using Excel Workbooks to Configure Reference Data .......................................................................... 49
Delivered Excel Workbooks .................................................................................................................. 50
Minimum Reference Data ..................................................................................................................... 54
Describing the Common Sheets in the Workbooks .............................................................................. 57
Administrative Sheets ..................................................................................................................... 59
Custom Interfaces Sheets .............................................................................................................. 61
Part Class Sheets ........................................................................................................................... 71
Catalog Hierarchy Sheets .............................................................................................................. 73
Using Catalog Hierarchy Sheets to Add Part Classes ................................................................... 75
Loading Reference Data into the Catalog ............................................................................................... 79
Using the Bulkload Modes .................................................................................................................... 79
Bulk Load Database with Data .............................................................................................................. 82
Bulkload Dialog Box .............................................................................................................................. 86
Bulkload from the Command Line .................................................................................................. 88
Uniqueness of Objects .......................................................................................................................... 90
Moniker Information for Special Process Sheets .................................................................................. 98
Contents

4 SmartPlant 3D Reference Data Guide

AllCommon Reference Data ................................................................................................................... 101
AllCommon.xls Workbook ................................................................................................................... 101
AllCommon Sheets ....................................................................................................................... 101
AllCommon Sheets and Disciplines ............................................................................................. 102
Plain Piping Generic Data Sheet .................................................................................................. 102
DIN Wall Thickness Data Sheet ................................................................................................... 103
Piping Generic Data Bolted Sheet ................................................................................................ 104
Piping Generic Data Female Sheet .............................................................................................. 110
Piping Generic Data Mechanical Sheet ........................................................................................ 111
Material Sheet .............................................................................................................................. 111
Outfitting Cross Sections Sheet ................................................................................................... 112
UOM Sheet ................................................................................................................................... 113
Insulation Reference Data ...................................................................................................................... 115
InsulationData.xls Workbook .............................................................................................................. 115
Insulation Sheets .......................................................................................................................... 115
Insulation Specification Sheet ...................................................................................................... 116
Insulation Thickness Table Sheet ................................................................................................ 116
Insulation Material Sheet .............................................................................................................. 117
HVAC Insulation Material Sheet ................................................................................................... 117
Equipment Insulation Material Sheet ............................................................................................ 117
Component Insulation Exclusion Sheet ........................................................................................ 118
Module Types Reference Data ............................................................................................................... 121
ModuleTypes.xls Workbook ................................................................................................................ 121
Module Type Sheets ..................................................................................................................... 121
Naming Rules Reference Data ............................................................................................................... 123
Creating and Distributing Naming Rules ............................................................................................. 123
Move Custom DLLs to SharedContent Directory (Option 1) .............................................................. 124
GenericNamingRules.xls Workbook ................................................................................................... 125
Naming Rules Sheets ................................................................................................................... 125
Naming Rules Sheet ..................................................................................................................... 126
Standard Nozzle Data .............................................................................................................................. 127
Standard Nozzle Data.xls Workbook .................................................................................................. 127
Nozzle Data Sheets ...................................................................................................................... 127
Piping Straight Nozzles Sheet ...................................................................................................... 128
Piping Elbow Nozzles Sheet ........................................................................................................ 128
Conduit Ports Sheet ..................................................................................................................... 129
Cable Nozzle Sheet ...................................................................................................................... 129
Cable Tray Ports Sheet ................................................................................................................ 129
Working in an Integrated Environment ................................................................................................. 131
Using Catalog Data in an Integrated Environment ............................................................................. 131
Appendix: Select Lists (Codelists) ........................................................................................................ 133
Select List (Codelist) Column Descriptions ......................................................................................... 134
Select List (Codelist) Disciplines ......................................................................................................... 134
Contents


Select List (Codelist) Namespaces ..................................................................................................... 144
Align Component................................................................................................................................. 144
Anvil_Constant_Dir ............................................................................................................................. 145
Anvil_Constant_Sus ............................................................................................................................ 145
Anvil_Dyn_Config................................................................................................................................ 145
Anvil_Dyn_Finish ................................................................................................................................ 145
Anvil_Dyn_PipeDia ............................................................................................................................. 145
Anvil_Dyn_ResOrient .......................................................................................................................... 145
Anvil_Dyn_ResType ........................................................................................................................... 146
Anvil_Dyn_Stroke................................................................................................................................ 146
Anvil_Dyn_ValveType ......................................................................................................................... 146
Anvil_Dyn2_PipeDia ........................................................................................................................... 146
Anvil_FIG137_Nuts ............................................................................................................................. 146
Anvil_FIG167_Insulat .......................................................................................................................... 146
Anvil_FIG218_FlangeW ...................................................................................................................... 147
Anvil_FIG255_Insulat .......................................................................................................................... 147
Anvil_FIG292_FlangeW ...................................................................................................................... 147
Anvil_FIG299_Config .......................................................................................................................... 147
Anvil_FIG86_Finish ............................................................................................................................. 147
Anvil_Finish ......................................................................................................................................... 147
Anvil_Rod_Finish ................................................................................................................................ 148
Anvil_Shoe_Base ................................................................................................................................ 148
Anvil_Shoe_Finish .............................................................................................................................. 148
Anvil_Shoe_Type ................................................................................................................................ 148
Anvil_Stanchion_Dia ........................................................................................................................... 148
Anvil_Strut_Finish ............................................................................................................................... 148
Anvil_Variable_ColType ...................................................................................................................... 149
Anvil_Variable_Dir .............................................................................................................................. 149
Anvil_Variable_RollMat ....................................................................................................................... 149
Anvil_Variable_Top ............................................................................................................................. 149
Anvil_WithWithout ............................................................................................................................... 149
Anvil_YesNo ........................................................................................................................................ 149
ApprovalReason.................................................................................................................................. 150
Aspect Code ........................................................................................................................................ 150
Assembly Inclusion ............................................................................................................................. 151
Assembly YesNoAuto ......................................................................................................................... 151
Assembly_BBXAlignment ................................................................................................................... 151
Assembly_RefPorts ............................................................................................................................ 151
Assembly_Variable_Dir ....................................................................................................................... 152
Assembly_WithWithout ....................................................................................................................... 152
Automated Flange Selection Option ................................................................................................... 152
Auxiliary Treatment ............................................................................................................................. 152
Axial Profile Category ......................................................................................................................... 153
Bend To Bend Tangent Basis ............................................................................................................. 153
Bolt Diameter Equivalence Option ...................................................................................................... 153
Bolt Extension Option ......................................................................................................................... 153
Bolt Length Calculation Option ........................................................................................................... 154
Bolt Length Round Off Option ............................................................................................................. 154
Bolt Lubrication Requirements ............................................................................................................ 154
Bolt Option .......................................................................................................................................... 154
Bolt Type ............................................................................................................................................. 154
Bolting Requirements .......................................................................................................................... 155
Bracket Category ................................................................................................................................ 157
Contents


Branch Reporting Ownership .............................................................................................................. 157
bsWeldType ........................................................................................................................................ 158
bsWeldSide ......................................................................................................................................... 158
Cable Route Status ............................................................................................................................. 158
Cable Tray Component Class ............................................................................................................. 158
Cable Tray Component Type .............................................................................................................. 158
Cable Tray Materials ........................................................................................................................... 159
Cable Tray Part Data Basis ................................................................................................................ 159
Cable Tray Type.................................................................................................................................. 159
Cable Type .......................................................................................................................................... 159
Cap Screw Length Round Off Option ................................................................................................. 159
Catalog Units of Measure Basis .......................................................................................................... 160
Check Piping Mfg Priority .................................................................................................................... 160
Check Piping Priority ........................................................................................................................... 160
Check Planning Priority ....................................................................................................................... 160
Clamp Option ...................................................................................................................................... 160
Clamp Requirement ............................................................................................................................ 160
Clamp Selection Basis ........................................................................................................................ 161
Cleaning Requirement ........................................................................................................................ 161
Cleaning Responsibility ....................................................................................................................... 161
Coating Color ...................................................................................................................................... 161
Coating Type ....................................................................................................................................... 161
Collar Category ................................................................................................................................... 161
Commodity Code Builder Option ........................................................................................................ 161
Commodity Option .............................................................................................................................. 162
Compart Coating Color ....................................................................................................................... 162
Compart Coating Process ................................................................................................................... 163
Compart Coating Responsibility.......................................................................................................... 163
Compart Coating Status ...................................................................................................................... 163
Compart Coating Type ........................................................................................................................ 163
Compartment Authorization Class ...................................................................................................... 163
Compartment Bulk Cargo Type .......................................................................................................... 163
Compartment Bulkhead Tightness...................................................................................................... 164
Compartment Capacity Context .......................................................................................................... 164
Compartment Cargo Context .............................................................................................................. 164
Compartment Coating Applicability ..................................................................................................... 164
Compartment Coating Certification ..................................................................................................... 164
Compartment Coating Inspection ....................................................................................................... 164
Compartment Compartment Group .................................................................................................... 165
Compartment Compartment Type ...................................................................................................... 165
Compartment Contact Material Type .................................................................................................. 165
Compartment Damage Location ......................................................................................................... 165
Compartment Damage Type ............................................................................................................... 165
Compartment Design Requirement .................................................................................................... 165
Compartment Function Type .............................................................................................................. 166
Compartment Insulation Category ...................................................................................................... 166
Compartment Naval Nuclear Class..................................................................................................... 166
Compartment Naval Safety Category ................................................................................................. 166
Compartment Naval Security Class .................................................................................................... 166
Compartment Noise Category ............................................................................................................ 166
Compartment Positional Rel Type ...................................................................................................... 167
Compartment Property Context .......................................................................................................... 167
Compartment Relevant Cargos .......................................................................................................... 167
Contents


Compartment Structure Type .............................................................................................................. 167
Compartment Surface Preparation ..................................................................................................... 167
Conduit Selection Basis ...................................................................................................................... 167
Connection Type ................................................................................................................................. 168
Construction Type ............................................................................................................................... 168
Control Point Subtype ......................................................................................................................... 168
Control Point Type .............................................................................................................................. 168
Create Exclusive WBS Item ................................................................................................................ 168
Cross Section Cardinal Points ............................................................................................................ 169
Cross Section Edges .......................................................................................................................... 169
Cross Section Shape Types ............................................................................................................... 169
Deck Category .................................................................................................................................... 169
Design Responsibility .......................................................................................................................... 169
Design Standard ................................................................................................................................. 169
Door Frame Position ........................................................................................................................... 170
Door Type ........................................................................................................................................... 170
Doors Windows Kinematics ................................................................................................................ 170
Drawing Style Codelist ........................................................................................................................ 170
Drilling Template Pattern .................................................................................................................... 170
Eccentric Offset Basis ......................................................................................................................... 170
Edge Reinforcement Category ............................................................................................................ 171
Elevation Plane Type .......................................................................................................................... 171
EMI ...................................................................................................................................................... 171
EMI Radiator ....................................................................................................................................... 171
EMI Suceptor ...................................................................................................................................... 171
End Preparation .................................................................................................................................. 171
End Standard ...................................................................................................................................... 172
Environmental Zone ............................................................................................................................ 172
Equipment Component Types ............................................................................................................ 172
Equipment Types ................................................................................................................................ 172
Examination ........................................................................................................................................ 173
Exterior Surface Treatment ................................................................................................................. 173
External Welded Pipe Part .................................................................................................................. 173
Fabrication Responsibility ................................................................................................................... 173
Fabrication Type ................................................................................................................................. 173
Fabrication Type Basis ....................................................................................................................... 174
Feature Type ....................................................................................................................................... 174
Fireproofing Exposure Type ................................................................................................................ 174
Fireproofing Method ............................................................................................................................ 174
Fireproofing Type ................................................................................................................................ 174
Flange Category.................................................................................................................................. 174
Flange Face Surface Finish ................................................................................................................ 175
Flange Facing ..................................................................................................................................... 175
Flange Insulation Kit Type .................................................................................................................. 175
Flip Component ................................................................................................................................... 175
Flow Direction ..................................................................................................................................... 175
Fluid Code ........................................................................................................................................... 176
Front End Type ................................................................................................................................... 176
Gasket Inside Diameter Basis ............................................................................................................. 176
Gasket Option ..................................................................................................................................... 176
Gasket Outside Diameter Basis .......................................................................................................... 176
Gasket Requirement Override ............................................................................................................ 176
Gasket Requirements ......................................................................................................................... 177
Contents


Gasket Selection Based on Fluid Code .............................................................................................. 177
Gasket Selection for Mismatched Bolted Ends Option ....................................................................... 177
Gasket Style Number .......................................................................................................................... 177
Gasket Type ........................................................................................................................................ 177
Geometric Industry Standard .............................................................................................................. 178
Geometry Type ................................................................................................................................... 179
Grid Plane Type .................................................................................................................................. 197
Hand Wheel Orientation ...................................................................................................................... 197
Handrail Connection Type .................................................................................................................. 197
Handrail End Treatment ...................................................................................................................... 197
Handrail Inline Connection Type ......................................................................................................... 198
Handrail Offset .................................................................................................................................... 198
Handrail Orientation ............................................................................................................................ 198
Handrail Side Connection Type .......................................................................................................... 198
Hazardous Fluid Category .................................................................................................................. 198
Header Branch Size Basis Option ...................................................................................................... 198
Heat Tracing Medium .......................................................................................................................... 199
HngSup Associated Part Type ............................................................................................................ 199
HngSup Association Type ................................................................................................................... 199
HngSup BOM Type ............................................................................................................................. 199
HngSup Bounding Box Type ............................................................................................................... 199
HngSup Class Node Type .................................................................................................................. 200
HngSup Command ............................................................................................................................. 200
HngSup Connect Obj .......................................................................................................................... 200
HngSup Connection Type ................................................................................................................... 200
HngSup Cut Type................................................................................................................................ 200
HngSup Discipline ............................................................................................................................... 201
HngSup ET Type................................................................................................................................. 201
HngSup Face Selection Type ............................................................................................................. 201
HngSup Joint Type ............................................................................................................................. 201
HngSup Manufacturer ......................................................................................................................... 201
HngSup Mating Joint Type .................................................................................................................. 202
HngSup Part Class Type .................................................................................................................... 202
HngSup Physical Connection ............................................................................................................. 202
HngSup Port Category ........................................................................................................................ 202
HngSup Port Type .............................................................................................................................. 202
HngSup Rule Type .............................................................................................................................. 203
HngSup Strict Face Selection ............................................................................................................. 203
HngSup Support Type ........................................................................................................................ 203
HngSup Type Selection Rule .............................................................................................................. 203
HVAC Component Types .................................................................................................................... 203
HVAC Lining Material .......................................................................................................................... 204
HVAC Part Data Basis ........................................................................................................................ 204
HVAC Part Generation Basis .............................................................................................................. 204
HVAC Width and Depth Basis ............................................................................................................ 204
Icarus Column Base Option ................................................................................................................ 204
Icarus Concrete Type .......................................................................................................................... 205
Icarus Exclude End Bent ..................................................................................................................... 205
Icarus Grating Type ............................................................................................................................ 205
Icarus Pipe Rack Type ........................................................................................................................ 205
Icarus Struct Steel Analysis ................................................................................................................ 205
Icarus Third Column ............................................................................................................................ 205
IFCAspectCodeValue ......................................................................................................................... 205
Contents


IFC Process Status ............................................................................................................................. 206
IFC Required Action ............................................................................................................................ 206
IFC Type ............................................................................................................................................. 206
Ignore Boundaries ............................................................................................................................... 206
Industry Commodity Code Option ....................................................................................................... 206
Inlet Port Geometry Type .................................................................................................................... 207
Installation Responsibility .................................................................................................................... 207
Instrument Functional Type ................................................................................................................ 207
Insulation Material ............................................................................................................................... 207
Insulation Purpose .............................................................................................................................. 207
Insulation Temperature Basis ............................................................................................................. 207
Insulation Thickness Basis .................................................................................................................. 208
IntelliShip Data Integrity Msgs ............................................................................................................ 208
IntelliShip Msgs ................................................................................................................................... 208
Interior Surface Treatment .................................................................................................................. 208
Is Bend Planar..................................................................................................................................... 208
Jacketed Closure Method ................................................................................................................... 209
Jacketed Piping Basis ......................................................................................................................... 209
Lining Material ..................................................................................................................................... 209
Load Case Liquid Pressure ................................................................................................................. 209
Load Case Sea Pressure .................................................................................................................... 209
Load Span Classification .................................................................................................................... 210
Longitudinal Beam Category ............................................................................................................... 210
Longitudinal Bulkhead Category ......................................................................................................... 210
Longitudinal Profile Category .............................................................................................................. 210
Longitudinal Seam Category ............................................................................................................... 210
Longitudinal Tube Category ................................................................................................................ 210
Loose Material Requirements ............................................................................................................. 210
Mach Bolt Length Round Off Option ................................................................................................... 211
Manufacturer ....................................................................................................................................... 211
Manufacturing Method ........................................................................................................................ 211
Map Type ............................................................................................................................................ 211
Material Description Builder Option .................................................................................................... 212
Materials Grade................................................................................................................................... 212
Materials of Construction Class .......................................................................................................... 212
Materials Type..................................................................................................................................... 212
Member Fireproofing Application Method ........................................................................................... 213
Member Fireproofing Application Type ............................................................................................... 213
Member Fireproofing Exposure Type ................................................................................................. 213
Member Orientation ............................................................................................................................ 213
Methods of Jacket Pipe Construction ................................................................................................. 213
Methods of Trimming .......................................................................................................................... 214
Min Bend To Bend Tangent Len Option ............................................................................................. 214
Mirror Behavior Option ........................................................................................................................ 214
Misc Requisition Classification ............................................................................................................ 215
Multiport Valve Op Req ....................................................................................................................... 215
Note Purpose ...................................................................................................................................... 215
Nozzle Entrance Type ......................................................................................................................... 215
Nozzle Flange Type ............................................................................................................................ 215
Nozzle Function .................................................................................................................................. 215
Nut Creation Option ............................................................................................................................ 216
Nut Option ........................................................................................................................................... 216
Nut Type .............................................................................................................................................. 216
Contents


Open or Blind Spacer Install State ...................................................................................................... 216
Opening Category ............................................................................................................................... 216
Orifice Flange Tap Orientation ............................................................................................................ 217
Outlet Port Geometry Type ................................................................................................................. 217
Painting Responsibility ........................................................................................................................ 217
Part Class Types ................................................................................................................................. 217
Part Data Basis ................................................................................................................................... 217
Part Data Source................................................................................................................................. 218
Pipe Bend Radius By User Option ...................................................................................................... 218
Pipe Bend Radius Multiplier Option .................................................................................................... 218
Pipe Bend Type................................................................................................................................... 218
Pipe Bending Machine Type ............................................................................................................... 218
Pipe Stock Usage................................................................................................................................ 219
Piping Commodity Catalog Part Number Basis Option ...................................................................... 219
Piping Commodity Override Option .................................................................................................... 219
Piping Commodity Procurement Data Option ..................................................................................... 219
Piping Commodity Type ...................................................................................................................... 220
Piping Point Usage ............................................................................................................................. 221
Piping Spec Status .............................................................................................................................. 221
Piping Spec Version Management Option .......................................................................................... 221
Piping Specification Notes Option....................................................................................................... 222
Plane Of Flip ....................................................................................................................................... 222
Plane of Turn ....................................................................................................................................... 222
Plate Part Category ............................................................................................................................. 222
Pressure Rating .................................................................................................................................. 222
Profile Part Category ........................................................................................................................... 223
ProfileEncasementType ...................................................................................................................... 223
Property Categories ............................................................................................................................ 223
Property Categories ............................................................................................................................ 223
Purchase Length Basis Option ........................................................................................................... 224
Rear End Type .................................................................................................................................... 224
Reference Plane View Directions ....................................................................................................... 224
Reporting Requirement Basis ............................................................................................................. 225
Reporting Type.................................................................................................................................... 225
Requisition Responsibility ................................................................................................................... 225
Requisition Type ................................................................................................................................. 225
Respect Assembly Boundaries ........................................................................................................... 226
Revision History Notes Option ............................................................................................................ 226
Ring Number ....................................................................................................................................... 226
Ring Profile Category .......................................................................................................................... 226
Rotation Offset Type ........................................................................................................................... 227
Route Direction ................................................................................................................................... 227
Route Layout ....................................................................................................................................... 227
Route on Face..................................................................................................................................... 227
Rule Class Type .................................................................................................................................. 228
Rule Type ............................................................................................................................................ 228
Schedule Thickness ............................................................................................................................ 228
Selection Basis.................................................................................................................................... 229
Shell Category..................................................................................................................................... 230
Ship Design Loading Condition Type ................................................................................................. 230
Short Code Hierarchy ......................................................................................................................... 231
Signal Type ......................................................................................................................................... 233
Size Reduction Preference ................................................................................................................. 234
Contents


Size Reduction Type ........................................................................................................................... 234
Slab Boundary Reference ................................................................................................................... 234
Slab Composition ................................................................................................................................ 234
Slab Continuity .................................................................................................................................... 234
Slab Corner Type ................................................................................................................................ 235
Slab Cross Section Symbol ................................................................................................................ 235
Slab Direction Reference .................................................................................................................... 235
Slab Face Position .............................................................................................................................. 235
Slab Fastener Type ............................................................................................................................. 236
Slab Layer Role................................................................................................................................... 236
Slab Manufacturing Process ............................................................................................................... 236
Slab Nosing Material ........................................................................................................................... 236
Slab Nosing Type ................................................................................................................................ 236
Slab Priority ......................................................................................................................................... 236
Slab Reference Direction .................................................................................................................... 237
SmartMarine 3D Data Integrity Msgs .................................................................................................. 237
SmartMarine 3D Msgs ........................................................................................................................ 237
Space Access Type ............................................................................................................................ 237
Space Adjacency Contact Type .......................................................................................................... 237
Space Adjacency Geometry Type ...................................................................................................... 237
Space Arrangement Orientation ......................................................................................................... 238
Space Arrangement Type ................................................................................................................... 238
Space Item Purpose ........................................................................................................................... 238
Space Physical Orientation Type ........................................................................................................ 238
Space Positional Relationship Type ................................................................................................... 239
Space Product Structure Type ............................................................................................................ 239
Spectacle Position .............................................................................................................................. 239
Spool Break by Control Point .............................................................................................................. 239
Spool Include Welded Parts ................................................................................................................ 239
Spool Sequence Type ......................................................................................................................... 240
Spooling Basis .................................................................................................................................... 240
Steamout Requirement ....................................................................................................................... 240
Stress Relief ........................................................................................................................................ 240
Stress Relief Requirement .................................................................................................................. 240
Struct 2L Back to Back Rule ............................................................................................................... 241
Struct AC Left Right Both .................................................................................................................... 241
Struct AC Pad Type ............................................................................................................................ 241
Struct AC Sizing Rule ......................................................................................................................... 241
Struct AC Splice Types ....................................................................................................................... 241
Struct AC To Do Messages ................................................................................................................ 241
Struct Alignment .................................................................................................................................. 241
Struct Boundary Conditions ................................................................................................................ 242
Struct Can Diameter Rule ................................................................................................................... 242
Struct Can Length Compute Method .................................................................................................. 242
Struct Can Type .................................................................................................................................. 242
Struct Cone Length Compute Method ................................................................................................ 242
Struct Compute Rule ........................................................................................................................... 242
Struct Continuity .................................................................................................................................. 243
Struct Coord Sys Reference ............................................................................................................... 243
Struct Custom Plate Part Type ........................................................................................................... 243
Struct End Releases ........................................................................................................................... 243
Struct Eqp To Do Messages ............................................................................................................... 243
Struct FC Chevron WPO ..................................................................................................................... 243
Contents


Struct FC End Controlling ................................................................................................................... 244
Struct FC Offset Along ........................................................................................................................ 244
Struct FC Offset Direction ................................................................................................................... 244
Struct FC Supported Edge .................................................................................................................. 244
Struct FC Supporting CPs ................................................................................................................... 244
Struct FC Supporting Side .................................................................................................................. 244
Struct FC To Do Messages ................................................................................................................. 245
Struct Feature Radius Type ................................................................................................................ 245
Struct Feature To Do Messages ......................................................................................................... 245
Struct Footing Comp Sizing Rule ........................................................................................................ 245
Struct Footing To Do Messages ......................................................................................................... 245
Struct Frm Conn Position Ref ............................................................................................................. 245
Struct Insulation Purpose .................................................................................................................... 246
Struct Member End Selection Rule ..................................................................................................... 246
Struct Member Position Rule .............................................................................................................. 246
Struct Plate Part To Do Messages...................................................................................................... 246
Struct Prismatic Footing Shapes......................................................................................................... 246
Struct SC To Do Messages ................................................................................................................ 246
Struct Wall Boundary Size .................................................................................................................. 247
Struct Wall Boundary Type ................................................................................................................. 248
Struct Wall Connection Type .............................................................................................................. 248
Struct Wall Reference Attribute ........................................................................................................... 248
StructInsulationSetbackReference...................................................................................................... 248
Structural Load Case Source .............................................................................................................. 249
Structural Member Priority .................................................................................................................. 249
Structural Member Type ..................................................................................................................... 249
Structural WPO Intersection Index ...................................................................................................... 249
Supplementary Nut Requirement........................................................................................................ 249
Supplementary Washer Requirement ................................................................................................. 250
Supply Responsibility .......................................................................................................................... 250
Surface Preparation ............................................................................................................................ 250
Tap End Stud Bolt Length Round Off Option ...................................................................................... 250
Testing Responsibility ......................................................................................................................... 250
Testing Type ....................................................................................................................................... 250
Tightness ............................................................................................................................................. 251
Transverse Beam Category ................................................................................................................ 251
Transverse Bulkhead Category .......................................................................................................... 251
Transverse Profile Category ............................................................................................................... 251
Transverse Seam Category ................................................................................................................ 251
Transverse Tube Category ................................................................................................................. 251
Tray Specification Type ...................................................................................................................... 251
Type .................................................................................................................................................... 252
Undefined Service Limits Rule Option ................................................................................................ 252
Utility BOM Units ................................................................................................................................. 252
Utility Brace Orient .............................................................................................................................. 253
Utility_Holes ........................................................................................................................................ 253
Utility_Nuts .......................................................................................................................................... 253
Utility_PlateThickness ......................................................................................................................... 254
Utility_Tabs ......................................................................................................................................... 254
Utility_YesNo ....................................................................................................................................... 254
Valve Flow Pattern .............................................................................................................................. 254
Valve Model Number .......................................................................................................................... 254
Valve Operator Geometric Industry Standard ..................................................................................... 255
Contents


Valve Operator Is Rotatable ................................................................................................................ 255
Valve Operator Part Data Basis .......................................................................................................... 255
Valve Operator Type ........................................................................................................................... 255
Valve Port Option ................................................................................................................................ 255
Valve Trim ........................................................................................................................................... 256
Vendor ................................................................................................................................................. 256
Vertical Beam Category ...................................................................................................................... 256
Vertical Profile Category ..................................................................................................................... 256
Vertical Seam Category ...................................................................................................................... 256
Vertical Tube Category ....................................................................................................................... 256
Vessel Head Type ............................................................................................................................... 257
Voltage Grade ..................................................................................................................................... 257
Washer Creation Option ..................................................................................................................... 257
Washer Option .................................................................................................................................... 257
Washer Type ....................................................................................................................................... 257
WBS Assignment ................................................................................................................................ 258
WBS Auto Grouping Rule Type .......................................................................................................... 258
WBS Item Purpose ............................................................................................................................. 258
WBS Project Purpose ......................................................................................................................... 258
WBS Pull In Associated Items ............................................................................................................ 259
Weld Type ........................................................................................................................................... 259
Welding Procedure Specification ........................................................................................................ 259
Welding Requirement ......................................................................................................................... 260
Appendix: Units of Measure ................................................................................................................... 261
Appendix: Name Limitations in Reference Data .................................................................................. 293
Appendix: Other Reference Data ........................................................................................................... 295
Appendix: Questions and Answers about Reference Data ................................................................. 307
Appendix: Metadata Consistency .......................................................................................................... 311
Appendix: Importing SmartPlant Reference Data Specs into SmartPlant 3D ................................... 313
General Setup ..................................................................................................................................... 313
Exporting from the SmartPlant Reference Data Standard Database ................................................. 314
EN/DIN Specifications .................................................................................................................. 315
Bulkloading into SmartPlant 3D .......................................................................................................... 320
EN/DIN Bulkloading ...................................................................................................................... 321
Glossary ................................................................................................................................................... 325
Index ......................................................................................................................................................... 345

Contents



This document is a user's guide for SmartPlant 3D reference data. The purpose of this
document is to describe how to customize the reference data so that it fits your company or
project.
For information about the specific reference data for each discipline, see the reference data
guides available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.
Document Audience
This document is intended for advanced users who should:
Have a good understanding of Microsoft Office products, especially Microsoft Excel.
Be familiar with SmartPlant 3D database architecture and relational databases in general.
Related Documents
For more information about SmartPlant 3D, please see the following documents:
SmartPlant 3D Installation Guide
SmartPlant 3D Symbols Reference Data Guide
SmartPlant 3D/SmartMarine 3D Programmer's Guide

Preface
Preface



SmartPlant 3D Documentation Set
SmartPlant 3D documentation is available as Adobe PDF files. The content is the same as
online Help. To access these PDF documents, click Help > Printable Guides in the software.
The documentation set is divided into four categories:
Administrative guides contain information about installing, configuring, customizing, and
troubleshooting SmartPlant 3D.
User's guides provide command reference and how-to information for working in each
SmartPlant 3D task.
Reference data guides define the reference data workbooks. Not all tasks have reference
data.
ISOGEN guides
Administrative Guides
SmartPlant 3D Installation Guide - Provides instructions on installing and configuring the
software.
Project Management User's Guide - Provides instructions for setting up the databases, creating
permission groups, backing up and restoring project data, assigning access permissions to the
model, defining and managing locations for Global Workshare, and version migration.
SmartPlant 3D Global Workshare Guide - Provides instructions for setting up the software and
the databases to work in a workshare environment.
SmartPlant 3D Interference Checking Guide - Provides information on installing, configuring,
and using the interference detection service.
SmartPlant 3D Integration Reference Guide - Provides information about installing, configuring,
and using SmartPlant 3D in an integrated environment.
SmartPlant 3D Interpreting Human Piping Specifications - Provides information about how to
interpret human piping specifications so that you can create the corresponding piping
specification in the software.
SmartPlant 3D Export to PDMS - Provides information about how to export model data from
SmartPlant 3D to PDMS. Specific guidelines relating to best practices and known limitations of
the export functionality are also included.
SmartPlant 3D Point Cloud Reference - Provides information for referencing point cloud files
provided by point cloud vendors in SmartPlant 3D.
SmartPlant 3D Troubleshooting Guide - Provides information on how to resolve errors that you
may encounter in the software by documenting troubleshooting tips, error messages, and to do
list messages.
SmartPlant 3D Plant Design System (PDS) Guide - Provides all information needed to use PDS
with SmartPlant 3D. Topics include referencing active PDS projects in SmartPlant 3D, exporting
PDS data and importing that data into SmartPlant 3D, and converting PDS reference data to
SmartPlant 3D reference data.
SmartPlant 3D/SmartMarine 3D Programmer's Guide - Provides information about custom
commands, naming rules, and symbol programming.
User's Guides
Catalog User's Guide - Provides information about viewing, editing, and creating reference data
and select lists (codelists).
Common User's Guide - Provides information about defining workspaces, manipulating views,
and running reports.
Preface


Electrical User's Guide - Provides information about routing electrical cable, cableway, cable
tray, and conduit.
Equipment and Furnishings User's Guide - Provides information about placing equipment.
Grids User's Guide - Provides instructions for creating coordinate systems, elevation grid
planes, vertical grid planes, radial cylinders, radial planes, grid arcs, and grid lines.
Hangers and Supports User's Guide - Provides instructions on placing piping, duct, and
cableway supports in the model.
HVAC User's Guide - Provides instructions for routing HVAC duct.
Orthographic Drawings User's Guide - Provides information about creating and managing
orthographic drawings.
Piping Isometric Drawings User's Guide - Provides information about creating and managing
piping isometric drawings.
Piping User's Guide - Provides instructions for routing pipe and placing valves, taps, and pipe
joints.
Reports User's Guide - Provides information about creating and managing spreadsheet reports.
Space Management User's Guide - Provides instructions for placing space objects such as
areas, zones, interference volumes, and drawing volumes in the model.
Structural Analysis User's Guide - Provides instructions for defining loads, load cases, load
combinations, and the importing and exporting of analytical data.
Structure User's Guide - Provides instructions for placing structural members such as: beams,
columns, slabs, openings, stairs, ladders, equipment foundations, and handrails.
Systems and Specifications User's Guide - Provides instructions for creating systems and
selecting which specifications are available for each system type.
Reference Data Guides
SmartPlant 3D 2D Symbols User's Guide - Provides command reference information and
procedural instructions for creating 2D symbols used to represent collars, clips, profiles,
brackets, and other items.
SmartPlant 3D 2D Symbols Reference Data Guide - Provides information about the
two-dimensional symbols used in all tasks.
Drawings and Reports Reference Data Guide - Provides information about reports reference
data.
Electrical Reference Data Guide - Provides information about electrical cable, cableway, cable
tray, and conduit reference data.
Electrical 3D Symbols Reference - Provides information about the cable tray and conduit 3D
symbols that are available.
Equipment and Furnishings Reference Data Guide - Provides information about equipment
reference data.
Equipment 3D Symbols Reference - Provides information about the equipment, equipment
component, design shapes, and design aides 3D symbols that are available.
Hangers and Supports Reference Data Guide - Provides information about hangers and
supports reference data.
Hangers and Supports 3D Symbols Reference - Provides information about the hanger and
support 3D symbols that are available.
HVAC Reference Data Guide - Provides information about HVAC reference data.
HVAC 3D Symbols Reference - Provides information about the HVAC 3D symbols that are
available.
Preface


SmartPlant 3D Reference Data Guide - Provides instructions about the Bulkload utility,
codelists, and the reference data common to several disciplines.
Piping Reference Data Guide - Provides information about piping reference data including piping
specifications, piping specification rules, piping parts, and piping symbols.
Piping 3D Symbols Reference - Provides information about the piping 3D symbols that are
available.
Space Management Reference Data Guide - Provides information about space management
reference data.
Structure Reference Data Guide - Provides information about structural reference data.
Structure 3D Symbols Reference - Provides information about the stair, ladder, footings, and
equipment foundation 3D symbols that are available.
ISOGEN Guides
Symbol Keys Reference Guide - Provides information about the symbol keys for isometric
drawings. This guide is from Alias, the makers of ISOGEN.

Preface



Documentation Comments
We welcome comments or suggestions about this documentation. You can send us an email at:
PPMdoc@intergraph.com.

Preface



The following changes have been made to reference data.
Version 2011 (9.0) Service Pack 1
Added information on exporting files from SmartPlant Reference Data and loading them into
SmartPlant 3D. For more information, see Appendix: Importing SmartPlant Reference Data
Specs into SmartPlant 3D (on page 313). (P2 CP:171193)
You can now modify UserClassName and OccClassName for part classes using the
bulkload utility with the Modify method. For more information, see Using the Bulkload Modes
(on page 79). (P3 CP:62503)
The Symbols share on the reference data server has been renamed SharedContent. This
document has been updated to reflect this change.
New select list has been added: Door Frame Position (on page 170).
You must follow a specific order when you bulkload Hangers and Supports reference data.
For more information, see Minimum Reference Data (on page 54). (P3 CP: 190442)
Added information about the ApprovalReason.xls file. For more information, see
ApprovalReason (on page 150). (P2 CP:46112)
The Excel Migration Tool is no longer delivered with the product. This document has been
updated to reflect this change. (P2 CP:200373)

What's New in Reference Data
What's New in Reference Data



S E C T I O N 1
In order to use the software for process design, you must have reference data. Reference data
can be graphical or non-graphical in nature. For example, reference data includes graphical
symbols that you can place in the model, such as equipment or piping components. Reference
data also includes non-graphical, tabular data, such as catalog data and specification data.
Catalog data includes the parts that you place in the model, such as piping components and
equipment. Specification data includes the rules that govern how those parts are placed and
connected.
Understanding how the reference data in the software works is essential to effective use of the
software. For example, when you route pipe, nearly everything you see on a Properties dialog
box comes from reference data. While you route pipe, you are also constrained by piping
specification rules in reference data.
The software delivers the reference data in Microsoft Excel workbooks. In this flexible format,
you can edit the reference data, as well as add your own. For example, Excel allows you to copy
entire sheets of data and then modify some parameters. Another way to add or edit the
reference data is to use the commands in the Catalog task in the software. For more
information, see the documentation available for the Catalog task.
The catalog information is also user-customizable in terms of its data structure. You can
organize the delivered reference data into groups in the way that makes sense for your
company or project. For example, you can group the objects by type. These groups are often
referred to as classes.
You can migrate PDS piping specifications to use with the current software. The software
provides a tool that allows you to populate dimension table rules to update industry commodity
codes. For more information, see Using the PDS Translator (on page 29).
Solid Edge, Visual Basic, and SmartPlant 2D Symbols (Symbol 2D) are important tools for
creating reference data. You can use Solid Edge to create parametric or non-parametric
symbols; however, client computers used to modify Solid Edge parametric symbols after
placement must have Solid Edge loaded. Visual Basic provides programming tools for creating
more sophisticated, parameterized parts. Both Solid Edge and Visual Basic are used for
creating three- dimensional symbols. Symbol 2D provides the ability to create layer-based cross
sections for use in the Structure task.
To add a large amount of reference data to the catalog, use the Bulkload utility to transfer Excel
workbook data into the Catalog database. Each workbook is organized in a particular way in
order to specify the objects, their properties, and the relationship of the objects to the rest of the
hierarchy.
Understanding Reference Data


The following picture shows the overall workflow of creating reference data for the software. You
can create graphical data in Symbol 2D, Solid Edge, or Visual Basic (A). Excel workbooks
contain tabular data (B). You use the Bulkload utility (C) to populate the Catalog database (D).
Using the software, you place items in the Model database (E).

(A) - Graphical data
(B) - Tabular data
(C) - Bulkload utility
(D) - Catalog database and schema
(E) - Model database
See Also
Looking at How the Catalog Database Fits In (on page 27)
Learning about Reference Data Types (on page 26)
Learning about Reference Data Types
Reference data can be graphical or non-graphical in nature. Graphical data includes Visual
Basic .dll files, Solid Edge .par and .asm files, and Symbol 2D .sym files. Non-graphical data
includes Microsoft Excel workbooks.
Graphical Data
The software supports multiple ways of representing a graphical symbol.
Visual Basic (VB) Symbols
Routing components are typically represented using a VB definition of the symbol. VB provides
an easy-to-use language to parametrically define the graphical representation of the symbol and
its connect points. Many VB symbols are delivered with the software.
Solid Edge Symbols
"One-off" equipment design can be done using Solid Edge, which provides several graphical
primitives to build the geometry of the equipment definition. The geometry can be parametrically
defined but requires Solid Edge to be loaded on every client workstation that will be used to
place the equipment in the model. Or, you must make sure that every possible size has been
generated and cached in the catalog.
SmartPlant 2D Symbols
Cross-section symbols for structural applications can be defined in the SmartPlant 2D Symbols
application. Using the Variable Table, you can parametrically define and constrain the geometry
of the symbols.


Non-graphical Data
This type of data includes specifications, rules, and other tabular information.
Classes and Parts
A part class is a group of related parts. For example, a part class can be an Inline Centrifugal
Fan. The parts could be models that run 1/3, 1/6, or 1/8 horsepower. Each part is a separate,
selectable object in the Catalog.
Specifications and Rules
Specifications are the collection of standards for the types of objects placed in a model. Rules
determine how the specifications are applied. You can customize both rules and specifications
based on what makes sense for your company. For information about piping specifications and
rules, see the Piping Reference Data Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides
command in the software. Other rules include interference checking rules and naming rules,
both described in this guide.
Tables
The reference data tables in the Catalog contain non-graphical property data. For example, the
codelists in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook are stored in tables in the Catalog database.
See Also
Understanding Reference Data (on page 25)
Looking at How the Catalog Database Fits In (on page 27)

Looking at How the Catalog Database Fits In
The software can use up to seven databases: Catalog, Catalog Schema, Model, Site, Site
Schema, Reports, and Reports Schema.
The Catalog database contains reference data, which includes part dimensions and industry
standards. This Reference Data Guide is about the data in the Catalog database.
Using the Bulkload utility, you can create a starting Catalog database and schema from a data
file delivered with the software. You can use your own custom Excel workbooks and custom
symbols to create a new Catalog database specifically for your project.
After creating the Catalog database, you can modify the delivered reference data. Two methods
exist to modify the reference data: edit the workbooks in Excel and bulk load the data, or use the
commands in the Catalog task to edit the data (bulkload is not necessary in that case).
The Model database contains all instances of parts in the physical model. The Catalog and
Model databases share the same schema.
The Site database and schema are containers for the other databases. The Site database
stores work-breakdown and user access for the model. A site database can have multiple model
and catalog databases. Typically, there is one site database set for each customer location. For
information about site databases, see the Project Management User's Guide available from the
Help > Printable Guides command in the software.
The Reports database and schema interact with the other databases to generate tabular reports
from the model data. For information about reports, see the Reports User's Guide and the
Drawings and Reports Reference Data Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides
command in the software.


To view the hierarchy and contents of the Catalog, start the Catalog task. To view the Site
database, start the Project Management task. For more information about the functionality in
these tasks, see the Catalog Help and Project Management Help files.
For creation date and size information on each database, you can open SQL Server Enterprise
Manager. This software also provides further technical details about the relational tables in each
database.
The following picture shows the relationships of the databases:

(A) - Reports database
(B) - Site database
(C) - Model database
(D) - Catalog database
(E) - Site Schema database
(F) - Catalog Schema database
(G) - Reports Schema database
See Also
Learning about Reference Data Types (on page 26)


S E C T I O N 2

The PDS (Plant Design System) Translator allows you to migrate your PDS piping specifications
to SmartPlant 3D piping reference data. The tool also allows you to populate dimension table
name rules and to update industry commodity codes.
The PDS translation process requires the specification writer to make some manual
edits to complete the conversion.
Workflow
1. Create PDS Export data files (on page 30).
2. Edit the Piping Translation Rules Workbook (on page 30).
3. Populate Dimension Table name rules (on page 31).
Populating the dimension table name rules is performed only once, before the
translation process.
4. Translate PDS reference data (on page 32).
You may need to run the translation step a number of times.
5. After translation, define necessary manual information (see Define Manual Information after
Translation (on page 33)). For information about required reference data, refer to Required
Worksheets (on page 35).
6. Create Commodity Codes (on page 39) (optional).
7. Bulk load the translated workbooks: piping specification data, piping commodity data, and
codelist data.
8. Run the Verify Consistency command in the Catalog task. For more information, see the
Catalog User's Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides command.
9. Run the PDS Model Data Exporter, and import the PDS model data into the software. For
more information, see the Common User's Guide available from the Help > Printable
Guides command.
See Also
PDS Piping Reference Data Translator Dialog Box (on page 39)
Using the PDS Translator


Create PDS Export Data Files
Create the following export data files, and place them in the ..\PDSAsciifiles folder:
implied.data
taps.data
us_lgbom.data
us_shbom.data
code148.edt
code 499.edt
PD_tbl_list
Physical Data Library text list (rename PD_tbl_lst and save)
Piping Job Spec Library test list (rename PD_tbl_lst and save)
PCD files (*.pcd)
PMC files (Any file(s) with a .pmc extension, in the PDSAsciiFiles directory, will be
translated.)
Table checker report list
Table Checker Files text list -
Table checker output files (format table_chk_2)
Edit the Piping Translation Rules Workbook
1. In Windows Explorer, browse to [Product Directory]\CatalogData\PDSTranslator\Docs.
2. Open the applicable Piping Translation Rules workbook (one is for the DIN standard; the
other is ANSI).
3. Modify the worksheets as follows.
Cap Screw Commodity Codes sheet - Edit this sheet to match your requirements. The
delivered workbook is the Intergraph "standard".
Dimension Table Names sheet - Remove all the delivered file names.
Remove the gasket gap tables from the
Dimension Table Names sheet. Also, remove the gasket gap table name from the PDS
PMC file, and replace it with the default gasket gap.
Elimination of Weight Code sheet - Map the user-defined weight codes from PDS to the
applicable SmartPlant 3D codes.
End Preparation sheet - Edit this sheet to match your requirements.
Engineering Tag sheet - Modify the mapping from PDS valves to SmartPlant 3D tag
numbers. The delivered sheet contains Intergraph "standard" valves.
Fabrication Category sheet - Add the user-defined fabrication categories, and apply the
fabrication types and responsibilities as necessary.
File Names sheet - Edit the input file names as required, and remove unnecessary records.
Make sure that all file names are correctly specified and that you do not have more files than
needed.


Miscellaneous sheet - Edit the values on this sheet as necessary.
The size-dependent commodity codes flag refers only to the PCD format, and not to
the Project Administrator option in PDS. Set this option to YES only if you have ALL
individual NPD values in the PCD (for example, when you have all NPD values for piping
commodities from 2" to 6"). The software includes a worksheet for size-dependent codes
from pdtable_212. You must enter sizedep.txt (or other file name) on the File Names
worksheet in the appropriate option row. This file is a report of size-dependent commodity
codes.
PDS Commodity Name sheet - Add any user-created or modified AABBCC codes as
required. Also, make sure all AABBCC codes used in your PDS specs are there.
PDS Model Code sheet - Add any user-created or modified Model codes as required. Also,
make sure all Model codes used in your PDS specs are there.
Wall Thickness Reihle Number sheet - This sheet is only applicable for DIN specs.
Weight Table Name Format sheet - Edit codelists and commodity codes based on the
specific customization. Commodity code issues may exist for cap screws, weight codes, end
preparations, valve engineering tags, and fabrication categories and responsibilities.
You will need to revise and add information as required for commodity codes.
Nipples must be manually added to the Dimension Table Names sheet if the table checker
was run without weight codes. In addition, blind flanges must be manually added to the
Dimension Table Names sheet if the table checker was run without weight codes.
Populate Dimension Table Name Rules
Before you start this procedure, edit the AllCodeLists.xls workbook to match any customization
in the PDS project.
1. In Windows Explorer, navigate to the software installation folder.
2. Under CatalogData\PDSTranslator\Bin, double-click PDSDatatranslator.exe.
The Workstation setup includes the PDSTranslator folder only if you have specified the
Project Management option during installation.
3. Select the Populate 'Dimension Table Names' Rule option on the PDS Piping Reference
Data Translator dialog box
4. In the PDS ASCII Files Location box, browse to the location that stores your PDS
reference data.
5. In the PDS Translation Rules box, browse to the location that stores the edited PDS
translation rules, which are in Excel workbook (.xls) format. Enter the name of a workbook.
The software includes two translation rules workbooks in the
CatalogData\PDSTranslator\Docs folder: Piping Translation Rules DIN.xls and Piping
Translation Rules.xls. You can edit these workbooks according to your project.
6. In the Translator Error Log box, browse to the location where you want the log file stored,
and enter the name of the log file.
7. Click Populate.



Translate PDS Reference Data
Before you start this procedure, edit the AllCodeLists.xls workbook to match any customization
in the PDS project.
3. Select the Translate PDS Reference Data option on the PDS Piping Reference Data
Translator dialog box.
4. Under Commodity Code Option, specify either the contractor commodity codes or the
industry commodity codes.
5. In the PDS ASCII Files Location box, browse to the location that stores your PDS
reference data.
6. In the PDS Translation Rules box, browse to the location that stores the edited PDS
translation rules, which are in Excel workbook (.xls) format. Enter the name of a workbook.
The software includes two translation rules workbooks in the
CatalogData\PDSTranslator\Docs folder: Piping Translation Rules DIN.xls and Piping
Translation Rules.xls. You can edit these workbooks according to your project.
7. In the PDS Code Lists box, browse to the location where the codelist information is stored,
and enter the name of a workbook.

The translation process does not convert PDS codelists.
The process uses two SmartPlant 3D codelists that relate to dimensional data. These
codelists are located in AllCodeLists.xls.
8. In the SmartPlant 3D Piping Excel File box, browse to the location where you want the
Excel workbooks to be stored, and enter the name of a workbook. The format is Excel
workbook format (.xls).
If you provide a name for the Excel file, the translator uses this name as a prefix for the
names of the generated Excel workbooks. For example, if you enter "PdsTranslation.xls",
the utility exports two files: PdsTranslation_Catalog.xls and
PdsTranslation_Specification.xls.
10. Click Translate. When the process finishes, the status bar on the translator displays
Finished.
11. Review the error log.
Based on the errors, you can decide to: 1) Revise the input data, delete the output files,
and re-translate, OR 2) edit the output files.



Define Manual Information after Translation

The specification writer usually performs this procedure.
For more information about required reference data, see Required Worksheets (on page
35).
1. Open the Piping Catalog and Specification workbooks.
2. In the Catalog workbook, do the following:
Add worksheets as necessary. For more information, see Required Worksheets (on
page 35).
Add oa:Rotation to all valves with operators.
Add oa:Angle to all elbows.
Add oa:SpectaclePosition to all spec blinds.
Add oa:EccentricOffsetBasis to all eccentric reducers.
On the Piping Female End Generic Data sheet, define values for socket offset, thread
depth, hub outside diameter, and hub thickness.
On the Piping Bolted End Generic Data sheet, define values for flange thickness
tolerance, flange face projection, raised face diameter, flange groove width, standard
nut height for studs, standard washer thickness for studs, standard bolt extension for
studs, standard nut height for machine bolts, standard washer thickness for machine
bolts, and body outside diameter.

Change the bolt extension to address the use of nut height and washer thickness.
Add the drilling template data for PDS through-bolted ends without bolt holes.
If "almost precise" STUD tables were used in PDS, remove the drilling template
data.
On the Bolt Part Data sheet, define the values for the maximum temperature, fluid
code, ring number, and type any comments as necessary.
On the Gasket Part Data sheet, define the values for ring number and gasket type.
If you chose to use the SP3Dolet symbol definition for all your olets, you must manually
add the other two required symbol input dimensions (MajorBodyDiameter and
HoleinHeader) that the translator does not add to the olet part sheets. Failure to add the
two additional dimensions will cause the placement of olets to fail. As an alternative, you
can use the SP3DOletG symbol which only requires the same single input dimension
(FacetoHeaderSurface) as PDS.
3. In the Specification workbook, do the following:
Add worksheets as necessary. For more information, see Required Worksheets (on
page 35).
Edit the Bend Angles sheet as necessary.
Edit the Weld Clearance sheet as necessary.
Edit the Pipe Takedown Parts sheet as necessary.
Check the Piping Commodity Filter sheet for zero entries for RCP (red connect point)
for olets. For some olet type components, the translator may miss the second connect
point data, so you must manually verify the correct mapping.
On the Piping Commodity Material Control Data sheet, define the values for cap
screw diameter and for tapped hole depth.


On the Bolt Selection Filter sheet, define the value for bolt priority. Also, complete the
comments as necessary.

If the PDS translator encounters two through-bolted fittings requiring a complete
substitution of cap screws; and both through-bolted fittings have identical bolted
ends in terms of end preparation, pressure rating, and end standard; and the two
through-bolted fittings imply different cap screw commodity codes in PDS, only one
cap screw record will be created in the Bolt Selection Filter. The PDS Translator will
arbitrarily choose one of the two cap screw commodity codes, and the specification
writer must manually add the second cap screw by use of the bolt option.
If the PDS translator encounters a through-bolted fitting requiring a complete
substitution of cap screws; and the through-bolted fitting implies two different cap
screw commodity codes in PDS based on two different size ranges, only one cap
screw record will be created in the Bolt Selection Filter. The PDS Translator will
arbitrarily choose one of the two cap screw commodity codes, and the specification
writer must manually add the second cap screw by use of a different size range.
On the Gasket Selection Filter sheet, define the value for ring number. The
maximum temperature was used as the ring number in the delivered PDS data, but
a rule has not been defined to translate from the commodity code and maximum
temperature to ring number.
On the Permissible Taps Data sheet, define the value for IsPreferredTap.
Optionally, edit the Index sheet. Add or edit hyperlinks.
Optionally, edit the Revision History sheet.
4. Save the catalog and specification workbooks and exit.
5. Open the AllCodeLists.xls workbook and edit as necessary. Save and exit.

For the CL51 through CL56 rating items, the rating must be changed to a
schedule/thickness value.
PDS geometry standards must be replaced with industry standards. The following table
shows the corresponding US Practice Geometry standards.
6 = 'PDS- P1'
7 = 'PDS- P2'
8 = 'PDS- P3'
11 = 'PDS- I1'
12 = 'PDS- I2'
13 = 'PDS- I3'
16 = 'PDS- Op1'
17 = 'PDS- Op2'
18 = 'PDS- Op3'
For reinforcing pads using a geometry standard of 6 (or other), the value can be removed
from the PipingCommodityMatlControlData worksheet in column P. This record is not
required for SmartPlant 3D.
Items using any user-defined or customized geometry standards require that the values are
added to the AllCodelists workbook.


Required Worksheets
This topic provides information about the worksheets that are required for loading into a new
Catalog database.
If you are translating reference data from PDS, this information will be helpful as you edit the
output from the translator.
prefix_Catalog.xls
Worksheet Name Comments
CustomClassInterfaceList
CustomInterfaces
CatalogRoot
GUIDs
Revision History (optional)
Part Classes - dependent on the input
files for the translation
Worksheets listed in bold are required.


prefix_Specification.xls
NPDEquivalence
MaterialsData
Bolt Extension
StandardNotesData
PipingMaterialsClassData
BoltCommodityCodeSubstRule
PipingCommodityMatlControlData
ValveOperatorMatlControlData
PipingSpecialtyClassData
PipingInstrumentClassData
PipingCommodityProcurementData
DefaultProjectOptions
ShortCodeHierarchyRule
PreferredStudBoltLength
StudBoltCalculationTolerance
PreferredMachBoltLength
MachBoltCalculationTolerance
PreferredCapScrewLength
CapScrewCalculationTolerance
WeldModelRepresentation
PortAlignment
SlipOnFlangeSetbackDistance
WeldTypeRule
DefaultChangeOfDirection
DefaultCommoditySelectionRule
MinimumPipeLength
MinPipeLengthPurchase
FieldFitLength
MatingPorts
FlaredPipe
FluidDensity
BoltExtension
These worksheets are project-related
worksheets in the specification reference
data.
Bulleted worksheets are present in the
translated output file.
NPDEquivalence and MaterialsData
worksheets are present in the output;
however, they may be empty in the
translated workbook.
Worksheets in bold are the minimum
required.
Worksheets in italics are required only if
the corresponding commodities exist in
the piping commodity filter. For example,
if stud bolts are present, then the
PreferredStudBoltLength worksheet is
required.


prefix_Specification.xls
Service Limits
Pipe Nominal Diameters
Pipe Branch
Permissible Taps
Joint Quality Factor
ThicknessDataRule
ReinforcingPadData
Reinforcing Weld Data
PipingCommodityFilter
BoltSelectionFilter
NutSelectionFilter
WasherSelectionFilter
GasketSelectionFilter
ClampSelectionFilter
CorrosionAllowance
MinimumPipeLengthRulePerSpec
MinPipeLengthPurchasePerSpec
PipeBendingElongation
PipeBendingElongationPerSpec
PipeBendRadii
BendAngles
DefaultChangeOfDirectionPerSpec
WeldClearanceRule
InsideSurfaceTreatment
ServiceLimitsForJackets
PipeBranchForJackets
PermissibleJacketAndJumperSizes
PermissibleJacketSizeExceptions
FlaredPipePerSpec
PortAlignmentPerSpec
FieldLiningThickness
PipeTakedownParts
These worksheets are specification-
related worksheets in the specification
reference data.
The bulleted worksheets are present in
the translated output file.
Worksheets in this row are required for
each piping material class.
Worksheets in bold are the minimum
required.



AllCodeLists.xls
All worksheets The translator does not convert codelists. Make sure that the
codelists meet the project requirements.
AllCommon.xls
Material
OutfittingCrossSections
The required worksheets are shown in bold.
The AllCommon.xls workbook also contains
worksheets with delivered generic data for piping.
BulkLoadIsoKeys.xls
All worksheets This workbook is required for isometric drawing extraction.
Equipment.xls
All worksheets This workbook is required for equipment placement.
GenericNamingRules.xls
All worksheets Required.
InsulationData.xls
All worksheets This workbook is required if you want to have insulation
specifications.
StructCrossSections-AISC-LRFD-3.0.xls
All worksheets This workbook is required for placement of US steel sections.



Create Commodity Codes
3. Select the Create Commodity Codes option on the PDS Piping Reference Data
Translator dialog box.
4. Under Commodity Code Option, specify either the contractor commodity codes or the
industry commodity codes.
5. In the PDS Code Lists box, browse to the location where the PDS codelist information is
stored, and enter the name of a workbook. The codelists are in Excel workbook format (.xls).
6. In the SmartPlant 3D Piping Specification Data box, browse to the location that stores
your piping specification workbook (xls). Enter the name of a workbook.
The software includes template files for piping specification and catalog data in the
CatalogData\PDSTranslator\Bin folder: Piping Specification Template.xls and Piping
Catalog Template.xls.
7. In the SmartPlant 3D Piping Catalog Data box, browse to the location that stores your
piping catalog workbook (.xls). Enter the name of a workbook.
9. Click Create.

For the industry commodity code option, you can view the resulting Piping Commodity Filter
sheet and the Pipe Stock sheet to see the updated commodity codes. The Bolt Selection
Filter and Gasket Selection Filter commodity codes are also translated.
For the contractor code option, the following items will not generate a new commodity code
unless the table checker output generated table names for these items: nipples, blind
flanges, reinforcing pads, and reinforcing welds.
PDS Piping Reference Data Translator Dialog Box
Allows you to translate PDS reference data to SmartPlant 3D reference data.
Translate PDS Reference Data - Translates PDS data.
Populate 'Dimension Table Names' Rule - Creates one of the translation rules.
Create Commodity Codes (optional) - Updates the contractor or industry commodity codes.
Commodity Code Option - Allows you to specify whether you want to update the contractor or
industry commodity codes. This option is available when you are using the Translate PDS
Reference Data mode or the Create Commodity Codes mode.
PDS ASCII Files Location - Specifies the location of the PDS reference data files.
PDS Translation Rules - Specifies the translation rules file. This file is in Excel workbook (.xls)
format.
PDS Code Lists - Specifies the location of the SmartPlant 3D codelist file. This file is in Excel
workbook (.xls) format. This box is unavailable for the Populate 'Dimension Table Names'
Rule option.


SmartPlant 3D Piping Excel File - Specifies the SmartPlant 3D reference data file. This file is
in Excel workbook (.xls) format. This box is unavailable for the Populate 'Dimension Table
Names' Rule option.
SmartPlant 3D Piping Specification Data - Specifies the piping specification data file. This file
is in Excel workbook (.xls) format. This box is only available for the Create Commodity Codes
option.
SmartPlant 3D Piping Catalog Data - Specifies the piping catalog data file. This file is in Excel
workbook (.xls) format. This box is only available for the Create Commodity Codes option.
It is possible that the catalog and specification information is in one file.
Translator Error Log - Specifies the location for the log file that provides the results of the
process.
Using the Piping Commodity Filter Cleanup Utility
The Piping Commodity Filter Cleanup utility is a tool for cleaning up translated PDS piping
specification data by merging common records that can result from the differing structures of
PDS and SmartPlant 3D piping reference data.
Here are some important points to remember about this utility.
The Piping Commodity Filter Cleanup utility deletes duplicate records in the piping
commodity filter.
The utility scans the Piping Nominal Diameters sheet for valid sizes, then processes the
Piping Commodity Filter (PCF, in this topic) sheet in the specified file, and merges
common records when the values of all properties (except the First Size, From and First
Size, To properties) are identical.
The utility does not support the cleanup of catalog (part) sheets.
The utility can clean only one piping commodity filter sheet at a time.
The utility overwrites the cleaned specification PCF workbook and reports results in a log
file.
Limitations
The Piping Nominal Diameters sheet and the Piping Commodity Filter (PCF) sheet must
be in the workbook specified for processing.
The utility does not merge multi-size items such as reducers, reducing tees, and so forth,
unless all the records in the first size and second size match.
The utility may change the formatting of some merged cells. If you require specific
formatting, it may be necessary to apply the desired formats to modified cells after the
cleanup is completed.
For assistance with translating your PDS data, contact Intergraph Process, Power & Marine
Support.
See Also
Use the Piping Commodity Filter Cleanup Utility (on page 41)


Use the Piping Commodity Filter Cleanup Utility
Before running the Piping Commodity Filter Cleanup utility, you must convert at
least one PDS specification using the PDS translator. The conversion results in one
specification workbook and one catalog workbook per spec. The specification workbook
contains the piping commodity filter and piping nominal diameter information.
2. Under CatalogData\PDSTranslator\Bin, double-click CleanupUtility.exe.
3. In the Excel file box, browse and select the Excel workbook (.xls format) that contains the
Piping Commodity Filter and Pipe Nominal Diameter sheets. This workbook must not be
read-only.
4. In the Log file box, browse to the location where you want the log file stored.
5. Click Start Cleanup. As the utility processes the files, you can view the status messages on
the dialog box. Once completed, "Finished" appears on the dialog box.

The process overwrites the Excel workbook.
The process does not mark any records in the workbook as changed.
See Also
Using the Piping Commodity Filter Cleanup Utility (on page 40)
Piping Commodity Filter Cleanup Utility
This utility allows you to clean piping commodity filter data after translation. Duplicate records in
the piping commodity filter are deleted. The utility also merges records when the values of all
properties (except the First Size, From and First Size, To properties) are identical.
Support.
Excel file - Specifies the Excel specification workbook (.xls format) that contains the Piping
Commodity Filter and Pipe Nominal Diameter sheets.
Log file - Specifies the log file that provides the results of the process.
Start Cleanup - Starts the process. The utility saves the data upon completion of the process.
See Also
Using the Piping Commodity Filter Cleanup Utility (on page 40)
Use the Piping Commodity Filter Cleanup Utility (on page 41)


Using the Pipe Branch Cleanup Utility
The Pipe Branch Cleanup utility is a tool for cleaning translated PDS piping specification branch
table data by removing invalid records based on available piping diameters per spec. These
records may exist in translated PDS reference data or user-defined specification workbooks.
The utility scans the Pipe Nominal Diameters sheet for allowable sizes per spec.
The utility then applies the available diameters to the appropriate branch tables.
The utility removes records from the Pipe Branch sheet that reference invalid diameters for
the spec as defined in the Pipe Nominal Diameters worksheet. Put another way, the utility
eliminates pipe branch records for any sizes that are outside the permissible NPD rule for
the corresponding piping specification.
The utility can clean only one branch sheet at a time.
The utility edits the branch sheet and reports results in a log file.
Limitations
The utility does not remove duplicate records from the branch tables.
The Pipe Branch and Pipe Nominal Diameters sheets must exist in separate workbooks.
One way to set this up is to open the piping specification workbook, and cut and paste the
Pipe Nominal Diameters sheet into another workbook. The specification workbook has the
branch sheet in it. After the process is over, copy the nominal diameters sheet back into the
specification workbook.
Support.
See Also
Use the Pipe Branch Cleanup Utility (on page 42)
Use the Pipe Branch Cleanup Utility

Before running the Pipe Branch Cleanup utility, you must convert at least one PDS
specification using the PDS translator. The conversion results in one specification workbook
and one catalog workbook per spec.
For branch cleanup, the Pipe Branch and Pipe Nominal Diameters sheets must be in
separate workbooks.
2. Under CatalogData\PDSTranslator\Bin, double-click PipeBranchCleanupUtility.exe.
3. In the PipeBranch Excel file box, browse and select the Excel workbook (.xls format) that
contains the Pipe Branch sheet.
4. In the PipeNominalDiameters box, browse and select the Excel workbook (.xls format) that
contains the Pipe Nominal Diameters sheet.


6. Click Start Cleanup. As the utility processes the files, you can view the status messages on

The process overwrites the Excel Pipe Branch workbook.
The process does not mark any records in the workbook as changed.
See Also
Using the Pipe Branch Cleanup Utility (on page 42)
Pipe Branch Cleanup Utility
This utility cleans pipe branch data after translation. It eliminates records from the Pipe Branch
sheet for any sizes that are outside the permissible NPD rule for the corresponding piping
specification.
Support.
PipeBranch Excel file - Specifies the Excel workbook (.xls format) that contains the Pipe
Branch sheet.
PipeNominalDiameters - Specifies the Excel workbook (.xls format) that contains the Pipe
Nominal Diameters sheet.
Start Cleanup - Starts the process. The utility saves the data upon completion of the process.
See Also
Using the Pipe Branch Cleanup Utility (on page 42)
Use the Pipe Branch Cleanup Utility (on page 42)
Using the Piping Reference Data Merge Utility
The Piping Reference Data Merge utility is a tool for merging translated PDS reference data.
The utility does not support the merging of specification workbooks.
The utility can merge as many catalog (part) workbooks as required.
The utility merges the workbooks and reports results in a log file.
Support.
See Also
Use the Piping Reference Data Merge Utility (on page 43)


Use the Piping Reference Data Merge Utility
Before running the Piping Reference Data Merge utility, you must convert at least
two PDS specifications using the PDS translator. The conversion results in one specification
workbook and one catalog workbook per spec. The Piping Reference Data Merge utility merges
catalog (part) workbooks.
2. Under CatalogData\PDSTranslator\Bin, double-click
PipingReferenceDataMergeUtility.exe.
3. In the Input Excel Files location box, browse and select the location that stores the files to
merge.
4. In the Output Excel file box, browse and select the Excel workbook (.xls format) that will
contain the merged data.
6. Click Start. As the utility processes the files, you can view the status messages on the
dialog box. Once completed, "Finished" appears on the dialog box.

The output workbook includes a Sheet1 worksheet. You can remove this sheet and save
the workbook before bulk loading. Not removing it does not impact the load, although a
message is printed in the log file.
Worksheets unique to a specific source workbook are copied to the new output workbook.
In the case of worksheets that are common to all the input workbooks, unique data records
(rows) are included in the output.
In the case of worksheets that are common to all input workbooks, if data is duplicated, then
the data from the first worksheet is taken. The utility ignores duplicate data from the
subsequent common worksheets.
See Also
Using the Piping Reference Data Merge Utility (on page 43)

Piping Reference Data Spreadsheet Merge Utility
This utility merges translated catalog (part data) workbooks into one workbook.
Support.
Input Excel Files location - Specifies the location of the workbooks that you want to merge.
Output Excel file - Specifies the single Excel workbook that will contain all merged data.
Start - Starts the process.
See Also
Using the Piping Reference Data Merge Utility (on page 43)
Use the Piping Reference Data Merge Utility (on page 43)


Use the UoM Conversion Utility

Before running the UoM Conversion utility, you must convert at least one PDS specification
using the PDS translator. The conversion results in one specification workbook and one
catalog workbook per spec.
If you have input data in more than one workbook, you can merge the data into one
workbook using the Piping Reference Data Merge utility. The UoM Conversion utility must
have the input data in one workbook.
2. Under CatalogData\PDSTranslator\Bin, double-click UoMConversion.exe.
3. In the Piping Parts Excel file box, browse and select the Excel workbook with the piping
part data to convert.
4. In the NPD Equivalence Rule Excel file box, browse and select the Excel workbook with
the rule data.

A default NPD Equivalence Rule workbook is delivered in the [Product
Directory]\Core\Shared\UOMServices\xls folder. This file helps convert units from
imperial (inches) to metric (mm).
You must remove the Read-only property on the NPD Equivalence Rule workbook
before running the conversion process.
If you want to convert units from metric (mm) to imperial (inches), you must revise the
delivered NPD Equivalence Rule workbook.
6. Click Start Convert. As the utility processes the files, you can view the status messages on
Use the UoM Conversion Utility

Before running the UoM Conversion utility, you must convert at least one PDS specification
using the PDS translator. The conversion results in one specification workbook and one
catalog workbook per spec.
If you have input data in more than one workbook, you can merge the data into one
workbook using the Piping Reference Data Merge utility. The UoM Conversion utility must
have the input data in one workbook.
2. Under CatalogData\PDSTranslator\Bin, double-click UoMConversion.exe.
3. In the Piping Parts Excel file box, browse and select the Excel workbook with the piping
part data to convert.


4. In the NPD Equivalence Rule Excel file box, browse and select the Excel workbook with
the rule data.

A default NPD Equivalence Rule workbook is delivered in the [Product
Directory]\Core\Shared\UOMServices\xls folder. This file helps convert units from
You must remove the Read-only property on the NPD Equivalence Rule workbook
before running the conversion process.
If you want to convert units from metric (mm) to imperial (inches), you must revise the
delivered NPD Equivalence Rule workbook.
UoM Conversion Utility
This utility converts the units of measure in translated piping part reference data.
Support.
Piping Parts Excel file - Specifies the workbook with the units that you want to convert.
NPD Equivalence Rule Excel file - Specifies the workbook that contains the NPD rule data
used in the conversion process. A default NPD Equivalence Rule workbook is delivered in the
[Product Directory]\Core\Shared\UOMServices\xls folder. This file helps convert units from
If you want to convert units from metric (mm) to imperial (inches), you must revise the delivered
NPD Equivalence Rule workbook.
Start Convert - Starts the process.
See Also
Use the UoM Conversion Utility (on page 45)
Using the OD to NPD Utility
The OD to NPD utility is a tool for determining the NPD from the Plain Piping Generic Data using
the OD, End Standard, and Schedule (OD Reihe number). The utility adds the NPD values for
DIN male fittings to the piping catalog workbook.
Support.
See Also
Use the OD to NPD Utility (on page 46)


Use the OD to NPD Utility
Before running the OD to NPD utility, you must convert at least one PDS
specification using the PDS translator. The conversion results in one specification workbook and
one catalog workbook per spec.
2. Under CatalogData\PDSTranslator\Bin, double-click ODtoNPD.exe.
3. In the Piping Catalog Excel file box, browse and select the piping catalog workbook (.xls
format).
4. In the PDS Model Code Rule Excel file box, browse and select the PDS model code rule
workbook (.xls format).
5. In the Log file box, browse to specify the log file for the conversion process.
See Also
Using the OD to NPD Utility (on page 46)
OD to NPD Utility
This utility determines the NPD from the Plain Piping Generic Data using the OD, End Standard,
and Schedule (OD Reihe number). The utility adds NPD values for DIN male fittings to the
piping catalog workbook.
Support.
Piping Catalog Excel file - Specifies the piping catalog Excel workbook (.xls format), which
contains the Plain Piping Generic Data.
PDS Model Code Rule Excel file - Specifies the Excel workbook (.xls format) that contains the
PDS model code rules.
Start Convert - Starts the process. The utility saves the data upon completion of the process.
See Also
Using the OD to NPD Utility (on page 46)
Use the OD to NPD Utility (on page 46)




S E C T I O N 3
The software allows you to modify the reference data using two methods. One method is editing
the Excel workbooks and then bulk loading your changes into the Catalog database. You must
bulk load the Excel data in order to use the modified reference data in the software; it is not
sufficient to change only the Excel workbooks. The second method is using the commands in
the Catalog task.
To edit the Excel data, you must understand the content and format of the workbooks.
Many of the delivered workbooks contain data unique to a given function or discipline. For
example, there are separate Excel workbooks for Piping, Structure, and so forth. There are also
common workbooks that contain data for more than one discipline; one example is the
AllCodeLists.xls workbook, which contains codelists. For a list of workbooks and
corresponding documentation, see Delivered Excel Workbooks (on page 50).
Several sheets are common to most of the reference data workbooks. These sheets include
comments about the revision history, links to the other sheets, custom interface and attribute
definitions, and hierarchy information. For a list of the common sheets, see Describing the
Common Sheets in the Workbooks (on page 57).
Other sheets in the workbooks contain component-specific information for objects in reference
data. These sheets define part classes, which are groups of related objects. Each part class
contains one or more parts, which are unique instances of that type of object. For example, a
part class can be Inline Centrifugal Fans. The parts in that part class could be models that run
1/3, 1/6, or 1/8 horsepower. Part class names must be unique across the entire Catalog.
However, you can relate the same unique part class to different disciplines, such as piping and
equipment.

Before you modify a workbook, save a backup copy. That way, you can always bulk load the
previous data.
Do not modify the contents of the GUIDs sheets in the delivered sample workbooks or in
workbooks that you used to create the Catalog database set for a project.
Naming limitations exist for some of the reference data. For example, custom attribute
names and sheet names cannot exceed 30 characters. In addition, you cannot use reserved
keywords and special characters in the names. For more information, see Appendix: Name
Limitations in Reference Data (on page 293).
See Also
Describing the Common Sheets in the Workbooks (on page 57)
Delivered Excel Workbooks (on page 50)
Catalog Hierarchy Sheets (on page 73)

Using Excel Workbooks to Configure
Reference Data
Using Excel Workbooks to Configure Reference Data


Delivered Excel Workbooks
The delivered Excel workbooks are located at [Product
Directory]\CatalogData\BulkLoad\DataFiles.
Additional workbooks also exist. For more information, see Appendix: Other Reference Data (on
page 295).
File Name Description For more information...
AllCodeLists.xls Defines all codelists in the
software.
SmartPlant 3D Reference Data
Guide, Appendix: Codelists
AllCommon.xls Defines piping generic data,
outfitting cross sections, and
units of measurement.
Guide, AllCommon Reference
Data
AllStructCommon.xls List .bmp's used for
cross-sections.
Structure Reference Data Guide
BulkLoadIsoKeys.xls Defines information for
isometric drawings.
Drawings and Reports Reference
Data Guide
CableTray.xls Defines cable tray classes and
parts.
Electrical Reference Data Guide
CableWay.xls Defines cableway specifications
and rules.
Cabling.xls Defines cable classes and
parts.
Carnes HVAC Catalog.xls Defines HVAC parts from the
Carnes catalog.
HVAC Reference Data Guide
Conduit.xls Defines conduit classes and
parts.
DoorsEquipment.xls Defines doors, windows, and
louvers for placement in walls.
Equipment Reference Data Guide
Drawings.xls Defines volumes used in the
generation of orthographic
spatial drawings.
Drawings and Reports Reference
Data Guide
Ductbank.xls Defines ductbank
specifications.
Equipment.xls Defines equipment classes and
parts.
Equipment and Furnishings
EquipmentComponent.xls Defines equipment component
classes and parts.
GenericNamingRules.xls Defines naming rule programs. SmartPlant 3D Reference Data
Guide, Naming Rules Reference
Data
GCGeomCmds.xls

Structure
GCGeomDefs.xls

Structure


GCMemberDefs.xls

Structure
GCParamDefs.xls

Structure
GCPortDefs.xls

Structure
GridsCodelist.xls,
GridsDrawingStyleIntf.xls
Provides data for controlling the
display of grid lines in drawing
styles.
Grids Reference Data Guide
HS_Anvil.xls,
HS_Anvil_Codelist.xls,
HS_Assembly.xls,
HS_Assembly_Codelist.xls
,
HS_GTypeComponent.xls,
HS_HgrAisc- LRFD-3.1
Deprecated.xls,
HS_LRParts.xls,
HS_S3DParts.xls
HS_S3DParts_Codelist.xls
HS_Str-AISC-LRFD-3.1.xl
s
HS_System.xls,
HS_System_Codelists.xls
HS_Utility.xls,
HS_Utility_Codelist.xls
Defines hangers and supports. Hangers and Supports Reference
Data Guide
Hvac.xls Defines heating, ventilation,
and air conditioning materials.
IFCRule.xls Defines interference checking
rules.
Interference Checking Guide
Instrument Data.xls Defines data for piping
instruments.
Piping Reference Data Guide
InsulationData.xls Defines insulation
specifications.
Guide, Insulation Reference Data
Lindab HVAC Catalog.xls Defines HVAC parts from the
Lindab catalog.
ModuleTypes.xls Defines part classes for the
Copy to Catalog and Paste
from Catalog commands.
Guide, Module Types Reference
Data
On-the-fly Instruments.xls Defines part classes for
on-the-fly instruments.
On-the-fly Piping
Specialties.xls
Defines part classes for
on-the-fly piping specialties.
Piping Catalog.xls Defines piping part classes for
specifications translated from
PDS.


Piping Specialty Data.xls Defines piping specialties
classes for specifications
translated from PDS.
Piping Specification.xls Defines piping specifications
and rules.
Piping.xls Provides sample piping
reference data.
Reports.xls Defines reporting templates. Drawings and Reports Reference
Data Guide
Shapes.xls Defines shapes for designing
equipment (Place Designed
Equipment command in the
task) and for volumes (Place
Volume using Primitive
Shapes command in the Space
Management task).
SmartPlant 3D Symbols
SpaceMgmt.xls Defines areas, zones, and
volumes.
Space Management Reference
Data Guide
Spiral HVAC Catalog.xls Defines HVAC parts from the
Spiral catalog.
Standard Nozzle Data.xls Defines nozzles for piping,
conduit, cable, and cable tray.
Guide, Standard Nozzle Data
StructAssemblyConnectio
ns.xls
Defines assembly connections. Structure Reference Data Guide
StructCrossSections-
AISC-LRFD-3.1.xls
Contains the American Institute
of Steel Construction - Manual
of Steel Construction (LRFD)
version 3.0 cross sections.
StructCrossSections-
MISC-SHAPES- 1.0.xls
Contains miscellaneous
rectangular solid and circular
solid cross sections.
StructCustomCodeList.xls

StructEquipFoundations.xl
s
Defines equipment foundations. Structure Reference Data Guide
StructFootings.xls Defines footings. Structure Reference Data Guide
StructFrameConnections.x
ls
Defines frame connections,
which describe the positioning
relationship between member
systems.
StructHandrails.xls Defines handrails. Structure Reference Data Guide
StructInsulationSpec.xls For Fireproofing Structure Reference Data Guide


StructLadders.xls Defines ladders. Structure Reference Data Guide
StructMemberFireproofing.
xls
For Fireproofing Structure Reference Data Guide
StructOpeningsMetric.xls Defines standard opening
shapes.
StructPlateDimensions.xls Defines plate information used
in assembly connections.
StructSlabAssemblyConne
ctions.xls
Defines assembly connections
for slabs.
StructSlabGeneral.xls Defines slabs for structure. Structure Reference Data Guide
StructSlabLayer.xls Defines layers for slabs. Structure Reference Data Guide
StructSplitConnections.xls Defines split connections. Structure Reference Data Guide
StructStairs.xls Defines stairs. Structure Reference Data Guide
StructWallAssemblyConne
ctions.xls
Defines assembly connections
for walls.
StructWallCrossSection.xl
s
Defines wall cross sections. Structure Reference Data Guide
StructWallGeneral.xls Defines the walls that you want
to add to your catalog and
hence to your model.
StructWallLayer.xls Defines the individual layers of
walls that you want to place.
StructWallOperators.xls Defines wall operators. Structure Reference Data Guide
Ten_Specs_CatalogData.x
ls
Defines piping part classes.
This data is a subset of the data
contained in
Piping_Catalog.xls.
Ten_Specs_Specification
Data.xls
Defines piping specifications
and rules. This data is a subset
of the data contained in
Piping_Specification.xls.
See Also
Using Excel Workbooks to Configure Reference Data (on page 49)



Minimum Reference Data
When you create a new catalog, you must bulk load a minimum amount of reference data in
order for the software to function properly. You must bulk load the workbook(s) for the
disciplines that you want to work with and any other workbooks with related data such as
codelists, naming rules, and so forth.
For example, if you want to create a catalog for piping and equipment only, bulk load
AllCodelists.xls, AllCommon.xls, Equipment.xls, EquipmentComponent.xls,
GenericNamingRules.xls, InsulationData.xls, Shapes.xls (for designed equipment),
Ten_Specs_SpecificationData.xls, and Ten_Specs_CatalogData.xls.
When using the Bulkload utility to create a new catalog, you must use the
AppRepos.dat template file to create the Catalog Schema. This file is located in [Product
Directory]\DatabaseTemplates on the administrator computer.
Discipline Required Workbooks in Catalog
Cable
AllCodelists.xls
Cabling.xls
Cable Tray
AllCodelists.xls
AllCommon.xls
CableTray.xls
Cableway
AllCodelists.xls
AllCommon.xls
CableWay.xls
Conduit
AllCodelists.xls
Conduit.xls
MatingPort Sheet
Drawings and
Reports
AllCodelists.xls
Drawings.xls for volume drawings
BulkLoadIsoKeys.xls for isometric drawings or spooling
Reports.xls for report templates
Equipment and
Furnishings
AllCodelists.xls
AllCommon.xls
Equipment.xls
EquipmentComponent.xls
InsulationData.xls
Shapes.xls for designed equipment


Grids
AllCodelists.xls
Hangers and
Supports
AllCodelists.xls
AllCommon.xls
HS_Anvil.xls, HS_Anvil_Codelist.xls,
HS_Assembly.xls, HS_Assembly_Codelist.xls
HS_LRParts.xls
HS_HgrAisc-LRFD-3.1_Deprecated.xls
HS_Str-AISC-LRFD-3.1.xls
HS_Struct-ASIC-LRFD-3.1.xls
HS_System.xls, HS_System_Codelists.xls
HS_Utility.xls, HS_Utility_Codelist.xls
StructCrossSections-AISC-LRFD-3.1.xls
StructCrossSections-MISC-LRFD-3.1.xls
When bulkloading reference data for Hangers and Supports, you
must bulkload the StructCrossSections-AISC-LRFD-3.1.xls and
StructCrossSections-MISC-LRFD-3.1.xls workbooks before you bulkload the
HS_Utility.xls workbook. Failure to do so will result in bulkloading errors.
HVAC
AllCodelists.xls
AllCommon.xls
HVAC.xls
InsulationData.xls
Interference
Checking
AllCodelists.xls
IFCRule.xls
Layout
AllCodelists.xls
Auto Router Rules.xls
Piping
AllCodelists.xls
AllCommon.xls
InsulationData.xls
Ten_Specs_SpecificationData.xls
Ten_Specs_CatalogData.xls

Piping instruments require Instrument Data.xls.
Piping specialties require Piping Specialty Data.xls.
A larger set of piping specifications and data are in Piping


Specification.xls and Piping Catalog.xls.
Metric piping specifications are in Piping.xls.
Space
Management
AllCodelists.xls
Shapes.xls for volumes
SpaceMgmt.xls
Structural Analysis
AllCodelists.xls
Structure
AllCodelists.xls
AllCommon.xls
StructAssemblyConnections.xls
StructCrossSections_AISC_LRFD_3.1.xls
StructCrossSections-MISC_SHAPES-1.0.xls
StructEquipFoundations.xls
StructFootings.xls
StructFrameconnections.xls
StructHandrails.xls
StructInsulationSpec.xls
StructLadders.xls
StructMemberFireproofing.xls
StructOpeningsMetric.xls
StructPlateDimensions.xls
StructSlabAssemblyConnections.xls
StructSlabGeneral.xls
StructSlabLayer.xls
StructSplitConnections.xls
StructStairs.xls
StructWallAssemblyConnections.xls
StructWallCrossSection.xls
StructWallGeneral.xls
StructWallLayer.xls
StructWallOperators.xls
Systems and
Specifications
AllCodelists.xls

The Copy to Catalog or Paste from Catalog commands require ModuleTypes.xls.
Control points require GenericNamingRules.xls.
Nozzles for piping, conduit, cable, and cable tray require Standard Nozzle Data.xls.


MatingPort sheet is required when placing the conduit fittings. This sheet is located in the
Ten_Specs_SpecificationData.xls.
See Also
Describing the Common Sheets in the Workbooks
The following sheets appear in most of the Excel workbooks, which are located in the [Product
Directory]\CatalogData\BulkLoad\DataFiles folder on the administrator computer.
Revision History*
Legend*
Index*
Custom Interfaces
GUIDs
CatalogRoot
ClassNodeType
R-ClassNodeDescribes
R-Hierarchy
* The Bulkload utility does not process these sheets, so you can enter any comments and
information on them.
In addition to the common sheets, each Excel workbook contains unique sheets. Some of the
unique sheets define classes of objects, and other unique sheets define tabular reference data,
such as pipe specifications. No two sheets in the same workbook can have the same name.

You should not change the sheet name for the Custom Interfaces, R-
ClassNodeDescribes, ClassNodeType, and GUIDs sheets.
Revision History
This sheet contains comments that describe modifications to the workbook, the person who
made the modifications, and the date modified. Updates to this sheet are not mandatory, but
they are recommended for internal tracking purposes. This sheet is not processed by the
Bulkload utility. The text on this sheet is purely for the benefit of change tracking, notes, and
revision records. For more information, see Revision History Sheet (on page 59).
Legend
This sheet provides information about common conventions in the workbook. It lists the
keywords and the associated meanings. This sheet is not processed by the Bulkload utility. For
more information, see Legend Sheet (on page 60).
Index
This sheet provides a list of all the classes in the workbook and links to each sheet. This sheet is
not processed by the Bulkload utility. For more information, see Index Sheet (on page 61).
Custom Interfaces
This sheet defines user attributes that are in the reference data. This sheet describes the names
of attributes, such as length and weight, and contains information about the units of


measurement. The Custom Interfaces sheet also defines links between reference data
parameters and parametric symbol arguments.
You can control whether the attributes are Read/Write or Read-Only. For more information
about attribute access, see Controlling Access to Attributes (on page 63).
For more information about custom interfaces and attributes, see Custom Interfaces Sheet (on
page 68). For more information about units of measurement, see Appendix: Units of Measure
(on page 261).
Custom Class Interface List
This sheet lists any additional virtual interfaces that will be implemented by non-virtual classes.
During the bulkload process, these interfaces are mapped to the specified classes. For more
information, see Custom Class Interface List Sheet (on page 70).
GUIDs (Globally Unique Identifiers)
This sheet contains identification numbers for the part classes. For more information, see GUIDs
Sheet (on page 70).
The Custom Interfaces, Custom Class Interface List, and GUIDs sheets are metadata
definition sheets. Familiarity with the metadata is important when copying objects between
models with different catalogs.
CatalogRoot
This sheet defines the name of the root folder for the data in a workbook. The catalog root is the
highest allowable level in the hierarchy for a discipline. For example, in the Equipment.xls
workbook, the root folder is Equipment. This name appears in the Catalog task user interface.
For more information, see CatalogRoot Sheet (on page 74).
ClassNodeType
This sheet allows you to create classification folders in the Catalog hierarchy. A classification
folder is similar to a folder in Windows Explorer, except a classification folder can only contain
other folders, not individual items. The ObjectName column contains the folder object name,
which represents the internal name for the node in the software. The Name column contains the
identifier name that appears in the Catalog task user interface. An example is an item with V205
in the ObjectName column and Towers in the Name column. The Bulkload utility and internal
catalog know the item by its object name, V205. The Catalog task user interface displays the
item name as Towers.
The ClassNodeType sheet does not specify the hierarchy of the classification folders. For more
information, see ClassNodeType Sheet (on page 74).
R-ClassNodeDescribes
This sheet defines the parent-child relationships between the classification folders and the part
classes. This sheet uses the object names of the classification folders and the names of the part
classes. The RelationSource column contains the parents (classification folders), and the
RelationDestination column contains the children (part classes). For example, the Pumps
classification folder is the parent of a part class named Pump. For more information, see
R-ClassNodeDescribes Sheet (on page 74).
R-Hierarchy
This sheet defines the parent-child relationships among the folders in the Catalog hierarchy that
are above the classification folders. This sheet uses the object names of the folders. For


example, RefDataEquipmentRoot has a child named Pumps. This sheet does not define new
classification folders or part classes. For more information, see R-Hierarchy Sheet (on page 75).
See Also
Catalog Hierarchy Sheets (on page 73)
Adding Part Classes to the Catalog (on page 75)
Administrative Sheets
Topics
Revision History Sheet .................................................................. 59
Legend Sheet................................................................................. 60
Index Sheet .................................................................................... 61

Revision History Sheet
The Revision History sheet provides a place for you to maintain a written record of the
changes made to the workbook, such as the addition of a new sheet or modifications to existing
sheets. The Bulkload utility does not read or modify this sheet.
When you create or update a workbook, you should note the change on the Revision History
sheet. You must enter the text on this sheet manually; the Bulkload utility does not enter the text
for you. Updating this sheet is not mandatory, but keeping a revision history can be helpful,
especially when multiple users make changes to a workbook.
You can modify the format and content of the Revision History sheet as needed. The only item
that must remain unchanged is the name of the sheet.
Below is some suggested information to include on this sheet.
Worksheet Name - Lists the name of the worksheet that was added, deleted, or modified.
Revision Description - Provides a description of the modifications and additions made to the
workbook. For example, one description might be Added company standard butterfly valve.
By - Provides the name of the person who made the changes. You can provide the name in any
format, such as first name and last name, initials, or Windows network logon name.
Date - Lists the date that the revisions were made. You can provide the date in any format, such
as mm/dd/yy or dd/mm/yy.
Version Implemented - Lists the version of software in which the revision is included.
Not all workbooks have the Version Implemented column on this sheet.
See Also


Legend Sheet
The Legend sheet defines the keywords that you can use in the Excel workbooks for reference
data. This sheet also contains a description of what each keyword does. The Bulkload utility
does not read or modify this sheet.
You can modify the format and content of the Legend sheet as needed. The only item that must
remain unchanged is the name of the sheet.
Below is some suggested information to include on this sheet.
Keyword - Lists the keywords used on many part class sheets.
Meaning - Contains a description of each keyword.
Keyword Meaning
! Denotes comment text. The Bulkload utility ignores
workbook rows that begin with an exclamation point (!).
You can insert a comment anywhere in the workbook.
Head Denotes the header row of the part data. The header row
contains the names of the properties for the parts, not the
actual values. The actual values are in the rows beneath
this keyword, in the Start/End section.
Start Denotes the beginning of the part data. This section
contains actual values for the properties.
End Denotes the end of the properties data for parts. The
Bulkload utility ignores anything after the row marked with
the End keyword.
Definition Denotes the overall definition of the part class, including
the part class type, symbol definition, and nozzle
identification and types.
The Definition section can contain occurrence attributes,
which are properties that you can change for a specific
part in the model.
You define an occurrence attribute by entering oa: in front
of the property name on the part class sheet in the
workbook. These properties appear on the Occurrence
tab of a Properties dialog box.
SheetName (without the prefix R-) Denotes a worksheet name in the Excel workbook.
ObjectName Denotes a unique object identifier.
LikeThis Denotes a column heading. Italicize the column headings
in the workbook.
Nozzle(i):Type Denotes a nozzle type such as Piping or HVAC. The
designation (i) is the nozzle number. The Nozzle(i):Type
keyword appears in the Definition section of a part class
sheet.


Keyword Meaning
Nozzle(i):XXX Denotes a nozzle property on the nozzle type or generic
nozzle. Some properties that can be defined are NPD
(nominal piping diameter) and end preparation.
RelationSource Denotes the unique identifier for a source object.
RelationDestination Denotes the unique identifier for a destination object.
CreateTable Creates a codelist table in the database.
See Also

Index Sheet
The Index sheet contains links to all of the other sheets in the workbook. You can use this sheet
to jump quickly to another sheet in the workbook, especially when that workbook contains many
sheets. The Bulkload utility does not read or modify this sheet.
SheetName - Contains links to other sheets. Click a link to jump to that sheet in the workbook.
When you add new classes to a workbook, you should update the Index sheet with the name of
the new class, a comment, and a hyperlink to the sheet. See the Excel documentation for more
information about how to do this action.
Remarks - Contains comment text to describe each sheet.
You can add columns to the Index sheet as needed.
See Also
Custom Interfaces Sheets
Topics
Adding and Modifying Custom Interfaces ...................................... 61
Controlling Access to Attributes ..................................................... 63
Add User Attributes to a Class....................................................... 67
Custom Interfaces Sheet ............................................................... 68
Custom Class Interface List Sheet ................................................ 70
GUIDs Sheet .................................................................................. 70

Adding and Modifying Custom Interfaces
You should plan the addition and modification of custom interfaces, categories, and attributes in
your catalog. To bulk load interfaces and attributes, you must have write or full control on at
least one of the catalog permission groups, which are defined in Project Management. The
following paragraphs describe the restrictions on additions, modifications, and deletions of the
custom interfaces.


Interfaces
You can create a new interface on the Custom Interfaces sheet and then add it to the catalog
using the Bulkload utility. You can also add an interface by adding an attribute associated with
the interface to an existing part class sheet and running the Bulkload utility in the
Add/Modify/Delete mode.
You can delete an existing interface by typing the letter D in the first column of the interface row.
This action does not actually delete the interface from the database; it removes the interface
from all of its implemented classes.
You should not modify the name of an interface, but you can change the category to which it
was assigned.
If you add new interfaces after creating the Reports databases, you must re-generate the
Reports databases in order to report on the new interfaces. If you modify an existing part class,
you also must run the Synchronize Model with Catalog command in Project Management on
any model that has occurrences of the class that you modified. (In addition, re-synchronizing the
model with the catalog requires re-generation of the Reports databases).
For more information about re-generating database views and synchronizing the model, see the
Project Management User's Guide.
When you add, modify, or delete an interface, the Bulkload utility re-generates views, but
only virtual interface views and relation views (not interface views).
Categories
Categories are listed in the Property Categories codelist. If you want to use a new category
name on an interface, you must add the new category name in the codelist and then bulk load.
You can modify category names by editing the codelist.
Categories are across a model and dependent on the catalog. If multiple models make use of
the same catalog, then the two models' interfaces and attributes are categorized identically.
Attributes
You can add attributes to existing interfaces by typing A in the first column of the rows to add.
You can also modify some attribute data. For example, you can modify the text in the Attribute
User Name column, and you can change the category in which the attributes appear (for
example, in the Standard, Dimensions, or other category). The category is governed by the
CategoryName column on the Custom Interfaces sheet.
However, you cannot delete existing attributes after bulk loading them. If you try to delete
existing attributes, the Bulkload utility will include warnings in the log file.
In addition to adding custom interfaces to part classes, you can add custom interfaces for
systems and interference checking objects. The software includes sample workbooks that
demonstrate how to add custom interfaces to systems and IFC objects. For more information,
see Appendix: Other Reference Data (on page 295).
See Also
Custom Interfaces Sheet (on page 68)
Add User Attributes to a Class (on page 67)



Controlling Access to Attributes
It is possible to control whether an attribute can be modified or not. You can specify that certain
attributes are Read-Only, and others are Read/Write.
Grouping Attributes
Because the Bulkload utility adds the entire interface when it processes an attribute, an attribute
that needs to be Read- Only should have its own interface, or it should be grouped into an
interface with other Read-Only attributes.
The following picture shows one-to-one relationships between attributes and interfaces on an
example CustomInterfaces sheet. There is one attribute per interface.

It is not recommended that every attribute in the catalog have its own interface due to
performance concerns. The recommended procedure is to group parameters logically, so that
an interface contains either all Read-Only attributes, or all Read/Write attributes.


Assigning Read-Only to Attributes
You can specify that an attribute is Read-Only by setting the flag on the CustomInterfaces
sheet.

The attribute will be Read-Only for every part class in the workbook. If users will need to
change the value of the attribute for one type of part but should not have access to the same
attribute on another part, than this approach cannot be used.
The Read-Only flag is set on the part that is placed on the model, and it is also set on the
attribute in the Catalog database.
Bulkloading Attributes
The following steps happen when the Bulkload utility adds attributes to a part class.
1. The interfaces are defined in the Catalog Schema. These interfaces come from the
CustomInterfaces sheet that appears in each workbook.
2. A part class is added to the Catalog Schema.
3. The Bulkload utility processes the part class and adds it to the Catalog database, along with
its attributes.
4. The Bulkload utility processes the attributes on the part class sheet. Here is what the
Bulkload utility does:
Gets each attribute and looks for its interface on the CustomInterfaces sheet.
Adds the interface to the Catalog Schema and gives the attribute the appropriate
(Read/Write or Read-Only) access.
Every attribute in an interface is given the same access.


Moving Attributes to New Interfaces
The following procedure moves attributes to new interfaces in the catalog. In this example, a
group of attributes is split among two new interfaces.
1. Delete the interface on which the attributes had been placed. Locate the interface on the
CustomInterfaces sheet, and type a D in the first column in that row. Run the Bulkload
utility in the Add/Modify/Delete mode.

2. On the CustomInterfaces sheet, create new interfaces and group the attributes.



3. To use the new interfaces, all part classes and items that use the attributes must now be
modified. On a part class sheet, type an M in the first column of every row that uses the
interfaces, including both the part class and item.

4. Run the Bulkload utility in the Add/Modify/Delete mode. This operation adds the interfaces
from the CustomInterfaces sheet and modifies each part class and item to use the
attributes from the new interfaces.
5. Synchronize the model and catalog to update all model occurrences to use the attributes
form the new interfaces. For more information about synchronizing, see the Project
Management User's Guide.
If the part class sheets use fully qualified interface names (example:
Interface::UserAttribute<Symbol Parameter>), you must edit the names on the part class sheets
to reflect the new interfaces. Remember that the same attribute name can be used in multiple
interfaces as long as a fully qualified name is used to define it for a part class.
Occurrence Attributes
Occurrence attributes are attributes with Read/Write access. These attributes are denoted by
oa: at the top of a part class sheet.

In the software, occurrence attributes appear on the Properties dialog boxes, on the
Occurrence tab or Parameters tab. If all oa: attributes are removed from the part class sheet,
and the Bulkload utility is run, then all of the attributes will be Read-Only (grayed-out) on the
Properties dialog boxes for parts in that part class.


See Also
Adding and Modifying Custom Interfaces (on page 61)

Add User Attributes to a Class
1. Open the Systems.xls file, which is delivered in the [Product
Directory]\CatalogData\DataFiles\BulkLoad\SampleDataFiles folder. This file provides a
sample that you can follow during this procedure.
2. Create a new workbook.
3. Click Insert > Worksheet, and add two sheets: CustomInterfaces and
CustomClassInterfaceList.
4. On the CustomInterfaces sheet, type a name in the InterfaceName column.

This interface will contain the attributes that you want to add.
Begin the interface name with "IJUA".
5. In the Category column, type a category, if necessary.

If you do not type a category name (leave the column blank), the custom attributes will
appear in the Standard category in the software.
To add a new category, you must add the category name to a codelist. For example, in
the delivered AllCodeLists.xls, you would add the category name to the
PropertyCategories sheet and then bulk load. The short description text and the text
on the CustomInterfaces sheet must match.
6. Complete the remaining columns as necessary. For more information about the columns,
see Custom Interfaces Sheet (on page 68).
7. On the CustomClassInterfaceList sheet, type a name in the ClassName column.
You can find this name using the 3D Schema Browser. For example, the pipe run class
name is CPMPipeRun.
8. In the InterfaceName column, type the same name you specified for the new interface on
the CustomInterfaces sheet.
9. Save and exit the workbook.
10. Bulk load the workbook in the Append mode, to ensure the schema update and
regeneration of the views in the database. If you are using any codelists, remember to add
the codelist files on the Bulkload dialog box.
Bulk Load Database with Data (on page 82)

The added attributes are available for all objects in the class that you specified, including the
objects that are already modeled. You can select multiple instances of this class and then
define common values.
See Also


Custom Interfaces Sheet
The CustomInterfaces sheet allows you to load a custom schema into the metadata of a
catalog. This sheet defines the customized user interfaces and attributes (properties) for the part
classes in the workbook.
When you bulk load a workbook, the software looks at each user attribute on the class sheets
and uses the Custom Interfaces sheet to decode the information. When an object uses a single
attribute from an interface, the object also inherits all the attributes for that interface regardless
of whether the object uses the other attributes.
The outcome of bulk loading a Custom Interfaces sheet is the GUIDs sheet. The Bulkload
utility creates the GUIDs sheet if you are bulk loading a workbook for the first time. Successive
attempts to load the workbook attempt to reuse the GUIDs available on the GUIDs sheet.
An interface is a collection of attributes. A complete interface definition includes one or more
attribute names with associated data type, unit type, and optional symbol parameter. An
attribute with the same name can exist on more than one interface. On a part class sheet, you
can scope the user attributes based on their interfaces and symbol parameters. The scoping
syntax is Interface::UserAttribute<Symbol Parameter>. For example, for a part class Vessel, the
user attribute Length is a property of an Interface IJUAVessel and the symbol parameter is H. In
a part class Tank, the user attribute Length is a property of an Interface IJUATank and the
symbol parameter is L. Then, the complete definition of the user attribute in each part class is
IJUAVessel::Length<H> and IJUATank::Length<L>.
If the user-attribute name is unique (that is, the attribute is not shared with another interface),
you only need to type the user-attribute name and symbol parameter on the class sheet. In the
preceding example, you can type Length<H> in this case. If the attribute name is unique and
the default symbol parameter is the same on the Custom Interfaces sheet and on the class
sheet, then you only need to type the user attribute name on the class sheet: Length.
When you are adding a new part class that uses custom interfaces, regardless of whether the
custom interfaces already reside in the Catalog database, you must still include the definition of
the custom interfaces for the part class on the Custom Interfaces sheet. This Custom
Interfaces sheet must reside in the same workbook as the part class that you are bulk loading.
You can use the Systems.xls workbook in the [Product
Directory]\CatalogData\BulkLoad\SampleDataFiles folder as a sample when you want to add
customized user attributes to certain objects. An example is adding attributes to pipe runs.
InterfaceName - Specifies the custom interfaces, which are property sets. Start each
user-defined interface name with IJUA. For example, if you want to define a new interface called
CentrifugalPump, name the interface IJUACentrifugalPump. You should not change
system-defined interfaces, which start with IJ.
CategoryName - Specifies the category for the custom interface. System-defined interfaces
(starting with IJ) are in the Standard category by default.
The purpose of the category is to filter the grid on the Properties dialog box and to assist in
reporting queries. When you are working on a part in the model, you can view the categories on
the General or Occurrence tab of the Properties dialog box. All attributes in IJ interfaces
appear in the Standard category, while the attributes in IJUA interfaces appear in their specified
categories.
AttributeName - Specifies the attributes available for the part classes in the workbook. The
names cannot have any blanks or special characters.
The attribute name is the UserAttribute component in the syntax
Interface::UserAttribute<Symbol Parameter>. If the attribute name is unique throughout the


catalog's interfaces, then you do not need to specify the Interface:: portion of the syntax
statement.
AttributeUserName - Provides a user-friendly name for the attribute. This name is optional and
can include blank spaces. When users view a Properties dialog box or build a report query for
an object, they see attribute user names, not attribute names.
Attribute user names do not need to be unique within the model.
Type - Specifies the data type for each attribute. For example, many attributes are associated
with the Double data type, which is used for real numbers. Available data types include Bit,
Char, Double, Short, Long, Number, Single, and String. Double and Char are the two most often
used.
UnitsType - Specifies the unit type, which is defined in the software. If there is no unit type, you
can leave this cell blank or type 0. The unit types are defined in the Core component of the
software. For more information, see Appendix: Units of Measure (on page 261) in the
SmartPlant 3D Reference Data Guide.
PrimaryUnits - Specifies the units for the attribute. If there is no primary unit, you can leave this
cell blank or type 0. Like unit types, primary units are defined in the Core component of the
software. For more information, see Appendix: Units of Measure (on page 261) in the
SmartPlant 3D Reference Data Guide.
Primary units are the default units for a particular attribute if you do not specify units in user
tasks. For example, if you only type a number for the pump flow rate on a class sheet without
specifying units, the units are whatever you specified in the PrimaryUnits column for the flow
rate attribute.
CodeList - Specifies a codelist for the attribute. If you want the attribute to use a codelist, type
the name of the codelist in this column; otherwise, leave the column blank. The names of the
codelists are listed in the 'Head' line on each sheet in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook. On part
sheets that use the codelisted attribute, specify the numerical value from the codelist.
For example, if you want to use a codelist for the end preparation attribute, type
EndPreparation in the CodeList column on the Custom Interfaces sheet. Then, on a part
sheet that uses this attribute, type 301 to indicate male ends, welded with beveled end.
Do not type a 0 in the Codelist column. Leave it blank if there is not a codelist for
the attribute.
CodeListTableNamespace - Specifies the namespace of the codelist.
The CodeListTableNamespace column is presented as a sample on the Custom Interfaces
sheet in the StructHandrails.xls workbook. One namespace is called REFDAT. For
user-defined codelist tables, the namespace is UDP. For more information, see Select List
(Codelist) Namespaces (on page 144).
OnPropertyPage - Specifies whether the attribute is listed on the Properties dialog box for the
part class. You can type TRUE or 1, or FALSE or 0 in this column. The reason this column
exists is that you might want to prevent users from viewing some attributes on the Properties
dialog boxes.
ReadOnly - Specifies if the attribute is read-only on the user interface. Attributes that are not
read-only are generally occurrence attributes, which are marked with oa: beside their names on
the part class sheets in the class definition section. For more information about occurrence
attributes, see Controlling Access to Attributes (on page 63) in the SmartPlant 3D Reference
Data Guide.
SymbolParameter - Specifies a default symbol input parameter that the interface uses to drive
the symbol. The symbol parameter names cannot have any blanks or special characters.
The symbol parameter name is the <Symbol Parameter> component in the syntax
Interface::UserAttribute<Symbol Parameter>. If the symbol parameter name on the Custom


Interfaces sheet is the same as the symbol input variable in the Visual Basic project, the Solid
Edge assembly file, or the Symbol 2D cross section, then you do not need to specify the symbol
parameter portion of the syntax on the class sheet.
If an attribute is used for naming rules only and is not used in a symbol, then you can leave the
SymbolParameter column blank.

Custom Class Interface List Sheet
The CustomClassInterfaceList sheet maps interfaces to classes. Each interface and class
must already exist in the Catalog Schema database. During processing, the Bulkload utility
relates the custom-defined virtual interfaces to the specified non-virtual, system classes. The
utility does not recognize any of the bulkload update modes and does not create new interfaces
or classes while scanning this sheet.
Class Name - Lists the name of the non-virtual class.
Interface Name - Lists the name of the custom virtual interface.

GUIDs Sheet
The GUIDs sheet contains Globally Unique Identifiers, which are registry identifiers. The GUIDs
are visible only in the Excel workbooks; the GUIDs do not appear on the user interface in the
software.
One of the purposes of GUIDs is to create a connection between part classes in reference data
and the occurrences created in the model from those part classes. For example, when you
delete a part class, redefine it, and bulk load the new definition, you should keep the old GUID if
you want any previously-created occurrences in the model to be connected to the new part class
definition in reference data.
Another situation in which GUIDs are used is when you bulk load a spreadsheet to another, new
catalog. The GUIDs for the objects in the new catalog will be exactly the same as those in the
original catalog.
The GUIDs sheet records the GUIDs used when bulkloading the spreadsheet the first time. This
sheet is specific to a particular workbook and contains only those GUIDs of the user classes and
interfaces in that workbook.
The purpose of storing GUIDs is so that you can replace a Catalog database in the middle of a
project. The replacement catalog must have the same name and location as the previous
catalog. The GUIDs sheet helps to avoid the situation in which a replacement Catalog database
causes existing models to become invalid. If the GUIDs were not saved, this situation would be
impossible because the Catalog and Model databases share the same schema.
Two utilities generate GUIDs: the Database Wizard and the Bulkload utility. The Database
Wizard generates GUIDs when creating the Catalog database set from the delivered
CatalogDB.dat file. The Bulkload utility generates GUIDs when creating a new Catalog database
set using the New mode. When the Bulkload utility creates new GUIDs, it uses Excel to write
these values to the workbooks. You must not have any Excel instances running when bulk
loading, or the process locks.
After you have bulk loaded a catalog using Excel workbooks, you must not modify the GUID
entries in the workbooks used to create the live database. Only the Bulkload utility should
change data on a GUIDs sheet that is linked to a live Catalog database.
It is essential that you not manually modify any generated GUIDs.
Class/InterfaceName - Lists the part class names and interface names of the classes defined in
the workbook. Custom interfaces are defined on the Custom Interfaces sheet.
PackageName - Lists the packages, if applicable, for the class and interface names.


GUID - Contains GUIDs for the part class occurrences and interface occurrences in the model.
The software identifies an occurrence by this GUID when you place an object in the model.
AttributeName - Lists the user attribute names. This column is applicable only to those user
interfaces for which user attributes have been defined. The column is empty for user classes.
DispID - Lists the DispIDs for the user attributes. This column is applicable only to those user
interfaces for which user attributes have been defined. The column is empty for user classes.
The AttributeName and DispId columns are necessary for achieving metadata
consistency between multiple catalogs.

Part Class Sheets
Topics
Part Class Sheet ............................................................................ 71

Part Class Sheet
Many of the reference data workbooks contain part class sheets. Each part class sheet consists
of the class definition and the parts definition. The class definition is marked with the keyword
Definition, and the parts definition is marked with the keywords Head/Start/End.
Once you delete a part class, you cannot re-create it in the Catalog using the same
name. Internally, a record of it is kept after you delete the part class. You can re-create the part
class under a different part class name. The part items in the part class can remain the same
(same names).
Class Definition
The class definition portion contains information for the entire class. When you define the
individual parts, you can override the class information. If you do not redefine the information for
a specific part, the software uses the information for the entire class.
Part Class Type - Specifies the type of part class. The part class types are defined on the Part
Class Types sheet in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook.
The Bulkload utility processes a new part class only if the type in the Part Class Type column is
in the Part Class Types select list. This check is for both specific part class types and generic
part class types.
Symbol Definition - Specifies the symbol file for the part class. The following list shows the
symbol file for each application that you can use to create the symbols.
Visual Basic: Project.Class Module
Solid Edge: Assembly (.asm) file
SmartPlant 3D 2D Symbols: Symbol (.sym) file
The following columns in the class definition are optional.
Codebase - Specifies the symbol's cabinet file name relative to the location in the Symbol and
custom program file location box on the Bulkload dialog box. If you specify a Codebase
value, the symbol code downloads the symbol .dll file from the cabinet file located on the symbol
server.
Here is an example of an entry in the Codebase cell.
%CAB_SERVER%\Pump.CAB

Enter the text CAB_SERVER literally; do not replace it with a server name.


The Codebase column must be in the class definition section, not the parts definition
section.
The purpose of using cabinet files to package symbols is to avoid the requirement of registering
the symbols on each client. For more information about creating symbol packages, see the
SmartPlant 3D Symbols Reference Data Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides
command in the software.
Symbol Icon - Specifies a graphic file for the part class. You can view this graphic in the
Catalog task interface or on a Properties dialog box in the software.
If the part class worksheet has a symbol icon file name present, but the symbol icon file is
missing from the SharedContent share, then the Bulkload utility generates a warning in its log
file.
User Class Name - Sets the user class name. This name is also known as a definition class
name. You can use this field to provide a more meaningful name for the class or a name with
spaces in it. This name appears in the Catalog task and Catalog browser control.
Occ Class Name - Sets the occurrence class name. This name appears in the business object
hierarchy on the Object Type tab on the Filter Properties dialog boxes.
Additional columns in the class definition portion can include nozzle and occurrence attribute
(oa:) information. For more information about occurrence attributes, see Controlling Access to
Attributes (on page 63).
Parts Definition
Name - Provides the name of the part.
Part Description - Provides a description for the part.
Other columns in the parts definitions section can include nozzle and attribute information. You
can view these attributes on the Definition tabs of the Properties dialog boxes in the software.
For more information about the parts definitions in each discipline, see the reference data
guides available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.

Do not use special characters such as < > . - ! ? + ' % , ; | & ~ * in the names of part classes
(sheet names). The Bulkload utility will not create or modify the part classes if their names
include these characters. Microsoft Excel prevents the use of ! and *, and Bulkload writes an
error message to the log file for the other special characters.
If you add new part classes after creating the Reports databases, you must re-generate the
Reports databases in order to report on the new part classes.
You can type fractional values for NPD (nominal piping diameter) in the class or parts
definition sections. For example, you can type 2-1/2 or 2 1/2. The Bulkload utility interprets
the value as 2.5.
If an attribute is used for naming rules only, then you do not need to define the attribute on a
part class sheet.
See Also
Controlling Access to Attributes (on page 63)



Catalog Hierarchy Sheets
Topics
Catalog Hierarchy Sheets .............................................................. 73
CatalogRoot Sheet ........................................................................ 74
ClassNodeType Sheet ................................................................... 74
R-ClassNodeDescribes Sheet ....................................................... 74
R-Hierarchy Sheet ......................................................................... 75

Catalog Hierarchy Sheets
You can customize the Catalog hierarchy for multiple levels. Each successive level is designed
to segregate and categorize the reference data.
The last folder in each branch of the hierarchy is called a part class, which contains individual
parts. For example, one part class in the delivered reference data is Horizontal Centrifugal
Pump. The part class contains horizontal centrifugal pumps with different dimensions. The last
folder in a branch can hold rules instead of parts.
The folder directly above a part class folder in the hierarchy is called a classification folder.
Folders above classification folders are termed hierarchy folders. You can add as many
hierarchy folders down through the hierarchy as necessary. Once you define a classification
folder, that classification folder can only contain part classes. Part classes represent the lowest
possible locations in the hierarchy.

If a folder in the hierarchy has children, all the immediate children must be of the same type.
For example, a folder's immediate children can be part classes, or other folders, but not both
part classes and folders.
Internal object names of the hierarchy folders and classification folders must be unique in
the Catalog. Part class names must also be unique.
In the picture, Components and Bends/Elbows are hierarchy folders. The item 45degElbows
is a classification folder, and E45 is a part class.

To customize the Catalog hierarchy, you must edit the Excel workbooks, which contain four
sheets that control the hierarchy: CatalogRoot, ClassNodeType, R-Hierarchy, and
R-ClassNodeDescribes. Hierarchy sheets do not contain attribute names; they contain object
names.


When you add a part class to the Catalog hierarchy, you must update the hierarchy sheets,
where necessary, in order to see the data in the Catalog task.
See Also
Add Part Classes to Existing Classification Folders (on page 77)
Add Part Classes to New Classification Folders (on page 75)
CatalogRoot Sheet (on page 74)
ClassNodeType Sheet (on page 74)
R-ClassNodeDescribes Sheet (on page 74)
R-Hierarchy Sheet (on page 75)

CatalogRoot Sheet
The CatalogRoot sheet defines the root folder for the data in a workbook. The catalog root is
the highest allowable level in the hierarchy for a discipline. For example, the Cabling.xls data is
stored in the Cable root folder in the Catalog task.
Available roots are listed on the Catalog Root sheet in the AllCommon.xls workbook.
Name - Specifies the name of the root folder for that workbook. There cannot be a blank space
or special characters in the name of the root folder.
ClassNodeType Sheet
The ClassNodeType sheet defines the folder object names and corresponding user interface
names.
ObjectName - Specifies the object name of a classification folder. Use this name when you
reference the node on other sheets, such as the R-ClassNodeDescribes sheet. This name
must be unique in the Catalog.
Name - Specifies the user interface name of a classification folder. This name appears in the
Catalog task user interface and does not need to be unique in the Catalog.

R-ClassNodeDescribes Sheet
The R-ClassNodesDescribes sheet maps the classification folder names to the part classes.
For example, the delivered Cabling.xls workbook lists a classification folder called CablesNode.
A classification folder can have one or more part classes. The CablesNode classification folder
is associated with the Power Cables, Communication Cables, Radio Frequency Cables, Fiber
Optic Cables, and Hybrid Cables part classes on the R-ClassNodeDescribes sheet.
All children of a classification folder must be part classes. You cannot mix part
classes with folders beneath a classification folder.
RelationSource - Specifies the classification folder name. This name is the object name in the
ObjectName column on the ClassNodeType sheet. This name must be unique in the Catalog.
For more information, see ClassNodeType Sheet (on page 74) in the SmartPlant 3D Reference
Data Guide.
RelationDestination - Specifies the part classes associated with the classification folder name.
Part class names are the same as sheet names in the workbook and must be unique in the
Catalog. When you select a part class folder in the Catalog task, you see the contents (parts) in
the right pane of the window.


R-Hierarchy Sheet
The R-Hierarchy sheet maps parent and child relationships between folders in the Catalog
hierarchy. For example, in the Equipment.xls workbook, one of the parents is CatalogRoot. The
child associated with CatalogRoot is RefDataEquipmentRoot.
These folder names are object names, not names that appear on the user interface. These
names must be unique in the Catalog.
A parent folder can have any number of children. However, a child folder can only have one
parent. A familiar example is the hierarchy of folders in Windows Explorer.
RelationSource - Specifies the parent object names.
RelationDestination - Specifies the children object names.
The R-Hierarchy sheet specifies relationships between all parent and children folders,
except part classes and the classification folders right above the part classes in the hierarchy.
These folders are related on the R- ClassNodeDescribes sheet.

Using Catalog Hierarchy Sheets to Add Part Classes
Topics
Adding Part Classes to the Catalog ............................................... 75
Add Part Classes to New Classification Folders ........................... 75
Add Part Classes to Existing Classification Folders ...................... 77

Adding Part Classes to the Catalog
To add a part class to the Catalog hierarchy, you must edit the Excel workbook for your task.
Before you modify a workbook, save a backup copy. That way, you can always bulk
load the previous data.
When you add a part class to an existing classification folder, you just need to edit the
R-ClassNodeDescribes sheet. When you add a part class to a new classification folder, you
must edit the ClassNodeType, R-Hierarchy, and R- ClassNodeDescribes sheets.
You must also add a specific part class sheet to the workbook. You can copy an existing part
class sheet and modify it as necessary. You must create the symbol definition for the new part
using Visual Basic, Solid Edge, or SmartPlant 2D Symbols.
If you add new part classes after creating the Reports databases, you must re- create the
Reports databases in order to report on the new part classes.
See Also



Add Part Classes to New Classification Folders

Before you begin this procedure, you should create a symbol definition for the part class that
you will add. You can use Visual Basic or Solid Edge to create the symbol definition. For
more information about symbols, see the SmartPlant 3D Symbols Reference Data Guide
available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.
In the Excel workbook for your task, copy and rename an existing sheet with the name of
the part class that you want to add. The example in this procedure uses
MyDistillationColumn as the part class.

It is helpful to draw a picture of the reference data hierarchy that you want before following
this procedure.
This picture shows the hierarchy in the procedure example.

1. Open a reference data workbook in Microsoft Excel.
2. On the ClassNodeType sheet, insert a row before the End keyword and enter a name for
the classification folder in the ObjectName column. For example, if you want to add a part
class called MyDistillationColumn to the hierarchy, this part class can be grouped under a
classification folder that contains distillation columns. In our example, enter
DistillationColObj in the ObjectName column.
The object name of the classification folder is important because you will use it again in
this procedure.
3. Also on the ClassNodeType sheet, enter the user interface name for the classification
folder in the Name column. This name appears in the Catalog task user interface. In our
example, type DistillationColumns.
4. On the R-Hierarchy sheet, relate the folder object names in the hierarchy. In our example,
CatalogRoot is a parent to RefDataEquipmentRoot. The default hierarchy contains
CatalogRoot in the RelationSource column and RefDataEquipmentRoot in the
RelationDestination column.
5. Also on the R-Hierarchy sheet, in another row, type RefDataEquipmentRoot in the
RelationSource column and DistillationColObj in the RelationDestination column.
All folders must be related in the hierarchy on the R-Hierarchy sheet, except the
classification folder and the part class (these folders are related on the R-
ClassNodeDescribes sheet).
6. On the R- ClassNodeDescribes sheet, relate the part class to the classification folder
above the part class in the hierarchy. In the RelationSource column, type
DistillationColObj. This name matches the object name of the classification folder that you
entered on the ClassNodeType sheet. In the RelationDestination column, type the name
of the part class, MyDistillationColumn.


7. Mark all of the rows that you added on the ClassNodeType, R-Hierarchy, and
R-ClassNodeDescribes sheets with the letter A.
8. Bulk load the workbook in the Add/Modify/Delete mode.
See Also

Add Part Classes to Existing Classification Folders

Before you begin this procedure, you should create a symbol definition for the part class that
you will add. You can use Visual Basic or Solid Edge to create the symbol definition. For
more information about symbols, see the SmartPlant 3D Symbols Reference Data Guide
In the Excel workbook for your task, copy and rename an existing sheet with the name of
the part class that you want to add. The example in this procedure uses MyPump as the
part class.

It is helpful to draw a picture of the reference data hierarchy that you want before following
this procedure.
This picture shows the hierarchy in the procedure example.

1. Open a reference data workbook in Microsoft Excel.
2. On the R-ClassNodeDescribes sheet, relate the part class to the classification folder above
the part class in the hierarchy. In the RelationSource column, type Pumps. This name
matches the object name of the Pumps classification folder on the ClassNodeType sheet.
In the RelationDestination column, type the name of the part class, MyPump.
3. Mark the row that you added with the letter A.
4. Bulk load the workbook in the Add/Modify/Delete mode.
See Also




S E C T I O N 4
In This Section
Using the Bulkload Modes ............................................................. 79
Bulk Load Database with Data ...................................................... 82
Bulkload Dialog Box ....................................................................... 86
Uniqueness of Objects ................................................................... 89
Moniker Information for Special Process Sheets........................... 98

Using the Bulkload Modes
In order to use reference data in the software, you can transfer data in the Excel workbooks to
the Catalog database using the Bulkload utility.
Bulkloading is a process that imports data from the Excel workbooks into the Catalog database.
You should back up the workbooks as needed before you make modifications and begin the
loading process.
The loading process has several modes available: New, Append, Add/Modify/Delete, and Delete
and Replace. In addition, the Bulkload utility includes an option for creating flavors of Solid Edge
parts.
The time taken by the bulk loading process varies. More time is required when a schema
change (such as adding a codelist value, a new interface, or a part class) is made. Schema
changes trigger the re-creation of the views in the database.
In the Append and Add/Modify/Delete modes, the Bulkload utility first looks for the default
permission group in which to create the objects. If the default permission group is not found,
then the utility creates the objects in the first available permission group to which the user has
write access.
New
You should use the New mode when you are creating a new Catalog database.
The New mode is different from the Append and the Add/Modify/Delete modes in that a live
database set (Catalog and Catalog Schema) is not already available on the server. In the New
mode, you choose the database type and enter a name for the catalog that you want to create.
You also select a template file to create the Catalog Schema.
When you run the Bulkload utility in the New mode, the utility creates interfaces. For information
on limitations associated with interfaces, see Custom Interfaces Sheet (on page 68).
Append
You can use the Append mode when you want to add data from many new workbooks or
worksheets to the Catalog database. When you use this mode, the software scans the data and
adds only the new classes and parts to the database. The software does not observe any
Add/Modify/Delete flags in this mode.
The Append mode is normally used for large updates to the catalog.
Loading Reference Data into the Catalog


Add/Modify/Delete
The Add/Modify/Delete mode is best used when you are modifying the database on a smaller
scale or when you are modifying pre-existing classes. In this mode, the Bulkload utility scans the
workbooks for flags at the beginning of each row. The table below defines the flags and the
actions associated with them.
Flag Operation Notes
A Add The Bulkload utility adds the object to the
database and removes the letter A from the
row upon successful addition.
M Modify The Bulkload utility modifies the object in
the database and removes the letter M from
the row upon successful modification.
D Delete The Bulkload utility deletes the object, but
does NOT remove the letter D. You must
verify that the object was deleted using the
log file.
For example, if the Bulkload utility sees an M at the beginning of a row, the software modifies
that entry in the Catalog database with the changes in that row.
The Bulkload utility removes the A and M designations from the workbooks during the loading
process. However, the rows marked with D are still marked with D. You can open the workbooks
with rows marked D and comment out those rows manually after the bulkload. Type the ! symbol
at the beginning of each row that you want to comment out. If you do not remove or comment
out the deleted rows, you will receive errors the next time that you bulk load because the
Bulkload utility will attempt to delete objects that no longer exist in the catalog.
You should be aware of the rules that affect deleting part classes and parts. You can delete a
part class by typing a D at the beginning of the Definition row on the part class sheet. When
you delete a part class, you cannot reuse the part class name in the same database set.
However, if you delete parts (line items within a class, not the class itself), you CAN reuse the
names of the parts.
To modify a part name, you can use a combination of deleting and adding operations. Copy a
part row, insert the row in the Head/Start/End section, and change the name. Then mark the
original row with D and the inserted row with A. The row marked with D must come before the
row marked with A going from top to bottom on the sheet. The reason is that the bulkload
operations occur sequentially from top to bottom on a sheet.
To modify a UserClassName or OccClassName, place an M at the beginning of the row and
enter the new names in the UserClassName and OccClassName cells.



Delete and Replace
The Delete and Replace mode is useful when you would like to replace all the data in the
Catalog database with the data currently in Excel workbooks. New part classes are appended to
the Catalog.
This option has some limitations. You can change the definition of a part class, but you cannot
change the part class type. Also, this option is not supported for sheets common to all the
workbooks, including the ClassNodeType and R- Hierarchy sheets. If you bulk load these
unsupported sheets, the utility writes a warning to the log file and does not process the sheets.
When this mode is used to replace entire piping material classes (for example, 1C0031), only
those piping material classes appearing in the bulkloaded workbook are deleted and replaced.
All other piping material classes in the database are unaffected.
If you are re-creating part classes or parts, you must include the R-
ClassNodeDescribes sheets in the workbooks in order to establish relationships among the
hierarchical nodes in the reference data.
The table below lists the data types and whether or not they are compatible with the Delete and
Replace mode.
Data Type Supported?
Cabletray yes
Cableway yes
Cable yes
Code lists yes
Conduit yes
Drawings no
Equipment yes
Name Rules yes
Grids yes
Hangers and Supports yes
HVAC no
IFC yes
Iso (Iso keys) no
Modules N/A
Nozzles yes
Piping yes
Reports no
Shapes N/A
Structure no
Space Management yes


Create Flavors
The Create flavors option computes and stores in the catalog the specific geometry for each
different size of a part class. Flavors apply to Solid Edge parts only. You can use the Create
flavors option with any of the bulkloading modes.
For example, the reference data might include two parts with different symbol input parameters.
Both parts refer to the same Solid Edge assembly set. At the time of bulkloading, if you select
the Create flavors option, then the Bulkload utility creates a one-to-one relationship symbol
using the symbol parameters for each part and stores this symbol in the Catalog database. If
you do not select the Create flavors option, then at placement time in the model, the
workstation placing the symbol performs the parameterized changes to the symbol, based on
the reference data, before the placement.
You can add flavors for Solid Edge parts that are already in the catalog. Mark the rows for the
parts with M and bulk load in the Add/Modify/Delete mode with the Create flavors option
selected.
To bulk load flavors for Solid Edge parts, Solid Edge must be installed on the computer
performing the bulkload process. To place Solid Edge equipment without flavors in the catalog,
the workstation performing the placement must have Solid Edge installed.
See Also

Bulk Load Database with Data

You should back up all Excel workbooks before modifying them and bulk loading. All of the
workbooks are delivered with read-only properties.
When you use the Bulkload utility to create a new Catalog, the Excel workbooks for the
Hangers and Supports task must appear last in the list. If they are not placed at the end of
the input files list, errors will be generated in the log file.
Do this procedure on a workstation computer with the Bulkload component and SmartPlant
3D Server Connectivity component installed. Log on with a user name that has database
ownership privileges. For more information about necessary components, see the
SmartPlant 3D Installation Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides command in
the software.
You should close all Excel workbooks before starting the bulkload. Do not open Excel during
the bulkload.
1. Click Start > Programs > Intergraph SmartPlant 3D > Database Tools > Bulkload
Reference Data.
2. In the Excel files box, specify the Excel workbooks to load by clicking Add.

The default location for reference data workbooks is [Product
Directory]\CatalogData\BulkLoad\DataFiles.
You can select more than one workbook to bulk load. Hold CTRL and click each
workbook in the Open dialog box.
Select the workbooks that contain the parts and cross sections in the Excel files box.
You specify the codelist workbooks in the Excel codelist files box.


3. In the Excel codelist files box, click the browse button to specify the codelist
workbooks.
You must specify a workbook in this box if you are creating a new catalog, adding a
new codelist, or modifying an existing codelist. In all other cases, you are not required to
populate this box.
4. Under Bulkload mode, select a mode for the bulkloading process.
Mode Description
Bulk load to a new catalog Creates a new Catalog database.
Append to existing catalog Adds new classes only to an
existing database.
Add, modify, or delete
records in existing catalog
Reads flags in Excel workbook to
add, modify, or delete data.
Delete and replace Deletes all records in the Catalog
database and replaces with data in
Excel workbooks. New part classes
are appended to the Catalog.
If you are re-creating part classes or parts, you must include the
R-ClassNodeDescribes sheets in the workbooks in order to establish relationships among
the hierarchical nodes in the reference data.
5. If you want to store geometry for each unique part defined by the Solid Edge model, select
Create flavors.

Do not select Create flavors when you are creating symbols.
The Create flavors option can increase the time needed for the bulkload process. If you
are loading Solid Edge flavors, you must have Solid Edge installed on the bulkload
computer.
6. If you are working in a test catalog or a training environment, you can clear the Update
Object Type Hierarchy and Catalog Views check box to reduce bulkloading time.
However, if you are in a production environment, leave this option selected.
7. Under Catalog information, select either MSSQL or ORACLE in the Database Type box.
This box is enabled only if you are creating a new database set.
If you selected MSSQL, select the name of a server in the Database server name box.
This location is where the Catalog database and schema are stored (or will be stored, if
you are creating a new database set).
If you selected ORACLE, select the name of the Oracle net service for the Catalog
database connection in the Oracle Service box. The service must exist before you
choose it in this box.
8. In the Database name box, select the name of the Catalog database that you want to
update with new reference data.

To create a new database, select <New Database>, and you can type a name for the
new database.
If you select a site or model database in the Database name box, the utility displays a
notification message.


9. If you are modifying an existing catalog, select the Catalog Schema database name in the
Schema database name box.
The Schema server name box is read-only. The software completes this box with the
name of the database server that you selected in the Database server name box.
10. If you are creating a new catalog, click the browse button beside the Template file to
be used to create schema box to specify the template file for the Catalog Schema.
For MSSQL, use the AppRepos.dat file to create the Catalog Schema. This file is
located in [Product Directory]\DatabaseTemplates on the server computer.
For ORACLE, use the AppRepos.dmp file to create the Catalog Schema. This file is
located in [Product Directory]\DatabaseTemplates on the server computer.
11. In the Log file box, click the browse button to specify the name and location of the log
file.

The default location for the log file is [Product
Directory]\CatalogData\BulkLoad\DataFiles, but you can change this location.
You must have write privileges to the folder in which you are saving the log file.
The log file name must not contain any special characters. However, you can use the
back slash when specifying a UNC path to a log file.
You must use the file extension .log for the log file.
12. If you are bulk loading to a new catalog, click the browse button under Symbol and
custom program file location and select a SharedContent folder on the server.

This box is populated automatically if you are using the Append, Add/Modify/Delete, or
Delete and Replace modes. You should not modify the location unless you are sure that
you want to change the symbol path for the catalog.
To allow all workstations to access the symbols, specify a UNC path to a shared folder
on a remote computer, such as the server. The server setup installs the contents of the
SharedContent folder under [Product Directory]\CatalogData, so if the computer name
is smith, you can type \\smith\SharedContent. At a minimum, users need read access
to this share. They need change access in order to modify the symbols.
13. Click Load. You can see messages in the status bar of the Bulkload utility while it is running.
If you interrupt the bulkloading process, you may see a Switch To/Retry message.
Click Switch To to return to the bulkloading process.


14. Open the log file to check for any errors or warnings in the bulkloading process. You can
quickly scan the Error Analysis section at the end of the log file to check for errors.

15. Click Close.

You can modify the Excel workbooks and bulk load again to correct errors.
Create a new log file for each bulkload operation, instead of overwriting the existing one.
Check the log file for errors after each bulkload operation.
It is recommended that a Project Management backup be done after each bulkload step. If
an error occurs, it is easy to restore and correct the problem.



Bulkload Dialog Box
This utility sets options for adding reference data from Excel workbooks to the Catalog
database.
Excel files - Displays one or more Excel workbooks for loading into the Catalog database.
These workbooks contain the reference data.
The software bulk loads the files in the order they are listed in the Excel files box.
Add - Lists additional Excel workbooks in the Excel files box.
Delete - Removes currently selected Excel workbooks from the Excel files box.
Excel codelist files - Lists the codelist Excel workbooks. Click the browse button to access
the Open dialog box, which allows you to select one or more Excel codelist workbooks for
loading into the Catalog Schema database. To remove a codelist workbook, you must click
Reset to clear all boxes on the Bulkload dialog box.
You must select a codelist workbook when one of the following criteria is met:
You have updated the codelist information and want to bulk load the modified data into the
live database.
You are creating a new catalog with the Bulkload to a new catalog option.
For all other instances, the Excel codelist files box can remain empty.
Bulkload mode - Allows you to select the type of bulkload.
Bulkload to a new catalog - Select this mode when you want to create a new Catalog
database set. You can use this mode to create a new catalog containing your company data and
not any delivered reference data. In this mode, you must specify a template file for the schema.
Append to the existing catalog - Select this mode when you want to only add new classes to
the Catalog database. In this mode, the software does not read any Add/Modify/Delete flags in
the column beginning each row. Use this mode for large updates to the catalog.
Add, modify, or delete records in existing catalog - Select this mode when you want to
modify the Catalog database on a smaller scale than in the Append mode. Use the
Add/Modify/Delete mode for small updates to the catalog.
In the Add/Modify/Delete mode, the Bulkload utility scans the workbook(s) for certain flags (A,
M, D) at the beginning of rows. Here are the flags and the actions associated with them:
Letter Designation Operation
A Add
M Modify
D Delete
For example, if the Bulkload utility sees an M at the beginning of a row in the workbook, the
software modifies that entry in the Catalog database.


Delete and replace records in existing catalog - Replaces existing data in the Catalog
database with the data in Excel workbooks. New part classes are appended to the Catalog.
This option has some limitations. You can change the definition of a part class, but you cannot
change the part class type. Also, this option is not supported for sheets common to all the
workbooks, such as the ClassNodeType and R- Hierarchy sheets. If you bulk load these
unsupported sheets, the utility writes a warning to the log file and does not process the sheets.
If you are re-creating part classes or parts, you must include the R-
ClassNodeDescribes sheets in the workbooks in order to establish relationships among the
hierarchical nodes in the reference data.
Create flavors - Select this option when you want to compute and store in the Catalog the
specific geometry for each different size of a part class. This mode allows users to place an
occurrence of a particular part in the model without having a license for Solid Edge on their
computers. However, you must have Solid Edge installed on the administrator computer that
does the bulkload process for the specific parts and flavors.
Update Object Type Hierarchy and Catalog Views - Select this option to update the Object
Type Hierarchy (BOC) and the catalog view after bulkloading the data. Clearing this option will
significantly reduce the time it takes to bulkload the workbooks. However, you should leave this
option selected unless you are bulkloading to a test catalog. Do not bulkload to a production
catalog without making sure this option is selected.
Database Type - Select the type of database, either ORACLE or MSSQL. This box is enabled
only if you are creating a new database set.
The following box is labeled Database server name if you chose MSSQL. It is labeled Oracle
Service if you chose ORACLE.
Database server name - Select the server that stores the Catalog database.
Oracle Service - Select the name of the Oracle net service for the Catalog database
connection.
Database name - Select the name of the Catalog database into which you want to load
reference data. If you are using the Bulkload to a new catalog mode, select <New Database>
and type a name in the Database name box. If you select a site or model database in this box,
the utility displays a notification message.
The following two boxes appear only for the Append and Add/Modify/Delete modes.
Catalog schema server - Displays the name of the server that stores the Catalog Schema
database. This server is the same as the name in the Database server name box.
Catalog schema database - For preexisting catalog sets, select the name of the Catalog
Schema database.

If the necessary schema database does not appear in the Schema database name list,
click <Refresh>. This situation occurs if you created a schema database after opening the
Bulkload dialog box.
If you are using the Bulkload to a new catalog mode, the Catalog schema server and
Catalog schema database boxes do not appear. Instead, complete the box labeled
Template file to be used to create schema.
Template file to be used to create schema - Specifies the template file for the Catalog
Schema.
For MSSQL, use the AppRepos.dat file to create the Catalog Schema. This file is located in
[Product Directory]\DatabaseTemplates on the server computer.
For ORACLE, use the AppRepos.dmp file to create the Catalog Schema. This file is located
in [Product Directory]\DatabaseTemplates on the server computer.


Log file - Click the browse button to specify a location and name for the log file, which
records the bulkloading status, including any error messages. The log file name must follow
operating system constraints and cannot contain any special characters. However, you can use
the backslash when specifying a UNC path to a log file.

You must use the file extension .log for the log file.
You must have write privileges to the folder to which you are saving the log file.
Symbol and custom program file location - Displays the location for symbols in Solid Edge or
Visual Basic format. In the Append and Add/Modify/Delete modes, the Bulkload utility
automatically populates this box with the current symbol location. For these modes, you should
not modify the location unless you are sure that you want to change the symbol path for the
catalog. In the New mode, you can click the browse button to specify the location. You can
also change the location in the Project Management task on the Properties dialog box.
This location is stored in the Catalog database and is accessed by the other tasks at run-time in
order to read and compute the symbol files. To allow all workstations to access the symbols,
specify a UNC path (for example, \\MyServer\SharedContent) to a shared folder on a remote
computer, such as the server. At a minimum, users need read access to this share. They need
change access in order to modify the symbols.
You can also specify a path (such as D:\SharedContent) on the local computer, but this action
does not allow other workstations to access the symbols.
Load - Starts the bulkload.
See Also
Using the Bulkload Modes (on page 79)

Bulkload from the Command Line
You can run the Bulkload utility from the command line using option switches.
Here is an example of the syntax for updating the Catalog using the Add/Modify/Delete mode:
"C:\Program Files\SmartPlant\3D\CatalogData\BulkLoad\Bin\Bulkload.exe"
-i AllCommon.xls -l Ismaning.log -ds SP3D -dn Ismaning_catalog -ss SP3D -sn
Ismaning_catalog_SCHEMA -sp \\SP3d\Symbols -a 0 -u 1 -r 0 -f 0
Here is an example for a fresh bulkload (New mode):
"C:\Program Files\SmartPlant\3D\CatalogData\BulkLoad\Bin\Bulkload.exe"
-i Bulkload_List.lst -l Ismaning.log -ds SP3D -dn Ismaning_catalog -ss SP3D
-sn \\sp3d13\6122DatabaseTemplates\AppRepos.dat -sp \\SP3d\Symbols -a 0 -u
0 -r 0 -f 0

The command prompt must point directly to the folder under which the executable is
located, or the complete path to the executable must be specified at the command prompt
as required to execute any Windows application.


The input file names and paths to the files must not contain any blanks. If you have an input
file with one or more blank spaces in its name or path, such as C:\Program Files\My
Data\AllCommon.xls, you must use a temporary list file (.lst) to list the file. The command will
not work otherwise, even if you enclose the file name and path with quotation marks.
Option Description
-i Input Excel file (.xls) or .lst file with .xls entries.
-ci Input codelist file (.xls) or .lst file with .xls entries.
-l Log file (.log).
-ds Database Server name or Oracle Service name.
-dn Catalog Database name.
-ss Schema Server name or Oracle Service name.
-sn Catalog Schema Database name. For a fresh bulkload
(if the -a 0 -u 0 -r 0 options are used), you must provide
the full path to the template schema file here.
-a Append mode. Set to 1 for append.
-u Update mode (add/modify/delete). Set to 1 for
add/modify/delete.
-r Replace mode. Set to 1 for replace.
-f Create flavors mode. Set to 1 to create flavors.
-sp Symbol path.
-pt Provider type for the Catalog Database. Specify Oracle
if the database type is Oracle. The default is MSSQL.
-st Provider type for the Catalog Schema Database.
Specify Oracle if the database type is Oracle. The
default is MSSQL.
-un User name.
-pd Password.
-bv Updates the Object Type Hierarchy and Catalog views.
Set to 1 to update. Set to 0 to not update. The default is
1 if this option is not specified. Set to 0 only if you are
bulk loading to a test catalog.
See Also
Using the Bulkload Modes (on page 79)



Uniqueness of Objects
When you want to modify or delete existing objects in the catalog using the Add/Modify/Delete
mode, you must first identify the properties that define the uniqueness of the object.
The reason is that when you modify or delete an object in the catalog, the Bulkload utility needs
to identify a row on the Excel sheet with an existing object in the database. For this purpose,
Bulkload uses certain properties of the object that play a role in naming the object.
For example, in the piping material class table, the piping specification object in the database is
identified by its specification name (SpecName). You can change all the properties on a piping
specification except its SpecName. If you change the SpecName, then the identity of that object
is lost, and hence Bulkload reports an error that it cannot find the object.
The following table lists all objects in alphabetical order and the corresponding unique
properties.
Object Unique Properties
Allowable Piping
Materials Class
SpecName, FluidCode
Auto WBS Creation
Rule
RuleName
Bend Angles SpecName, Npd, NpdUnitType, BendAngle
Bend Radius Multiplier
Rule
NominalPipingDiameter, NominalPipingDiameterUnits,
PipeBendRadiusMultiplier
Bolt Commodity Code
Subst Rule
ContractorCommodityCode, BoltDiameter, BoltLength
Bolt Diameter
Equivalence Rule
BoltDiameterInPrimaryUnits, PrimaryUnitsOfMeasure
Bolt Extension NominalPipingDiameter, NominalPipingDiameterUnits, PressureRating,
EndPreparation, EndStandard
Bolt Part Data IndustryCommodityCode
Bolt Selection Filter SpecName, NominalDiameterFrom, NominalDiameterTo, BoltOption,
MaximumTemperature, EndPreparation, PressureRating, EndStandard,
AlternateEndPreparation, AlternatePressureRating,
AlternateEndStandard
Bolt Selection Filter
For Nozzles
EquipmentTagNumber, NozzleTagnumber, ContractorCommodityCode,
BoltingRequirements, QuantityOfCapScrews,
CapScrewContractorCmdtyCode, CapScrewDiameter,
TappedHoleDepth, BoltExtensionOption
Cable Nozzle PortType, SubType, Diameter, Area, Tightness
Cabletray Ports NominalWidth, NominalDepth, ActualWidth, ActualDepth
Cable Tray Spec SpecName
Cable Way Bend
Radius
SpecName, BendRadius


CableWay Nominal
Sizes
SpecName, SectionName
Cableway Spec SpecName
Calculation ProgIDs DesignStandard
Cap Screw
LenCalTolerance
BoltType, BoltLengthFrom, BoltLengthTo, BoltDiameterFrom,
BoltDiameterTo
Cap Screw LenCal
Tolerance Per Spec
SpecName, BoltType, BoltLengthFrom, BoltLengthTo,
BoltDiameterFrom, BoltDiameterTo
Clamp Selection Filter SpecName, NominalDiameterFrom, NominalDiameterTo, ClampOption,
EndPreparation, EndStandard, AlternateEndPreparation,
Class Node Type ObjectName
Commodity Specific
Service Limits
IndustryCommodityCode, FirstSize, FirstSizeUnits, FirstSizeSchedule,
SecondSize, SecondSizeUnits, SecondSizeSchedule, MultisizeOption,
IndustryCommodityCodeGasket, MaximumTemperature,
MaximumPressure
Component Insulation
Exclusion
PipingCommodityType, FirstSizeFrom, FirstSizeTo, SecondSizeFrom,
SecondSizeTo, MultiSizeOption, HeatTracingMedium,
InsulationTemperatureFrom, InsulationTemperatureTo
Conduit Commodity
Matl Control Data
ContractorCommodityCode, FirstSizeFrom, FirstSizeTo, FirstSizeUnits,
SecondSizeFrom, SecondSizeTo, SecondSizeUnits
Conduit Default Cmdty
Slcn Rule
FeatureType
Conduit Filter SpecName, ShortCode, FirstSizeFrom, FirstSizeTo, FirstSizeUnits,
SecondSizeFrom, SecondSizeTo, SecondSizeUnits, CommodityOption,
OptionCategory, ContractorCommodityCode, Comments, BendRadius,
BendRadiusMultiplier, SelectionBasis
Conduit Nominal
Diameters
SpecName, Npd, NpdUnitType
Conduit Ports Npd, NpdUnitType, EndPreparation, ScheduleThickness, EndStandard,
PressureRating, FlowDirection
Conduit Spec SpecName
Corrosion Allowance SpecName, MaterialsCategory, CorrosionAllowance
Default Change of
Direction
BendAngleFrom, BendAngleTo
Default Change of
Direction Per Spec
SpecName, BendAngleFrom, BendAngleTo
Default Commodity
Selection Rule
FeatureType


DIN Wall Thickness
Data
FirstSize, FirstSizeUnits, SecondSize, SecondSizeUnits,
MultiSizeOption, GeometricIndustryStandard, FirstSizeSchedule,
SecondSizeSchedule
Field Fit Length WeldType, NominalPipingDiameterFrom, NominalPipingDiameterTo,
NominalPipingDiameterUnits, ConstructionRequirementEnd1,
ConstructionRequirementEnd2, FieldFitLength
Field Fit Length Per
Spec
SpecName, WeldType, NominalPipingDiameterFrom,
NominalPipingDiameterTo, NominalPipingDiameterUnits,
ConstructionRequirementEnd1, ConstructionRequirementEnd2,
FieldFitLength
Field Lining Thickness SpecName, NominalPipingDiameterFrom, NominalPipingDiameterTo,
NominalPipingDiameterUnits
Flared Pipe NominalPipingDiameter, NominalPipingDiameterUnits,
ScheduleThickness
Flared Pipe Per Spec SpecName, NominalPipingDiameter, NominalPipingDiameterUnits,
ScheduleThickness,
Fluid Density Rule FluidCode, TemperatureFrom, TemperatureTo, Density
Gasket Part Data IndustryCommodityCode, RingNumber, NominalDiameterFrom,
NominalDiameterTo, NominalDiameter, NpdUnitType,
GasketIndustryStandard
Gasket Selection Filter SpecName, NominalDiameterFrom, NominalDiameterTo, GasketOption,
AlternateEndStandard, FluidCode, ScheduleThickness,
MinimumTemperature
Gasket Selection Filter
For Nozzles
EquipmentTagNumber, NozzleTagNumber, ContractorCommodityCode,
GasketRequirements, RingNumber
Hanger Class Node ObjectName
IFC Clearance Rule RuleName, ObjectType1, Aspect1, ObjectType2, Aspect2
IFC Post Processor
Rule
RuleName
Inside Surface
Treatment
SpecName, NominalPipingDiameterFrom, NominalPipingDiameterTo,
NominalPipingDiameterUnits, FluidCode
Instrument Class Data TagNumber, GenericTagNumber, FirstSizeFrom, FirstSizeTo,
FirstSizeUnits, SecondSizeFrom, SecondSizeTo, SecondSizeUnits,
MultiSizeOption
Insulation Thickness
Table
SpecName, Npd_Lo, Npd_Hi, Temperature_Lo, Temperature_Hi
Jacket Closure SpecName, NominalPipingDiameterFrom, NominalPipingDiameterTo,
NominalPipingDiameterUnits, JacketClosureMethod
Joint Quality Factor SpecName, NominalDiameterFrom, NominalDiameterTo, NpdUnitType,
CommodityOption


Lined Connector
Selection Filter
SpecName, NominalDiameterFrom, NominalDiameterTo, NpdUnitType,
Liner Thickness Data NominalPipingDiameter, NominalDiameterUnits, LiningMaterial,
GeometricIndustryStandard
Mach Bolt Len Cal
Tolerance
BoltDiameterTo
Mach Bolt Len Cal
Tolerance Per Spec
Materials Data DesignStandard, MaterialsGrade, Temperature, WallThicknessFrom,
WallThicknessTo, CoefficientY, AllowableStress, MillTolerance,
MillTolerancePercentage
Mating Ports EndPrep1, EndPrep2
MechJointAllowPipeEn
dSeparation
NominalPipingDiameterUnits, GeometricIndustryStandard,
GeometricIndustryPractice
Minimum Pipe Length
Rule
NominalPipingDiameter, NominalPipingDiameterUnits
Minimum Pipe Length
Rule Per Spec
Min Pipe Length
Purchase
NominalPipingDiameter, PurchaseLength
Min Pipe Length
Purchase Per Spec
SpecName, NominalPipingDiameter, PurchaseLength
Multiport Valve
Operator Data
ContractorCommodityCode, PortNumber
NPD Equivalence NPDInPrimaryUnitsOfMeasure, PrimaryUnitsOfMeasure
Nut Part Data IndustryCommodityCode
Nut Selection Filter SpecName, NutOption, MaximumTemperature, BoltType, BoltDiameter,
PressureRating
Outside Surface
Treatment
NominalPipingDiameterUnits, EnvironmentalZone
Permissible Duct
Thickness
MaterialType, MaterialGrade, PermissibleDuctThickness
Permissible Jacket
And Jumper Sizes
SpecName, CoreNominalPipeDiameter,
CoreNominalPipeDiameterUnits, JacketNominalPipeDiameter,
JacketNominalPipeDiameterUnits, JumperNominalPipeDiameter,
JumperNominalPipeDiameterUnits


Permissible Jacket
Size Exceptions
SpecName, CoreNominalPipeDiameter,
CoreNominalPipeDiameterUnits, JacketNominalPipeDiameter,
JacketNominalPipeDiameterUnits, ShortCode
Permissible Pipe
Bending Machine
NominalPipingDiameterUOM
Permissible Taps SpecName, PermissibleTapNumber
Pipe Bending
Configuration Data
IsBendPlanar, NominalBendAngleFrom1, NominalBendAngleTo1,
NonPlanarRotationAngleFrom2, NonPlanarRotationAngleTo2,
NominalBendAngleFrom2, NominalBendAngleTo2,
NominalBendAngleFrom8, NominalBendAngleTo8
Pipe Bending Die Data PipeBendingMachineName, NominalPipingDiameter,
NominalPipingDiameterUOM, PipeBendRadiusMultiplier
Pipe Bending
Elongation
NominalPipingDiameter, NominalPipingDiameterUnits, PipeBendRadius,
BendAngle
Pipe Bending
Elongation Per Spec
SpecName, NominalPipingDiameter, NominalPipingDiameterUnits,
PipeBendRadius, BendAngle
Pipe Bending Machine
Data
PipeBendingMachineName
Pipe Bending Min
Tangent Len Data
PipeBendingMachineName, PipeBendType,
MinBendToBendTanLenOption, NominalPipingDiameter,
NominalPipingDiameterUOM, PipeBendRadiusMultiplier
Pipe Branch SpecName, HeaderSize, HdrSizeNpdUnitType, BranchSize,
BrSizeNpdUnitType, AngleLow, AngleHigh
Pipe Branch For
Jackets
SpecName, HeaderSize, HdrSizeNpdUnitType, BranchSize,
BrSizeNpdUnitType, AngleLow, AngleHigh
Pipe Mfg Map Symbol PartClassName, SKEY, CodeList
Pipe Mfg Rules IsoNames
Pipe Mfg Spool Rule Name
Pipe Nominal
Diameters


Pipe Part Spec SpecName, FirstSizeFrom, FirstSizeTo, FirstSizeUnits,
SecondSizeFrom, SecondSizeTo, SecondSizeUnits, ShortCode,
OptionCode, MultisizeOption
Pipe Schedule
Thickness
Npd, NpdUnitType, Schedule, Thickness
Pipe Spec SpecName
Pipe Takedown Parts SpecName, Npd, NpdUnitType
Piping Commodity
Filter
SpecName, FirstSizeFrom, FirstSizeTo, FirstSizeUnits,
SecondSizeFrom, SecondSizeTo, SecondSizeUnits, ShortCode,
OptionCode, MultisizeOption, MaximumTemperature,
MinimumTemperature, SelectionBasis
Piping Commodity
Matl Control Data
ContractorCommodityCode, FirstSizeFrom, FirstSizeTo, FirstSizeUnits,
SecondSizeFrom, SecondSizeTo, SecondSizeUnits
Piping Commodity
Procurement Data
CommodityCode, FirstSize, FirstSizeUnits, SecondSize,
SecondSizeUnits, MultisizeOption, FirstSizeSchedule,
SecondSizeSchedule
Piping Elbow Nozzles Npd, NpdUnitType, EndPreparation, ScheduleThickness, EndStandard,
PressureRating, FlowDirection, BendRadius, BendLength
Piping Generic Data
Bolted
NominalPipingDiameter, NominalDiameterUnits, EndPreparation,
EndStandard, PressureRating
Piping Generic Data
Female
EndStandard, PressureRating, Schedule
Piping Generic Data
Mechanical
EndStandard, PressureRating
Piping Materials Class
Data
SpecName
Piping Specialty Class
Data
TagNumber, GenericTagNumber, FirstSizeFrom, FirstSizeTo,
FirstSizeUnits, SecondSizeFrom, SecondSizeTo, SecondSizeUnits,
MultiSizeOption
Piping Straight
Nozzles
Npd, NpdUnitType, EndPreparation, ScheduleThickness, EndStandard,
PressureRating, FlowDirection
Plain Piping Generic
Data
NominalPipingDiameter, NominalDiameterUnits, EndStandard,
Schedule, PressureRating
Plate Flange Setback
Distance
NominalPipingDiameterFrom, NominalPipingDiameterTo,
Port Alignment NominalPipingDiameterFrom, NominalPipingDiameterTo,
NominalPipingDiameterUnits, EndPreparation
Port Alignment Per
Spec
NominalPipingDiameterUnits, EndPreparation


Preferred Cap Screw
Length
BoltType, BoltDiameterFrom, BoltDiameterTo, BoltDiameterIncrement,
MaterialsGrade, PreferredBoltLengthFrom, PreferredBoltLengthTo,
PreferredBoltLengthIncrement
Preferred Cap Screw
Length Per Spec
SpecName, BoltType, BoltDiameterFrom, BoltDiameterTo,
BoltDiameterIncrement, MaterialsGrade, PreferredBoltLengthFrom,
PreferredBoltLengthTo, PreferredBoltLengthIncrement
Preferred Mach Bolt
Length
Preferred Mach Bolt
Length Per Spec
Preferred Stud Bolt
Length
Preferred Stud Bolt
Length Per Spec
PreferredTapEndStud
BoltLength
PrefTapEndStudBoltL
engthPerSpec
Reference Standard Name
Reinforcing Pad Data SpecName, HeaderSize, HeaderSizeUnitsOfMeasure, BranchSize,
BranchSizeUnitsOfMeasure, AcuteBranchAngleFrom,
AcuteBranchAngleTo
Reinforcing Weld Data SpecName, HeaderSize, HeaderSizeUnitsOfMeasure, BranchSize,
BranchSizeUnitsOfMeasure, AcuteBranchAngleFrom,
AcuteBranchAngleTo
Report Name
Rootgap NominalPipingDiameterFrom, NominalPipingDiameterTo,
Rootgap Per Spec SpecName, NominalPipingDiameterFrom, NominalPipingDiameterTo,
Service Limits SpecName, Temperature, Pressure, NominalPipingDiameterFrom,
NominalPipingDiameterTo, NominalPipingDiameterUnits
Service Limits For
Jackets
SpecName, Temperature, Pressure
Short Code Hierarchy
Rule
ShortCodeHierarchyType, ShortCode


Size Reduction SizeReductionType, FirstSize, FirstSizeUnits, SecondSize,
SecondSizeUnits, SizeReductionPreference
Size Reduction Per
Spec
SpecName, SizeReductionType, FirstSize, FirstSizeUnits, SecondSize,
SecondSizeUnits, SizeReductionPreference
Slip On Flange
Setback Distance
NominalPipingDiameterUnits, CompanyPracticeGap,
CompanyPracticeRoundOffFactor, EndStandard,
MaximumWeldThickness
Space Group ObjectName
Standard Notes Data Name, Purpose
Stud Bolt Len Cal
Tolerance
BoltDiameterTo
Stud Bolt Len Cal
Tolerance Per Spec
Swaged Jacket Pipe
Rule
NominalPipingDiameter, NominalPipingDiameterUnits, Schedule
Swaged Jacket Pipe
Rule Per Spec
SpecName, NominalPipingDiameter, NominalPipingDiameterUnits,
Schedule
TapEndStudBoltLenC
alTol
BoltDiameterTo
TapEndStudBoltLenC
alTolPerSpec
Tap Properties TapNumber
Thickness Data Rule SpecName, NominalPipingDiameter, NominalPipingDiameterUnits,
ScheduleThickness
Valve Operator Matl
Control Data
OperatorPartNumber
Washer Part Data IndustryCommodityCode
Washer Selection
Filter
SpecName, WasherOption, MaximumTemperature, BoltDiameter,
PressureRating
Weld Clearance Rule SpecName, NominalPipingDiameterFrom, NominalPipingDiameterTo,
NominalPipingDiameterUnits, WeldClass
Weld Gap Rule SpecName, WeldType, NominalPipingDiameterFrom,
NominalPipingDiameterTo, NominalPipingDiameterUnits
Weld Model
Representation Rule
NominalPipingDiameterUnits, WeldClass
Weld Type Rule FabricationTypeOfEnd1, ConstructionRequirementOfEnd1,
FabricationTypeOfEnd2, ConstructionRequirementOfEnd2


Moniker Information for Special Process Sheets
The monikers are used for all those sheets and the corresponding objects that are processed
explicitly by bulkload and whose "SpecialProcess" flag is set to True in
\CatalogData\BulkLoad\Bin\OccurrenceClasses.xml and
\ShipCatalogData\BulkLoad\Bin\GSCAD.xml.
OccurrenceClasses.xml
Sheet / Object Moniker
MatlThkRange MatlThkRange_ThkLow-ThkHigh
Example: If ThkLow is 25 and ThkHigh is 55, then:
MatlThkRange_0.025-0.055
PlateDimensions

PlateDimension_Thickness
Example: If Thickness is 0.0625, then:
PlateDimension_0.0625
ProfileGroups CrossSectionGroup_<GroupId>
Example: if GroupId is Group1, then:
CrossSectionGroup_ Group1
Cables For Receptacle: <Receptacle>
For Connector: <PartNumber> (ConnectorPartNumber)
For BackShell: <PartNumber> (BackShellPartNumber)
HoleMgmtRules <Name> (RuleName)
NamingRules For Class Node: NAMING_RULE <TypeName>
Example: If TypeName is CSPGElevationPlane, then:
NAMING_RULE CSPGElevationPlane
For Naming Rule: <Name><SolverProgID>
Example: If Name is DefaultNameRule and SolverProgID is
NameRules.CommonNameRule, then:
DefaultNameRule NameRules.CommonNameRule
CrossSectionType <Name> (Name of CrossSectionType)
InsulationSpec <SpecName> (Name of the Insulation Specification, for
example "Calcium Silicate")
StructInsulationSpec_Fireproof StructInsulationSpec_<SpecName>
Example: If SpecName is Conc_1hr, then:
StructInsulationSpec_Conc_1hr
InsulationMaterial For Piping:
PipingInsulationMaterial_<MaterialType>


HVACInsulationMaterial For Hvac: HvacInsulationMaterial_<MaterialType>
EquipmentInsulationMaterial For Equipment:
EqptInsulationMaterial_<MaterialType>
PipeBendRadii < SpecName >, <Npd> <NpdUnitType>,
<BendRadiusMultiplier>
HvacSpec <SpecName>
HvacSpecDefaults Default=<SpecName>
PlateStock PlateStock__<PartNumber>
ProfileStock ProfileStock_<PartNumber>
ProfileClass <MaterialType>-<MaterialGrade>
GeometricConstructionTypes <Name>
GSCAD.xml
MoldedFormSpec <SpecName>
MoldedConventions MFSpecObj should be there
MoldedFormNaming <ObjectName>
WCEquipRel <ObjectName>
SmartQuery Sheets are removed and these objects are created only once
along with the data.
RuleQuery
WorkcenterQuery
WorkcenterQuery No sheets are available with this name




S E C T I O N 5
Common reference data that applies to several disciplines is defined in the AllCommon.xls
workbook. This data includes generic piping commodity data, outfitting cross sections, and units
of measurement.
See Also
AllCommon Sheets and Disciplines (on page 102)
AllCommon Sheets (on page 101)

AllCommon.xls Workbook
AllCommon Sheets
The AllCommon.xls workbook contains data that applies to several of the design disciplines in
the software.
Some sheets in the AllCommon.xls workbook, such as the Legend sheet and the Revision
History sheet, are common to all the workbooks. For more information on common sheets, see
Describing the Common Sheets in the Workbooks (on page 57).
The sheets that are in AllCommon.xls are listed below. The piping generic data sheets also
appear in Piping Catalog.xls.
Plain Piping Generic Data - Contains data for plain piping ends. For more information, see
Plain Piping Generic Data Sheet (on page 102).
DIN Wall Thickness Data - Contains generic wall thickness data. For more information, see
DIN Wall Thickness Data Sheet (on page 103).
Piping Generic Data Bolted - Contains generic data for bolted ends. For more information, see
Piping Generic Data Bolted Sheet (on page 104).
Piping Generic Data Female - Contains generic data for female ends. For more information,
see Piping Generic Data Female Sheet (on page 110).
Piping Generic Data Mechanical - Contains generic data for mechanical ends. For more
information, see Piping Generic Data Mechanical Sheet (on page 111).
Material - Defines material grades and material grade properties. For more information, see
Material Sheet (on page 111).
Outfitting Cross Sections - Defines cross sections for outfitting disciplines, such as Cableway
and HVAC. For more information, see Outfitting Cross Sections Sheet (on page 112).
UOM - Defines units and unit types for customized user attributes on the Custom Interfaces
sheet in the other workbooks. For more information, see UOM Sheet (on page 112).

AllCommon Reference Data


AllCommon Sheets and Disciplines
The following table lists the sheets in the AllCommon.xls workbook and their associated
disciplines.
Sheet Discipline
Plain Piping Generic Data Piping, Conduit
DIN Wall Thickness Data Piping
Piping Generic Data Bolted Piping
Piping Generic Data Female Piping, Conduit
Piping Generic Data Mechanical Piping
Material Structure
Outfitting Cross Sections Cableway, HVAC
UOM All
See Also
AllCommon Reference Data (on page 101)

Plain Piping Generic Data Sheet
The Plain Piping Generic Data sheet in the AllCommon.xls workbook defines generic data for
plain piping ends.
Nominal Piping Diameter - Type the nominal piping diameter for the plain pipe.
Nominal Diameter Units - Specify the units for the NPD column. For example, type mm or in.
End Standard - Type the end standard code. Valid codes are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls
workbook on the End Standard sheet in the Codelist Number column.
Schedule - Type the schedule code.
Pressure Rating - Type the maximum pressure allowed for the pipe.
Piping Outside Diameter - Type the outside diameter value with units.
Wall Thickness - Type the pipe wall thickness with units.
See Also



DIN Wall Thickness Data Sheet
The DIN Wall Thickness Data sheet in the AllCommon.xls workbook defines wall thicknesses
for the DIN standard.
First Size - Enter a size or thickness.
First Size Units - Specifies the units for the First Size column. For example, type in for inches
or mm for millimeters.
Second Size - Enter a second size or thickness.
Second Size Units - Specifies the units for the Second Size column. For example, type in for
inches or mm for millimeters.
MultiSize Option - Type a string to represent an optional selection for multi-sized fittings when
the first size and second size are inadequate. For example, if two additional sizes (2" and 1") are
required in addition to a first size of 6" and a second size of 4", the string that would represent
the sizes would be 6"x4"x2"x1". The software interprets the string to determine the second size,
the number of sizes in addition to the first size and second size, and the units of measure for
each size. If you do not include a unit of measure in the string, the unit of measure for the first
size, defined under First Size Units, is used.
Geometric Industry Standard - Enter the code that represents the source used in the
preparation of the catalog data. Valid codes are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the
Geometric Industry Standard sheet in the Codelist Number column.
First Size Schedule - Enter the code that represents the schedule (or thickness) for the first
size end. Valid codes and short descriptions are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the
Schedule Thickness sheet in the Codelist Number and Schedule Thickness Short
Description columns.
Second Size Schedule - Enter the code that represents the schedule (or thickness) for the first
size end. Valid codes and short descriptions are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the
Schedule Thickness sheet in the Codelist Number and Schedule Thickness Short
Description columns.
Wall Thickness for Port 1 - Specify the wall thickness, with units, for port 1.
Reinforced Wall Thickness for Port 1 - Specify the reinforced wall thickness, with units, for
port 1.
port 2.
port 3.
port 4.
port 5.
See Also



Piping Generic Data Bolted Sheet
The Piping Generic Data Bolted sheet in the AllCommon.xls workbook defines generic data
for bolted piping ends.
Nominal Piping Diameter - Type the nominal piping diameter for the bolted end.
Pressure Rating - Type the pressure rating code for the bolted end. This property defines the
envelope of pressure to which the bolted end may be subjected. Valid codes are listed in the
AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the Pressure Rating sheet in the Codelist Number column.
End Preparation - Type the end preparation code for the bolted end. Valid codes are listed in
the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the End Preparation sheet in the Codelist Number column.
End Standard - Type the end standard code for the bolted end. Valid codes are listed in the
AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the End Standard sheet in the Codelist Number column.
Flange Outside Diameter - Type the flange outside diameter of the bolted end.
Flange Thickness - Type the distance from the outermost face of the flange to the back surface
of the flange on which the nut rests. This distance includes any projections that the flange may
have, such as raised-face, only if the manufacturer's data includes any projections. The flange
thickness includes the thickness of the loose flange used, but does not include the wall
thickness of the pipe or stub end for lap-flanged ends. In terms of ASME B16.5 (1996), this
value is considered the minimum flange thickness.
Flange Thickness Tolerance - Type the plus tolerance for the flange thickness. For example,
ANSI B16.5 (1996) specifies the flange thickness tolerance as 1/8" for NPD 18" and smaller,
and a tolerance of 3/16" for NPD 20" and larger.
This value is required for computing bolt lengths, when you (the specification writer) prefer to
express the flange thickness tolerance explicitly and independently of the stud or machine bolt
extension.
Flange Face Projection - Type the value that represents any projections that the flange may
have. An example is a raised-face flange.
Raised Face Diameter - Type the raised-face diameter of the bolted end, if applicable to
raised-face flanged ends. This value is required to compute the outside diameter of the gasket
and the inside diameter of the gasket.
Flange Groove Width - Type the groove width of the bolted end, if applicable to groove-flanged
ends. This value is required to compute the outside diameter of the gasket.
Seating Depth - Type the distance from the outermost surface of the bolted end to the seating
surface of the gasket. This column has a value only for small groove flanged, large groove
flanged, small female flanged, large female flanged, small groove lap flanged, large groove lap
flanged, small female lap flanged, large female lap flanged, ring type joint flanged, and
mechanical joints. This value represents the groove depth for ring type joint flanged ends.
Bolt Circle Diameter - Type the diameter of the circle of bolt holes on the face of flange. This
property applies only to circular drilling templates.
Quantity of Bolts Required - Type the number of bolts required for the bolted end.
Bolt Diameter - Type the diameter of the bolts for the bolted end.


Body Outside Diameter - Type the outside diameter of the body of the fitting at the bolted end.
You can still choose to define the body outside diameter with the piping commodity part
data (or piping specialty part data or instrument part data) for certain fittings. This actual body
outside diameter is required for rack piping to match the bottom pipe of the adjacent straight
runs, not only for aesthetic purposes, but also to ensure that, if the body portion of the
component rests on steel, the correct centerline is maintained. Using inaccurate data, in some
cases, will cause false interferences to be reported, and, in other cases, leave diameter
mismatches with adjacent piping.
Drilling Template Pattern - Type the drilling pattern code for the bolted end. This code
represents the arrangement of bolt holes at the bolted end. Valid codes are listed in the
AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the Drilling Template Pattern sheet in the Codelist Number
column. For pictures of common drilling patterns, see Bolt Hole Patterns (on page 105).
Bolt Pattern Length - Type the bolt pattern length for the bolted end.
Bolt Pattern Width - Type the bolt pattern width for the bolted end.
Bolt Pattern Offset - Type the bolt pattern offset for the bolted end.
See Also
Bolt Hole Patterns
The following graphics show the common bolt hole patterns with labeled dimensions. The
Drilling Template Pattern codelist in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook provides a list of codes
for common bolt hole patterns.
Circular Bolt Hole Pattern (two holes up)



Circular Bolt Hole Pattern (one hole up)

Square Bolt Hole Pattern



Square Bolt Hole Pattern with Offset

Rectangular Bolt Hole Pattern



Rectangular Bolt Hole Pattern with Offset

Rectangular Bolt Hole Pattern with Split Flange Face



Triangular Bolt Hole Pattern

Oval Bolt Hole Pattern

See Also



Piping Generic Data Female Sheet
The Piping Generic Data Female sheet in the AllCommon.xls workbook defines generic data
for female piping ends.
Nominal Piping Diameter - Type the nominal piping diameter for the female end.
Pressure Rating - Type the pressure rating code for the female end. Note that the pressure
rating is used as the basis of the female end generic data, if the schedule is undefined.
Typically, a female fitting will not be defined with both a pressure rating and a schedule value.
The Pressure Rating property defines the envelope of pressure to which the female end may
be subjected. Valid codes are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the Pressure Rating
sheet in the Codelist Number column.
End Preparation - Type the end preparation code for the female end. Valid codes are listed in
End Standard - Type the end standard code for the female end. Valid codes are listed in the
Schedule - Type the schedule (or thickness) for the female end. This value is required only for
those female ends where the female end generic data is determined on the basis of the
schedule, and not the pressure rating.
The schedule is used as the basis of the female end generic data, if the pressure rating is
undefined. Typically, a female fitting is not defined with both a pressure rating and a schedule
value.
Socket Diameter - Type the socket, or thread, diameter of the female end.
Socket Depth - Type the socket depth for the female end.
This property also represents the 'length through hub' dimension for the non-bolted end of
slip-on flanges. Otherwise, the existence of a value for socket depth and socket offset will
indicate a socket-welded end.
Socket Offset - Type the offset of the socket for the female end. The typical engineering
practice is a 1/16" offset.
Thread Depth - Type the depth of the exposed threads for the female end. The existence of a
value for thread depth indicates a threaded end.
Hub Outside Diameter - Type the hub outside diameter of the female end.
This data is optional because it is generally not represented as a standard. You can provide this
data for those situations where a detailed representation of the female end is required.
Hub Thickness - Type the hub thickness of the female end.
This data is optional, since it is generally not represented as a standard. You can provide this
data for those situations where a detailed representation of the female end is required.
Body Outside Diameter - Type the outside diameter of the body of the fitting at the female end.
If you do not define a value here, the outside diameter must be available in the plain piping
generic data for the same value of the end standard property.
You can still choose to define the body outside diameter with the piping commodity part
data (or piping specialty part data or instrument part data) for certain fittings. This actual body
outside diameter is required for rack piping to match the bottom pipe of the adjacent straight
runs, not only for aesthetic purposes, but also to ensure that if the body portion of the
component rests on steel, the correct centerline is maintained. Using inaccurate data, in some
cases, will cause false interferences to be reported, and, in other cases, leave diameter
mismatches with adjacent piping.


Piping Generic Data Mechanical Sheet
The Piping Generic Data Mechanical sheet in the AllCommon.xls workbook defines generic
data for mechanical piping ends.
Nominal Piping Diameter - Type the nominal piping diameter for the mechanical end.
Pressure Rating - Type the pressure rating code for the mechanical end.
Note that, typically, a mechanical end does not have a value for pressure rating. If so, the
mechanical end generic data can be defined without pressure rating. In other words, some
mechanical ends may require pressure rating, while other mechanical ends will not.
The Pressure Rating property defines the envelope of pressure to which the mechanical end
may be subjected. Valid codes are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the Pressure
Rating sheet in the Codelist Number column.
End Preparation - Type the end preparation code for the mechanical end. Valid codes are
listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the End Preparation sheet in the Codelist Number
column.
End Standard - Type the end standard code for the mechanical end. Valid codes are listed in
the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the End Standard sheet in the Codelist Number column.
Groove Depth - Type the groove depth for the mechanical end.
Groove Width - Type the groove width for the mechanical end.
Groove Setback - Type the groove setback for the mechanical end.
See Also
Material Sheet
The Material sheet in the AllCommon.xls workbook defines materials and material grades for
structural members. You must define materials and material grades before you can place
members or define member types.
When you bulk load this sheet in Delete and Replace mode, you must also bulk load the
Permissible Duct Thickness rule.
Material Type - Type the material type, for example, Steel- Carbon or Concrete. The
combination of the Material Type and Material Grade columns must be unique.
Material Grade - Type the material grade, for example, A36 or Eh42. The combination of the
Material Type and Material Grade columns must be unique.
Density - Type the mass or weight density of the material, for example, 7800 kg/m
3
. Any
positive real value is valid. Zero is also valid.
Max Tension - Type the maximum allowable tensile stress for the material. Any positive real
value is valid.
Yield Stress - Type the yield stress for the material. Any positive real value is valid.
Elastic Modulus - Specify Young's modulus (the modulus of elasticity) for the material. Any real
value greater than zero is valid.
Poisson Ratio - Specify Poisson's Ratio for the material. Any real value greater than or equal to
zero and less than 0.5 is valid.
Shear Modulus - Type the shear modulus of elasticity for the material. Any real value greater
than zero is valid.


Therm Exp Coeff - Type the coefficient of thermal expansion for the material. Any positive real
value is valid. Zero is also valid.
Max Compression - Type the maximum allowable compressive stress for the material. Any
positive real value is valid.
Max Shear - Type the maximum allowable shear stress for the material. Any positive real value
is valid.
Ultimate Stress - Type the ultimate stress for the material. Any positive real value is valid.
Damping Coeff - Type the damping coefficient for the material. The damping coefficient is used
in dynamic analysis. Any positive real value is valid.
Specific Heat - Type the specific heat for the material.
Thermal Cond - Type the thermal conductivity for the material.
Emissivity - Type the emissivity for the material.
See Also
Outfitting Cross Sections Sheet
The Outfitting Cross Section sheet in the AllCommon.xls workbook defines cross sections for
HVAC and Cableway.
Cross Section Shape - Defines the shape of the cross section. Delivered shapes are
Rectangular, Oval, Flat Oval, and Round.
Symbol Definition - Type the symbol definition for the cross section.
OCSD_Dimension Base Outer - Type the Boolean value (TRUE/FALSE) for the dimension
base. OCSD stands for Outfitting Cross Section Definition. The definition applies to all the sizes
of a given shape.
Section Name - Type the name of the section. Typically, these names start with OCS and
contain the width and depth dimensions. An example name is OCS-10x4.
Width - Type the width, along with units, of the cross section.
Depth - Type the depth, along with units, of the cross section.
Corner Radius - Type the corner radius value, if applicable. Units are not necessary.
OCS_Dimension Base Outer - Type the Boolean value (TRUE/FALSE) for the dimension base.
OCS stands for Outfitting Cross Section. You can override the definition (entered in the OCSD
column) for each cross section size, if necessary.
Area - Type the area of the cross section.
Perimeter - Type the perimeter of the cross section.
See Also



UOM Sheet
The UOM sheet in the AllCommon.xls workbook lists the units and unit types for the custom
user attributes that you can define for objects in the software. The Custom Interfaces sheet in
the other reference data workbooks uses the unit and unit type definitions.
The units and unit types are actually defined in the Core component of the software, and the
UOM sheet is just a preview list of the units and types. For more information about units and unit
types, see Appendix: Units of Measure (on page 261).
Do not modify the UOM sheet in the AllCommon.xls workbook.
Unit Types - Specifies the unit types, such as distance, angle, and so on.
Units - Specifies the available units for each type, such as inches, millimeters, and so on.
See Also
Custom Interfaces Sheet (on page 68)




S E C T I O N 6
The insulation reference data provides information for insulating piping, duct, and equipment.
This information includes material specifications and thickness tables.
See Also
Insulation Sheets (on page 115)
Insulation Reference Data (on page 115)
InsulationData.xls Workbook
Insulation Sheets
The InsulationData.xls workbook contains the reference data for insulation.
Some sheets in the InsulationData.xls workbook, such as the Legend sheet and the Revision
The sheets that are unique to InsulationData.xls are listed below.
Insulation Spec - Defines insulation specifications that you want to use. For more information,
see Insulation Specification Sheet (on page 116).
Insulation Thickness Table - Defines the temperature and thickness ranges that are available
for each insulation specification. For more information, see Insulation Thickness Table Sheet (on
page 116).
Insulation Material - Defines insulation material density and allowable thickness. For more
information, see Insulation Material Sheet (on page 117).
HVAC Insulation Material - Provides the material, density, and thickness of insulation for duct.
For more information, see HVAC Insulation Material Sheet (on page 117).
Equipment Insulation Material - Provides the material, density, and thickness of insulation for
equipment. For more information, see Equipment Insulation Material Sheet (on page 117).
Component Insulation Exclusion - Lists piping commodities that should not have insulation.
For more information, see Component Insulation Exclusion Sheet (on page 118).
See Also
Insulation Reference Data


Insulation Specification Sheet
The Insulation Specification sheet defines the insulation specifications for your catalog.
SpecName - Type a name for the insulation specification that you are defining.
Material - Specifies the material code for the insulation specification. Valid codes are listed in
the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the Insulation Material sheet in the Codelist Number
column.
Purpose - Specifies the purpose code for the insulation specification. Valid codes are listed in
the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the Insulation Purpose sheet in the Codelist Number
column.
Thickness Rule - Specify the thickness rule to use.
Temperature Rule - Specify the temperature rule to use.
See Also
Insulation Thickness Table Sheet
The Insulation Thickness Table sheet defines all possible sizes, temperature ranges, and
insulation thicknesses available for the insulation specifications. Before defining ranges and
insulation thicknesses on this sheet, you must list the insulation specifications on the Insulation
Spec sheet.
Spec Name - Type the insulation specification for which you want to define thickness ranges.
NPD Low - Specify the smallest pipe diameter to be considered in this range.
NPD High - Specify the largest pipe diameter to be considered in this range.
NPD Unit Type - Specify the units of measure for the NPD Low and NPD High columns. Each
delivered insulation specification is defined in both imperial and metric units.
Temperature Low - Specify the lowest temperature to be considered in this range. Include the
temperature unit of measure (K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius) when specifying
this value.
Temperature High - Specify the highest temperature to be considered in this range. Include the
temperature unit of measure (K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius) when specifying
this value.
The temperature from the 3D model must be greater than the lower bound and less than or
equal to the upper bound. The exception is the lowest range in each section on this sheet,
where the temperature can be greater than or equal to the lower bound and less than or equal to
the upper bound.
For example, the lowest range for insulation made of calcium silicate is 100F 400F. Therefore,
you can enter 100F. Note the = sign between Temp_lo and t in the following expression.
Temp_lo <= t <= Temp_hi
For the other ranges, such as 401F 500F in the calcium silicate section, you can only enter a
number between and including 402F 500 F. Note there is no = sign between Temp_lo and t in
the following expression.
Temp_lo < t <= Temp_hi
Thickness - Specify the thickness of the insulation. Include the unit of measure when specifying
this value.


Insulation Material Sheet
The Insulation Material sheet defines the material information about insulation.
Material Type - Specifies the material code for the insulation specification. Valid codes are
listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the Insulation Material sheet in the Codelist
Number column.
Density - Specifies the density of the material.
Allowable Thickness - Lists the valid thicknesses for a given material.
See Also
HVAC Insulation Material Sheet
The HVAC Insulation Material sheet defines insulation for ductwork.
Material Type - Specifies the material code for the insulation specification. Valid codes are
listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the Insulation Material sheet in the Codelist
Number column.
See Also
Equipment Insulation Material Sheet
The Equipment Insulation Material sheet defines insulation for equipment. This information
populates the insulation materials list on the Equipment Properties dialog boxes for equipment
parts that are insulation-capable.
Material - Specifies the material code for the insulation specification. Valid codes are listed in
the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the Insulation Material sheet in the Codelist Number
column.
See Also


Component Insulation Exclusion Sheet
The Component Insulation Exclusion Rule nodesheet in the InsulationData.xls workbook
helps to eliminate false clashes involving piping and instrument components. This rule identifies
conditions under which a component, such as an instrument indicator, is not insulated although
it exists on an insulated line. Another example is that valves, flanges, and unions that are
typically not insulated for personnel protection. This rule does not have any effect on runs whose
Insulation Purpose is set to Undefined.
The components that are not to be insulated are determined on the basis of the piping
commodity type; the first size range; the second size range; the Multi-Size Option; the Heat
Tracing Requirement (heat traced or not), the Insulation Requirement (hot or cold insulation),
and the Insulation Temperature.
The software uses the following convention to determine the temperature to use as the basis of
the rule:
If the piping designer has specified the pipeline insulation temperature, then that insulation
temperature is used.
If the pipeline insulation temperature is undefined, then the heat tracing medium
temperature for jacketed piping (the operating temperature of the jacket fluid) is used.
Otherwise, if the heat tracing medium temperature is undefined, or non-jacketed piping is
being used, the temperature is determined on the basis of these case conditions:
If hot insulation applies, the maximum temperature of the applicable (maximum) case
conditions is used.
If cold insulation applies, the minimum temperature of the applicable (minimum) case
conditions is used.
First Size From - Enter the smallest size in the first size range for this rule.
First Size To - Enter the largest size in the first size range for this rule.
First Size Units - Enter the units of measurement for the first size values, for example, in or
mm.
Heat Tracing Medium - Select the heat-tracing medium to which the rule applies. Valid codelist
numbers are specified on the Heat Tracing Medium sheet in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook in
the Codelist Number column.
Heat Tracing Type - Select the heat-tracing type to which the rule applies.
Heat Tracing Requirement - Select the heat-tracing requirement to which the rule applies.
Insulation Purpose - Select the insulation purpose to which the rule applies. Valid codelist
numbers are specified on the Insulation Purpose sheet in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook in
the Codelist Number column.
Insulation Type - Select the insulation type to which the rule applies.
Insulation Requirement - Select the insulation requirement to which the rule applies.
Insulation Temperature From - Specify the lowest temperature in the temperature range to
which the rule applies.
Insulation Temperature To - Specify the highest temperature in the temperature range to
which the rule applies.


Multi-Size Option - Type a string to represent an optional piping commodity selection for
multi-sized fittings when the first size and second size are inadequate.
For example, if two additional sizes (2" and 1") are required in addition to a first size of 6" and a
second size of 4", the string that would represent the sizes would be 6x4x2x1. The software
interprets the string to determine the second size and the number of sizes in addition to the first
size and second size. Do not include a unit of measure in the string. The unit of measure for the
first size, defined in the First Size Units column is used.
Piping Commodity Type - Specify the commodity type codelist number for which you are
defining a rule. Valid commodity types codelist numbers are specified on the Piping
Commodity Type sheet in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook in the Codelist Number column.
Piping Commodity Sub Class - Select the piping commodity sub class.
Piping Commodity Class - Select the piping commodity class.
Second Size From - Enter the smallest size in the second size range for this rule.
Second Size To - Enter the largest size in the second size range for this rule.
Second Size Units - Enter the units of measurement for the second size values, for example, in
or mm.
See Also
Define Component Insulation Exclusion (on page 119)

Define Component Insulation Exclusion
1. Open the InsulationData.xls workbook.
2. Select the Component Insulation Exclusion sheet.
3. Select a row after the Start keyword but before the End keyword, and click Insert > Row.
4. In the Piping Commodity Type column, enter the codelist number for the piping commodity
for which you are defining the rule.
5. In the First Size From column, specify the beginning first size for the range.
6. In the First Size To column, specify the ending first size for the range.
7. In the First Size Units column, specify the units.
8. In the Heat Tracing Medium column, specify the heat tracing medium codelist number.
9. In the Insulation Purpose column, specify the insulation purpose codelist number.
10. Enter the insulation temperature range.
11. Save the InsulationData.xls workbook and bulkload it into the catalog.




S E C T I O N 7
Module types are used in the Copy to Catalog and Paste from Catalog commands available in
the Common task. You can copy a set of objects to the catalog and then later paste the set of
objects into another model that uses the same catalog.
See Also
Module Type Sheets (on page 121)

ModuleTypes.xls Workbook
Module Type Sheets
The ModuleTypes.xls workbook contains data that applies to several of the design disciplines
in the software. Module types are used in the Copy to Catalog and Paste from Catalog
commands in the Common task.
Some sheets in the ModuleTypes.xls workbook, such as the Legend sheet and the Revision
The sheets that are unique to ModuleTypes.xls are listed below. The delivered module types
are either Equipment, Piping, or Supports types.
Equipment Module Types
Conveyor System
Heat Exchanger
Mixing Tank
Piping Module Types
Drain Arrangement
Pump Discharge Arrangement
Pump Suction Arrangement
Vent Arrangement
Module Types Reference Data
Module Types Reference Data


Support Types
Pipe Supports
HVAC Supports
Electrical Supports
Combined Supports
Designed Supports
Each of these sheets contains a class definition section and a parts definition section. The class
definition is marked with the keyword Definition, and the parts definition is marked with the
keywords Head/Start/End. For general information about these sections, see Part Class Sheet
(on page 71).
The parts definition properties on the Module Types sheets (as delivered) are all the same. You
can type a name and description for the module type.
See Also
Module Types Reference Data (on page 121)


S E C T I O N 8
Each task in the software that creates new parts in the model automatically generates a name
for the parts using defined rules.
The reference data for naming rules consists of a list of part classes and associated naming
rules. A Visual Basic program does the naming. You can use the same naming rule for more
than one part class. For more information about Visual Basic rules in the software, refer to the
SmartPlant 3D/SmartMarine 3D Programmer's Guide. This guide is available when you install
the programming resources. For more information about installation, see the "Install Additional
Product Software" section in the SmartPlant 3D Installation Guide.
You can customize the delivered naming rules or create new naming rules. For more
information, see Creating and Distributing Naming Rules (on page 123).
The software often includes new naming rules with each version. If you are migrating your
reference data from a previous version and want to use the new naming rules, you must add the
new naming rules to the GenericNamingRules.xls workbook and then bulk load.
You should not create weld naming rules or use labels that generate weld identifiers with spaces
in them. The WeldNumberLabel allows you to customize weld identifiers on isometric drawings.
This label should not, under any circumstances, result in the generation of an identifier with
spaces in it. Weld identifiers with spaces are not supported.
See Also
Naming Rules Sheets (on page 125)
Naming Rules Sheet (on page 126)
Creating and Distributing Naming Rules
The software makes it possible to create and customize the rules for naming. The process of
customizing naming rules is similar to the process for customizing the symbols. For more
information, see the "Visual Basic Symbols" section in the SmartPlant 3D Symbols Reference
Data Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.
The main difference between distributing new symbols and distributing new naming rules is the
point at which the check for new naming rules is made. Each time the Catalog database is
modified through a bulkload operation, the software checks for new naming rules in the CAB
files. Just integrating the naming rule dll into a CAB file is insufficient (as clients do not go look
for it); a bulkload operation that modifies the Catalog is required.
You can specify cab file information in the SolverProgID field on the NamingRules
sheet. The SolverProgID must be in the following format: <ProgID>|<CAB file location>. An
example is Pipeline.UserPipeline|Pipeline.CAB, where the Pipeline.CAB file is delivered in the
\\<ComputerName>\Symbols folder.
See Also
Naming Rules Sheet (on page 126)
Naming Rules Reference Data


Move Custom DLLs to SharedContent Directory
(Option 1)
Starting with version 2009 of SmartPlant 3D, rules DLLs are saved with other reference data in
the SharedContent folder. Use the following workflow to copy your customized rules to this
single location instead of to each client workstation.
1. Recompile each Visual Basic project in a Version 2011 (9.0) Service Pack 1 client
installation.
2. Copy the new DLLs to the [Reference Data Directory]\SharedContent\Custom Symbols
folder.

You can create folders as needed in the Custom Symbols folder, such as a folder for
each task.
If a custom DLL has a localizer DLL, both should be in the same folder.
DLLs ending "Ref.dll" or "_Ref.dll" are treated as reference DLLs and are ignored.
These DLLs do not need to be copied from the client machine containing the rules
Visual Basic source code.
3. In the Project Management task, select a catalog that uses the SharedContent folder.
4. Click Tools > Update Custom Symbol Configuration.
The command creates or updates the file called CustomSymbolConfig.xml in the [Reference
Data Directory]\SharedContent\Xml folder. CustomSymbolConfig.xml contains entries of
ProgID, CLSID, and DLL name for each class in the custom DLLs. After
CustomSymbolConfig.xml is created, the software uses the custom DLLs from the
[Reference Data Directory]\SharedContent\Custom Symbols folder.

The software parses [Reference Data
Directory]\SharedContent\Xml\SystemSymbolConfig.xml first and then
CustomSymbolConfig.xml. If there are duplicate entries in SystemSymbolConfig.xml and
CustomSymbolConfig.xml for the same ProgID, the last entry is used. An error is logged to
error log when a duplicate entry is found. Whenever a symbol or naming rule class needs to
be created, the software follows the following priority:
a. It checks if an entry for the ProgID exists in the xml files. If an entry exists, then the
corresponding DLL is loaded and an instance of the class is created.
b. If an entry does not exist, then the class is registered.
If an entry exists for a ProgID in the xml files, it is used even though another (or same) copy
of the DLL is registered. The order of priority when creating an instance of an object is:
CustomSymbolConfig.xml, SystemSymbolConfig.xml, and then the registry.
When a new custom DLL is added to the [Reference Data Directory]\SharedContent\Custom
Symbols folder, or an existing custom DLL is modified, you must re-run the Tools > Update
Custom Symbol Configuration command in Project Management.
If you choose to use option 1, then the custom DLLs should not be registered.
If any of these components use helper classes and the helper classes are instantiated by
calling "CreateObject", the "CreateObject" needs to be replaced. If the helper class is in the
same project, then "new" can be used instead of "CreateObject". If the helper class is in a
different project, then "SP3DCreateObject" needs to be used instead of "CreateObject".
SP3DCreateObject tries to instantiate the object using the information in xml files. If no entry


is found in xml files for the given ProgID, then it calls "CreateObject". SP3DCreateObject is
implemented in [Product Directory]\Core\Runtime\SP3DCoCreateInstance.dll. When
SP3DCreateObject needs to be used, [Product
Directory]\Core\Runtime\SP3DCoCreateInstance.dll needs to be referenced in the Visual
Basic project. Example usage of SP3DCreateObject is shown below:
Set oHelperObject = SP3DCreateObject(strHelperProgId)
If the symbol class has any public structures or types, they should be made private. For
example:
Public Type InputType
Name As String
Description As String
Properties As IMSDescriptionProperties
uomValue As Double
End Type
Should be changed to:
Private Type InputType
Name As String
Description As String
Properties As IMSDescriptionProperties
uomValue As Double
End Type
Debugging and maintaining Visual Basic project references, reference DLLs, and binary
compatibility are beyond the scope of this document. Contact your SmartPlant 3D Support
representative if you have questions.
GenericNamingRules.xls Workbook
Naming Rules Sheets
The GenericNamingRules.xls workbook contains a list of internal class names and associated
naming rules.
Some sheets in the GenericNamingRules.xls workbook, such as the Legend sheet and the
Revision History sheet, are common to all the workbooks. For more information on common
sheets, see Describing the Common Sheets in the Workbooks (on page 57).
The sheets that are unique to GenericNamingRules.xls are listed below.
Naming Rules - Specifies the naming rules for classes. For more information, see Naming
Rules Sheet (on page 126).
See Also
Naming Rules Reference Data (on page 123)


Naming Rules Sheet
The Naming Rules sheet in defines rules for naming objects in the software.
Whenever you add new naming rules to the workbook, you must bulk load the workbook
in order for the new naming rules to appear in the software.
Type Name - Specifies the internal class names of objects. This name appears in the Catalog
hierarchy in the NamingRules folder.
Name - Specifies the rule name. You can use the same naming rule for more than one object
type.
Solver Prog ID - Provides the identifier for the Visual Basic program that controls the rule. For
more information about defining the VB programs for naming rules, see the SmartPlant
3D/SmartMarine 3D Programmer's Guide.
The following table shows an example of the NamingRules sheet.


S E C T I O N 9
Standard nozzle data provides representative data for piping nozzles and other ports, including
electrical nozzles for conduit and cable tray.
When you work in the model, you can insert nozzles with the Place Nozzle command in the
Equipment and Furnishings task. You can modify nozzles on the Properties dialog boxes for
parts with nozzles.
See Also
Nozzle Data Sheets (on page 127)
Cable Nozzle Sheet (on page 129)
Cable Tray Ports Sheet (on page 129)
Conduit Ports Sheet (on page 129)
Piping Elbow Nozzles Sheet (on page 128)
Piping Straight Nozzles Sheet (on page 128)
Standard Nozzle Data.xls Workbook
Nozzle Data Sheets
The Standard Nozzle Data.xls workbook contains data for nozzles in the piping and electrical
disciplines.
Some sheets in the Standard Nozzle Data.xls workbook, such as the Index sheet and the
Revision History sheet, are common to all the workbooks. For more information on common
sheets, see Describing the Common Sheets in the Workbooks (on page 57).
The sheets that are unique to Standard Nozzle Data.xls are listed below.
Piping Straight Nozzles - Specifies data for piping straight nozzles. For more information, see
Piping Straight Nozzles Sheet (on page 128).
Piping Elbow Nozzles - Specifies data for piping elbow nozzles. For more information, see
Piping Elbow Nozzles Sheet (on page 128).
Conduit Ports - Specifies data for conduit ports. For more information, see Conduit Ports Sheet
(on page 129).
Cable Nozzle - Specifies data for cable nozzles. For more information, see Cable Nozzle Sheet
(on page 129).
Cable Tray Ports - Specifies data for cable tray ports. For more information, see Cable Tray
Ports Sheet (on page 129).
See Also
Standard Nozzle Data (on page 127)
Standard Nozzle Data


Piping Straight Nozzles Sheet
The Piping Straight Nozzles sheet in the Standard Nozzle Data.xls workbook defines
reference data for piping straight nozzles.
Id - This column is not currently being used.
Npd - Type the nominal piping diameter for the piping nozzle.
Npd Unit Type - Specify the units for the NPD column. For example, type mm or in.
End Preparation - Type the end preparation code for the piping nozzle. Valid codes are listed in
Schedule Thickness - Enter the value or code that represents the schedule (or thickness) for
the piping nozzle.
End Standard - Type the end standard code for the piping nozzle. Valid codes are listed in the
Pressure Rating - Type the pressure rating code for the piping nozzle. Valid codes are listed in
the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the Pressure Rating sheet in the Codelist Number column.
Flow Direction - Type the flow direction code for the piping nozzle. Valid codes are listed in the
AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the Flow Direction sheet in the Codelist Number column.
See Also

Piping Elbow Nozzles Sheet
The Piping Elbow Nozzles sheet in the Standard Nozzle Data.xls workbook defines reference
data for piping elbow nozzles.
Npd - Type the nominal piping diameter for the piping nozzle.
End Preparation - Type the end preparation code for the piping nozzle. Valid codes are listed in
the piping nozzle.
End Standard - Type the end standard code for the piping nozzle. Valid codes are listed in the
Pressure Rating - Type the pressure rating code for the piping nozzle. Valid codes are listed in
the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the Pressure Rating sheet in the Codelist Number column.
Flow Direction - Type the flow direction code for the piping nozzle. Valid codes are listed in the
AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the Flow Direction sheet in the Codelist Number column.
Bend Radius - Type the bend radius value and units for the piping nozzle.
Bend Length - Type the bend length value and units for the piping nozzle.


The following picture shows the Bend Radius and Bend Length dimensions on a piping elbow
nozzle.

See Also

Conduit Ports Sheet
The Conduit Ports sheet in the Standard Nozzle Data.xls workbook defines reference data for
conduit ports.
Npd - Type the nominal piping diameter for the conduit port.
End Preparation - Type the end preparation code for the conduit port. Valid codes are listed in
the conduit port.
End Standard - Type the end standard code for the conduit port. Valid codes are listed in the
See Also

Cable Nozzle Sheet
The Cable Nozzle sheet in the Standard Nozzle Data.xls workbook is not currently being used.
See Also

Cable Tray Ports Sheet
The Cable Tray Ports sheet in the Standard Nozzle Data.xls workbook defines reference data
for cable tray ports.
Nominal Width - Enter the nominal width of the port. Include the units, such as in for inches or
mm for millimeters.
Nominal Depth - Enter the nominal depth of the port. Include the units, such as in for inches or
mm for millimeters.
Actual Width - Enter the actual width of the port. Include the units, such as in for inches or mm
for millimeters.


Actual Depth - Enter the actual depth of the port. Include the units, such as in for inches or mm
for millimeters.
The actual width and depth dimensions can account for the thickness of the cable tray wall.
See Also


S E C T I O N 1 0
In This Section
Using Catalog Data in an Integrated Environment ........................ 131

Using Catalog Data in an Integrated Environment
For proper P&ID correlation when you use the software in an integrated environment,
SmartPlant P&ID and SmartPlant 3D must use the same naming convention for piping
components and equipment.
One example is piping reducers. You can open the Excel workbook for piping components in
SmartPlant 3D, and change the name "Concentric Size Change" to "Concentric Reducer". Or,
copy the existing rows and add new entries, as shown below. Save the workbook and bulk load
it into the Catalog.

Working in an Integrated Environment
Working in an Integrated Environment



A P P E N D I X A
This appendix contains information about the select lists that you see under the main Select
Lists node in the tree view. The select lists in this appendix are listed in alphabetical order.
Select lists are called codelists in the delivered bulkload workbooks. A select list number is
the same thing as a codelist number.

A select list (codelist) is a set of predefined acceptable values for a particular attribute. For
example, the Fluid Code list defines all the acceptable fluid names that you can use. You can
only select fluids that are defined in the Fluid Code list. Generally, each entry in a list has a
unique number to identify that value, a short description, and a long description. Depending on
where the software is using the list, you can select the short description to select the list item.
However, when defining parts and piping specification rules, you may be required to identify the
list item that you want by using the list number.
The delivered select lists can be categorized into these types: simple, hierarchical, and system.
Simple - Map numbers with descriptions.
Hierarchical - Group the mappings in multiple levels. If you set a lower-level value in this
type of select list, all values above this level are also set. For example, in the Equipment
Types select list, if you set ProcessEqTypes5 to 370, the higher-level values are also set:
ProcessEqTypes4 to 360, ProcessEqTypes3 to 325, and so forth.
System - Contain values that users must not change.
You can modify most select lists to reflect your own practices, terminology, and language. You
can make revisions to a select list set by editing the AllCodeLists.xls workbook and then bulk
loading. You can also add or edit select lists in the Catalog task.
When you add an entry to a select list, the number for the entry must be between
10,000 - 40,000. Numeric values less than 10,000 and greater than 40,000 are reserved for use
by the software.
Here are some important points to remember about deleting and modifying select lists. You
cannot delete a select list after it is loaded into the Catalog database. However, you can delete
values in certain select lists. The Bulkload utility supports delete and replace for select lists.
You can rename select lists. The name for a select list corresponds to the column name on the
sheet, not necessarily the sheet name in the workbook. The name for each select list must be
unique in the database.
Appendix: Select Lists (Codelists)


You can edit the lowest level in a hierarchical select list, but you must not edit any higher levels
in the select list. You can edit simple select lists (without a hierarchy) unless otherwise specified
on the sheet.

For quick links to all the select lists, see the Index sheet in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook.
The namespace for user- defined select lists is UDP. This designation is placed in the
CodeListTableNamespace column on the Custom Interfaces sheet. For more information
about select lists and namespaces, see Select List (Codelist) Namespaces (on page 144).
The limit for select list names is 30 characters. You cannot use blanks or special characters
in these names.
The limit for the long and short descriptions in a select list is 256 characters.
The property name, or column name, can be a maximum of 30 characters.
A sheet name and select list table name cannot exceed 30 characters.
All values in the short description column for a select list must be unique for that list.
Select List (Codelist) Column Descriptions
The select lists have several fields, or columns, in common. Hierarchical select lists can have
more than one pair of short and long description columns.
Short Description - Specifies the short description of the entry. The maximum length of this
description is 256 characters.
All values in the short description column must be unique for that select list.
Long Description - Specifies the long description of the entry. The maximum length of this
description is 256 characters.
Codelist Number - Specifies an identification number for each row in the sheet. When you want
to use the data defined in a row, enter the number associated with that row. All numbers in this
column must be unique on this sheet.
Sort Order - This field is not currently used in the software.
To modify the order of the entries, open the Catalog task, and expand the Select Lists
node. Then, use the Move Up and Move Down keys on the toolbar to adjust the order of the
items.
Select List (Codelist) Disciplines
The following table lists the sheets in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook and their associated
disciplines.
Sheet Discipline
Align Component HVAC
Aspect Code All
Assembly Inclusion Piping
Automated Flange Selection Option Piping
Auxiliary Treatment Piping
Bend To Bend Tangent Basis Piping
Bolt Diameter Equivalence Option Piping


Sheet Discipline
Bolt Extension Option Piping
Bolt Length Calculation Option Piping
Bolt Length Round Off Option Piping
Bolt Lubrication Requirements Piping
Bolt Option Piping
Bolt Type Piping
Bolting Requirements Piping
Branch Reporting Ownership Piping
Cable Route Status Electrical (Cable)
Cable Tray Component Type Electrical (Cable Tray)
Cable Tray Materials Electrical (Cable Tray)
Cable Tray Part Data Basis Electrical (Cable Tray)
Cable Tray Type Electrical (Cable Tray)
Cable Type Electrical (Cable)
Cap Screw Length Round Off Option Piping
Catalog Units of Measure Basis Piping
Clamp Option Piping
Clamp Requirement Piping, Electrical
Clamp Selection Basis Piping
Cleaning Requirement Multiple: Piping, Equipment
Cleaning Responsibility Multiple: Piping, Electrical, Equipment, Structure
Coating Color Multiple: Piping, Equipment, Structure
Coating Type Multiple: Piping, Equipment, Structure
Commodity Code Builder Option Piping
Commodity Option Piping
Conduit Selection Basis Electrical (Conduit)
Connection Type Piping
Construction Type Multiple: Piping, Equipment, integration
Control Point Subtype Common
Control Point Type Common
Create Exclusive WBS Item All
Cross Section Cardinal Points Structure
Cross Section Edges Structure
Cross Section Shape Types HVAC


Sheet Discipline
Design Responsibility Multiple: Electrical, Equipment, Hanger and
Supports, Structure
Design Standard Multiple: Piping, Equipment
Door Frame Position Structure
Door Type Structure
Doors Windows Kinematics Structure
Drilling Template Pattern Piping
Eccentric Offset Basis Piping
Elevation Plane Type Grids
EMI Electrical
EMI Radiator Electrical
EMI Suceptor Electrical
End Preparation Multiple: Piping, Equipment
End Standard Multiple: Piping, Electrical (Conduit), Equipment
Environmental Zone Multiple: Piping, Equipment
Equipment Component Types Equipment
Equipment Types Equipment
Examination Piping
Exterior Surface Treatment Piping
External Welded Pipe Part Hangers and Supports
Fabrication Responsibility Multiple: Piping, Electrical, Equipment, Structure
Fabrication Type Multiple: Piping, Electrical (Conduit), Equipment
Fabrication Type Basis Piping
Feature Type Multiple: Piping, Electrical (Conduit)
Fireproofing Exposure Type Structure
Fireproofing Method Structure
Fireproofing Type Structure
Flange Face Surface Finish Piping
Flange Facing Piping
Flange Insulation Kit Type Piping
Flexible Hose Topology Type Piping
Flip Component HVAC
Flow Direction Piping
Fluid Code Piping


Sheet Discipline
Front End Type Equipment
Gasket Inside Diameter Basis Piping
Gasket Option Piping
Gasket Outside Diameter Basis Piping
Gasket Requirement Override Piping
Gasket Requirements Piping
Gasket Selection Based on Fluid Code Piping
Gasket Selection for Mismatched Bolted
Ends Option
Piping
Gasket Style Number Piping
Gasket Type Piping
Geometric Industry Standard Piping
Geometry Type Piping
Grid Plane Type Grids
Handrail Connection Type Structure
Handrail End Treatment Structure
Handrail Inline Connection Type Structure
Handrail Offset Structure
Handrail Orientation Structure
Handrail Side Connection Type Structure
Hand Wheel Orientation Piping
Hazardous Fluid Category Multiple: Piping, Equipment
Header Branch Size Basis Option Piping
Heat Tracing Medium Multiple: Piping, Equipment
HngSup Associated Part Type Hangers and Supports
HngSup Association Type Hangers and Supports
HngSup BOM Type Hangers and Supports
HngSup Bounding Box Type Hangers and Supports
HngSup Class Node Type Hangers and Supports
HngSup Command Hangers and Supports
HngSup Connection Type Hangers and Supports
HngSup Connect Obj Hangers and Supports
HngSup Cut Type Hangers and Supports
HngSup Discipline Hangers and Supports


Sheet Discipline
HngSup ET Type Hangers and Supports
HngSup Face Selection Type Hangers and Supports
HngSup Joint Type Hangers and Supports
HngSup Manufacturer Hangers and Supports
HngSup Mating Joint Type Hangers and Supports
HngSup Part Class Type Hangers and Supports
HngSup Physical Connection Hangers and Supports
HngSup Port Category Hangers and Supports
HngSup Port Type Hangers and Supports
HngSup Rule Type Hangers and Supports
HngSup Strict Face Selection Hangers and Supports
HngSup Support Type Hangers and Supports
HngSup Type Selection Rule Hangers and Supports
HVAC Component Types HVAC
HVAC Lining Material HVAC
HVAC Part Data Basis HVAC
HVAC Part Generation Basis HVAC
HVAC Width and Depth Basis HVAC
Icarus Column Base Option Space Management
Icarus Concrete Type Space Management
Icarus Exclude End Bent Space Management
Icarus Grating Type Space Management
Icarus Pipe Rack Type Space Management
Icarus Struct Steel Analysis Space Management
Icarus Third Column Space Management
IFC Aspect Code Value Interference Checking
IFC Process Status Interference Checking
IFC Required Action Interference Checking
IFC Type Interference Checking
Ignore Boundaries All
Industry Commodity Code Option Piping
Inlet Port Geometry Type Piping
Installation Responsibility Multiple: Piping, Electrical, Equipment, Hangers
and Supports, Structure


Sheet Discipline
Instrument Functional Type Piping
Insulation Material Multiple: Piping, Equipment, HVAC
Insulation Purpose Multiple: Piping, Equipment
Insulation Temperature Basis Piping
Insulation Thickness Basis Multiple: Piping, Equipment
Interior Surface Treatment Multiple: Piping, Electrical (Conduit)
Is Bend Planar Piping
Jacketed Closure Method Piping
Jacketed Piping Basis Piping
Lining Material Piping
Load Span Classification Electrical (Cable Tray)
Loose Material Requirements Piping
Mach Bolt Length Round Off Option Piping
Manufacturer Piping
Manufacturing Method Piping
Map Type Drawings and Reports
Materials Grade Piping
Materials Description Builder Option Piping
Materials of Construction Class Piping
Materials Type Piping
Member Orientation Structure
Methods of Jacket Pipe Construction Piping
Methods of Trimming Piping
Min Bend To Bend Tangent Len Option Piping
Mirror Behavior Option Multiple: Piping, Equipment
Misc Requisition Classification Piping
Multiport Valve Op Req Piping
Note Purpose All
Nozzle Entrance Type Multiple: Piping, integration
Nozzle Flange Type Multiple: Piping, integration
Nozzle Function Multiple: Piping, integration
Nut Creation Option Piping
Nut Option Piping
Nut Type Piping


Sheet Discipline
Open or Blind Spacer Install State Piping
Orifice Flange Tap Orientation Piping
Outlet Port Geometry Type Piping
Painting Responsibility Multiple: Piping, Electrical, Equipment, Hangers
Part Class Types All
Part Data Basis Piping
Part Data Source Piping
Pipe Bend Radius By User Option Piping
Pipe Bend Radius Multiplier Option Piping
Pipe Bend Type Piping
Pipe Bending Machine Type Piping
Pipe Stock Usage Piping
Piping Commodity Catalog Part Number
Basis Option
Piping
Piping Commodity Override Option Piping
Piping Commodity Procurement Data Option Piping
Piping Commodity Type Multiple: Piping, Catalog
Piping Point Usage Piping
Piping Spec Status Piping
Piping Spec Version Management Option Piping
Piping Specification Notes Option Piping
Plane of Flip HVAC
Plane of Turn HVAC
Pressure Rating Piping
Property Categories All
Purchase Length Basis Option Piping
Rear End Type Equipment and Furnishings
Reference Plane View Directions Structure
Reporting Requirement Basis Piping
Reporting Type Multiple: Piping, Equipment, Hangers and
Supports, Structure
Requisition Responsibility Multiple: Piping, Electrical, Equipment, Hangers
Requisition Type Multiple: Piping, Equipment


Sheet Discipline
Respect Assembly Boundaries Piping
Revision History Notes Option Piping
Ring Number Piping
Rotation Offset Type Grids
Route Direction Space Management
Route Layout Space Management
Route on Face Space Management
Schedule Thickness Piping
Selection Basis Piping
Short Code Hierarchy Piping
Signal Type Electrical
Size Reduction Preference Piping
Size Reduction Type Piping
Slab Boundary Reference Structure
Slab Composition Structure
Slab Continuity Structure
Slab Corner Type Structure
Slab Cross Section Symbol Structure
Slab Direction Reference Structure
Slab Face Position Structure
Slab Fastener Type Structure
Slab Layer Role Structure
Slab Manufacturing Process Structure
Slab Nosing Material Structure
Slab Nosing Type Structure
Slab Priority Structure
Slab Reference Direction Structure
Spectacle Position Piping
Spool Break by Control Point Piping
Spool Include Welded Parts Piping
Spool Sequence Type Piping
Spooling Basis Piping
Steamout Requirement Multiple: Piping, Electrical (Conduit)
Stress Relief Piping


Sheet Discipline
Stress Relief Requirement Piping
Struct 2L Back to Back Rule Structure
Struct AC Left Right Both Structure
Struct AC Pad Type Structure
Struct AC Sizing Rule Structure
Struct AC Splice Types Structure
Struct Alignment Structure
Struct Boundary Conditions Structural Analysis
Struct Can Diameter Rule Structure
Struct Can Length Compute Method Structure
Struct Can Type Structure
Struct Compute Rule Structure
Struct Cone Length Compute Method Structure
Struct Continuity Structure
Struct Coord Sys Reference Structure
Struct Custom Plate Part Type Structure
Struct End Releases Structure
Struct Feature Radius Type Structure
Struct FC Chevron WPO Structure
Struct FC End Controlling Structure
Struct FC Offset Along Structure
Struct FC Offset Direction Structure
Struct FC Supported Edge Structure
Struct FC Supporting CPs Structure
Struct FC Supporting Side Structure
Struct Footing Comp Sizing Rule Structure
Struct Frm Conn Position Ref Structure
Struct Insulation Encasement Structure
Struct Insulation Purpose Structure
Struct Member End Selection Rule Structure
Struct Member Position Rule Structure
Struct Prismatic Footing Shapes Structure
Struct Insulation Setback Ref Structure
Struct Wall Boundary Size Structure


Sheet Discipline
Struct Wall Boundary Type Structure
Struct Wall Connection Type Structure
Struct Wall Reference Attribute Structure
Structural Load Case Source Structure
Structural Member Priority Structure
Structural Member Type Structure
Structural WPO Intersection Index Structure
Supplementary Nut Requirement Piping
Supplementary Washer Requirement Piping
Supply Responsibility Multiple: Piping, Electrical, Equipment, Hangers
Surface Preparation Piping
Tap End Stud Bolt Length Roundoff Option Piping
Testing Responsibility Multiple: Piping, Electrical, Equipment, Hangers
Testing Type Piping
Tightness Piping
Tray Specification Type Electrical (Cableway)
Type Piping
Undefined Service Limits Rule Option Piping
Valve Flow Pattern Piping
Valve Model Number Piping
Valve Operator Geometric Industry Standard Piping
Valve Operator Is Rotatable Piping
Valve Operator Part Data Basis Piping
Valve Operator Type Piping
Valve Port Option Piping
Valve Trim Piping
Vendor Piping
Vessel Head Type Equipment
Voltage Grade Electrical (Cable)
Washer Creation Option Piping
Washer Option Piping
Washer Type Piping


Sheet Discipline
WBS Assignment All
WBS Auto Grouping Rule Type All
WBS Item Purpose All
WBS Project Purpose All
WBS Pull In Associated Items All
Welding Procedure Specification Piping
Weld Type Piping
Welding Requirement Piping
Select List (Codelist) Namespaces
Each select list belongs to a namespace. When you specify interfaces and attributes on the
Custom Interfaces sheets in the reference data workbooks, you can specify a select list and
namespace for the attribute.
The delivered select lists are in the following namespaces: CMNSCH (Common Schema),
REFDAT (Reference Data), and UDP (User-Defined Package). When you define a select list,
place it in the UDP namespace.

Align Component
The Align Component select list (codelist) specifies that an object is flat and whether it is on
the bottom left, the top right, or in the center.
This select list is used in the Catalog task. The list belongs to the REFDAT namespace.
You can edit the delivered text of the short or long descriptions as long as you do not
change the meaning. Do not change the numeric values of the delivered select list items. You
cannot add or delete select list items.



Anvil_Constant_Dir
Anvil_Constant_Dir lists the options for travel direction (up or down). This select list (codelist)
is used in the reference data for the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the
UDP namespace.
To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the
Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_Constant_Dir.

Anvil_Constant_Sus
Anvil_Constant_Sus lists the options for suspension. This select list (codelist) is used in the
reference data for the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP
namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_Constant_Sus.
Anvil_Dyn_Config
Anvil_Dyn_Config lists the options for configuration. This select list (codelist) is used in the
namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_Dyn_Config.
Anvil_Dyn_Finish
Anvil_Dyn_Finish lists the options for finish. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference
data for the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_Dyn_Finish.
Anvil_Dyn_PipeDia
Anvil_Dyn_PipeDia is not used. This select list (codelist) belongs to the UDP namespace.

Anvil_Dyn_ResOrient
Anvil_Dyn_ResOrient lists the options for reservoir orientation. This select list (codelist) is used
in the reference data for the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP
namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_Dyn_ResOrient.



Anvil_Dyn_ResType
Anvil_Dyn_ResType lists the options for reservoir type. This select list (codelist) is used in the
namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_Dyn_ResType.
Anvil_Dyn_Stroke
Anvil_Dyn_Stroke lists the options for stroke. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference
data for the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_Dyn_Stroke.
Anvil_Dyn_ValveType
Anvil_Dyn_ValveType lists the options for valve types. This select list (codelist) is used in the
namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_Dyn_ValveType.
Anvil_Dyn2_PipeDia
Anvil_Dyn2_PipeDia is not used. This select list (codelist) belongs to the UDP namespace.

Anvil_FIG137_Nuts
Anvil_FIG137_Nuts lists the options for the number of nuts. This select list (codelist) is used in
the FIG137 part class in the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP
namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_FIG137_Nuts.
Anvil_FIG167_Insulat
Anvil_FIG167_Insulat lists the options for insulation thickness. This select list (codelist) is used
in the FIG167 part class in the Hangers and Support task. This select list belongs to the UDP
namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_FIG167_Insulat.



Anvil_FIG218_FlangeW
Anvil_FIG218_FlangeW lists the options for beam flange width. This select list (codelist) is
used in the FIG218 part class in the Hangers and Support task. This select list belongs to the
UDP namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_FIG218_FlangeW.
Anvil_FIG255_Insulat
Anvil_FIG255_Insulat lists the options for insulation thickness. This select list (codelist) is used
in the FIG255 part class in the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP
namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_FIG255_Insulat.
Anvil_FIG292_FlangeW
Anvil_FIG292_FlangeW lists the options for beam flange width. This select list (codelist) is
used in the FIG292 part class in the Hangers an Supports task. This select list belongs to the
UDP namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_FIG292_FlangeW.
Anvil_FIG299_Config
Anvil_FIG299_Config lists the options for configuration. This select list (codelist) is used in the
FIG299 part class in the Hangers and Supports class. This select list belongs to the UDP
namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_FIG299_Config.
Anvil_FIG86_Finish
Anvil_FIG86_Finish lists the options for finish. This select list (codelist) is used in the FIG86
part class in the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_FIG89_Finish.
Anvil_Finish
Anvil_Finish lists the options for finish. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data
for the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_Finish.



Anvil_Rod_Finish
Anvil_Rod_Finish lists the options for rod finish. This select list (codelist) is used in the
namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_Rod_Finish.
Anvil_Shoe_Base
Anvil_Shoe_Base lists the options for base connection types. This select list (codelist) is used
namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_Shoe_Base.
Anvil_Shoe_Finish
Anvil_Shoe_Finish lists the options for shoe finishes. This select list (codelist) is used in the
namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_Shoe_Finish.
Anvil_Shoe_Type
Anvil_Shoe_Type lists the options for base types. This select list (codelist) is used in the
namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_Shoe_Type.
Anvil_Stanchion_Dia
Anvil_Stanchion_Dia lists the options for stanchion pipe size. This select list (codelist) is used
namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_Stanchion_Dia.
Anvil_Strut_Finish
Anvil_Strut_Finish lists the options for strut finishes. This select list (codelist) is used in the
namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_Strut_Finish.



Anvil_Variable_ColType
Anvil_Variable_ColType lists the options for column type. This select list (codelist) is used in
the reference data for the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP
namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_Variable_ColType.
Anvil_Variable_Dir
Anvil_Variable_Dir lists the options for travel direction (up or down). This select list (codelist) is
used in the reference data for the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the
UDP namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_Variable_Dir.
Anvil_Variable_RollMat
Anvil_Variable_RollMat lists the options for pipe roll material. This select list (codelist) is used
namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_Variable_RollMat.
Anvil_Variable_Top
Anvil_Variable_Top lists the options for the top piece. This select list (codelist) is used in the
namespace.
Anvil_WithWithout
Anvil_WithWithout lists the options for whether or not to have a certain part, such as a
retaining clip. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Hangers and
Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_WithWithout.
Anvil_YesNo
Anvil_YesNo lists the options for whether or not to designate the part for copper tubing. This
select list (codelist) is used in the FIG167 part class in the Hangers and Support task. This
select list belongs to the UDP namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_YesNo.



ApprovalReason
ApprovalReason lists the options for the Status box on the Configuration tab of the
Properties dialog box. You can customize the codelist table to suit your needs by adding
possible states under the parent category (Working, InReview, Rejected and Approved).
Codelist items highlighted in yellow in the following table are defaults for the corresponding
parent item.
You can create and delete codelist items other than the defaults to meet your needs. You can
only customize the long values of the default codelist values.
The ApprovalReason.xls spreadsheet is delivered by default to the [Product
Directory]\CatalogData\BulkLoad\SampleDataFiles folder.

The default values are system defined codelist values and are not modifiable except for the long
values. You can customize the list by adding new values and then bulkloading the file.
Aspect Code
Aspect Code defines the available aspect codes in the software. This select list is used in the
reference data for multiple tasks. Aspects are associated parameters that represent additional
information needed for placement of objects. Aspects can represent clearances for safety or
maintenance, additional space required during operation, or simple and detailed representations
of objects. You can define aspects for select list numbers 19 through 31.

Aspect select list numbers 1 through 3, and 8 through 18 are reserved for use by the
software and should not be modified.
Select list number 17 is for Molded Forms. Do not change this aspect code.
Do not define an aspect code of 32 or greater.
Catalog hierarchy and select AspectCode.



Assembly Inclusion
The Assembly Inclusion select list (codelist) specifies the options for designating how
assemblies are handled during the creation of WBS items and assignment of parts. For
example, if the query is locating pipe parts, the software checks to see if each part belongs to an
assembly (spool), and if so, the assembly is added to the WBS item along with the part.
This select list is used in the Piping task. The list belongs to the REFDAT namespace.
Assembly YesNoAuto
The Assembly YesNoAuto determines if a turnbuckle needs to be added to the support. This
select list (codelist) is used by the Load Based Rigid Rod assembly (Assy_RR_LR) in the
HS_Assembly.xls workbook. The select list is used for the Hangers and Supports task with the
following options:
Yes - add the turnbuckle
No - do not add the turnbuckle
Auto - add the turnbuckle if the length of the rod is greater than a pre-defined length.
This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.
Assembly_BBXAlignment
The Assembly_BBXAlignment select list specifies the different bounding box alignments that
are available. This select list is in the HS_Assembly_Codelists.xls workbook and belongs to the
UDP namespace.

Assembly_RefPorts
The Assembly_RefPorts select list specifies whether the assembly should use the default
reference port or the alternate reference port. This select list is in the
HS_Assembly_Codelists.xls workbook and belongs to the UDP namespace.



Assembly_Variable_Dir
Assembly_Variable_Dir lists the options for travel direction (up or down). This select list
(codelist) is used in the reference data for the Hangers and Supports task. This select list
belongs to the UDP namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select Assembly_Variable_Dir.
Assembly_WithWithout
Assembly_WithWithout lists the options for whether or not the assembly has certain parts,
such as plates or a turnbuckle. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the
Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select Assembly_WithWithout.
Automated Flange Selection Option
The Automated Flange Selection Option select list (codelist) specifies the automated flange
selection logic. The specification writer can distinguish between flanges inserted on plain piping
versus flanges inserted in fitting-to-fitting situations. The option is typically enabled for a piping
materials class that includes slip-on flanges or lap-joint flanges.
Auxiliary Treatment
The Auxiliary Treatment select list (codelist) specifies exterior coating and surface treatments.
As an example, an underground specification must be coated to prevent galvanic corrosion.
Here are some examples of when this select list is used:
Managing process flow and communicating production information in a pipe shop during the
manufacture of spools.
Treating pipe with heat treatments, such as post-weld heat treatment.
Manufacturing underground piping, which may need a coating for water protection and to
prevent the creation of a galvanic cell.
Exposing pipe to the environment in oil and gas processing plants and on offshore
platforms.
Coating FRP (Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic) piping systems after installation, regardless of
environment.
When you add an entry to a select list, the number for the entry must be greater than
10,000. Numeric values less than 10,000 are reserved for use by the software.



Axial Profile Category
The Axial Profile Category select list (codelist) defines the available axial profile categories in
the software.
This select list is used in the Molded Forms task. The list belongs to the UDP namespace.
Bend To Bend Tangent Basis
The Bend To Bend Tangent Basis select list (codelist) specifies the basis for measuring the
minimum tangent length between bend dimensions. This property determines how the minimum
bend-to-bend tangent lengths from the pipe bending die data and the minimum bend-to-bend
tangent length data are interpreted.
In some cases, the data for minimum bending lengths is specified as the interior tangent
lengths, (in other words, the tangents between two turns, from tangent point to tangent point). In
other cases, the data is specified as the length from turn point to turn point.
Bolt Diameter Equivalence Option
The Bolt Diameter Equivalence Option select list (codelist) defines the options for using the
Bolt Diameter Equivalence Rule for reporting the bolt diameter. This optional rule enables the
specification writer to define a correlation between the values of bolt diameter in the primary
system of units for bolt diameter and the values of bolt diameter in the secondary system of
units.
Bolt Extension Option
The Bolt Extension Option select list (codelist) defines the available bolt extension options.
The bolt extension values determine the length of the exposed threads for the bolt length
calculation for both studs and machine bolts from the bolted end generic data. The bolt
extension also includes any additional length required for stud tensioners. The nut height and
the washer thickness, if applicable, are addressed independently of the bolt extension.
The specification writer can define a standard bolt extension and as many as five alternate bolt
extension values.



Bolt Length Calculation Option
The Bolt Length Calculation Option select list (codelist) enables you to specify whether the
software calculates bolt lengths. Refer to the Default Project Options topic in the Piping
Reference Data Guide for more information on how this select list is used.
Bolt Length Round Off Option
The Bolt Length Round Off Option select list (codelist) defines the options for how you want
the software to handle bolt lengths. Refer to the Default Project Options topic in the Piping
If you choose None (number 5), the software uses the computed bolt length.
If you choose Use Value (number 10), the software rounds the computed bolt length up to
the next increment of that round off value.
If you choose Use list of preferred bolt lengths (number 15), the software rounds the
computed bolt length up to the smallest preferred bolt length that exceeds the computed bolt
length.
Bolt Lubrication Requirements
The Bolt Lubrication Requirements select list (codelist) defines the different bolt lubrications
that you want to make available in the model. Refer to the Bolt Part Data topic in the Piping
Bolt Option
The Bolt Option select list (codelist) specifies the optional bolt selections enabled by the
specification writer.
A default bolt option represents the bolt to be used when the piping designer has not explicitly
selected one. The bolt option, if applicable, is selected by the piping designer at a bolted joint.
Bolt Type
The Bolt Type select list (codelist) defines all available bolt types.
The quantity of nuts and washers is determined on the basis of the bolt type. For machine bolts,
a nut and a washer is required for each bolt. Optionally, you can specify that one supplementary
nut is required for a machine bolt.


For studs, a nut and a washer are required for each end of the stud. In other words, a stud
requires two nuts and two washers. Optionally, one supplementary nut may be required for each
end of a stud.
For cap screws, only a washer is required for each screw.
Bolting Requirements
The Bolting Requirements select list (codelist) defines bolting requirements, such as bolt
reporting and cap screw substitution.
Bolting Requirements (Optional) - Select the bolting requirement for the piping commodity.
Valid codes are listed in parentheses. The following options are available:
Undefined (1) - The bolting requirement is undefined.
Bolting required (5) - The piping commodity requires a reportable set of bolts determined
by the bolted joint, but based on a special bolt extension option. If you select this option, you
must define the Bolt Extension Option.
Complete substitution with cap screws for threaded holes (10) - The piping commodity
requires a reportable set of substitution cap screws for full threaded holes determined by the
fitting itself instead of the bolted joint. Cap screws are used for all bolt holes in this situation
and represent a complete substitution of the bolts that would have otherwise been
determined by the bolted joint. Use this option when the through-bolted fitting includes a
complete set of threaded holes to match the drilling template applicable to the mating flange.
Complete substitution with cap screws for tapped holes (15) - The piping commodity
requires a reportable set of substitution cap screws (or substitution tap end stud bolts) for
tapped holes determined by the fitting itself instead of the bolted joint. Cap screws (or tap
end stud bolts) are used for all bolt holes in this situation and represent a complete
substitution of the bolts that would have otherwise been determined by the bolted joint. Use
this option when the through-bolted fitting includes a complete set of tapped holes to match
the drilling template applicable to the mating flange.
Partial substitution with cap screws for threaded holes (20) - The piping commodity
requires a reportable set of substitution cap screws for threaded holes determined by the
fitting itself instead of some of the bolts determined by the bolted joint. This option
represents a partial substitution of the bolts that would have otherwise been determined by
the bolted joint. Use this option to address the situation where the through-bolted fitting
includes a partial set of threaded holes with respect to the drilling template applicable to the
mating flange, and also the situation where the through-bolted fitting includes a complete set
of holes to match the drilling template applicable to the mating flange, but only some of the
holes are threaded.


Partial substitution with cap screws for tapped holes (25) - The piping commodity
requires a reportable set of substitution cap screws (or substitution tap end stud bolts) for
tapped holes determined by the fitting itself instead of some of the bolts determined by the
bolted joint. This option represents a partial substitution of the bolts that would have
otherwise been determined by the bolted joint. Use this option to address the situation where
the through-bolted fitting includes a partial set of tapped holes with respect to the drilling
template applicable to the mating flange, and also the situation where the through-bolted
fitting includes a complete set of holes to match the drilling template applicable to the mating
flange, but only some of the holes are tapped.
Bolts supplied with nozzle and not to be reported (30) - The piping commodity is
supplied with the necessary bolts included, such that the applicable bolts should not be
reported.
Reportable bolts not required (35) - A set of bolts is not applicable to any end of this
piping commodity because all ends are non-bolted. This option is the default for any piping
commodity without any bolted ends.
Complete substitution with cap screws for full threaded holes at second size end,
where the cap screws only apply at the second size end (40) - The second size end
requires a reportable set of substitution cap screws for full threaded holes determined by the
fitting itself, for example a reducing flange, instead of the bolted joint. Cap screws are used
for all bolt holes in this situation. This represents a complete bolt substitution that would
have otherwise been determined by the bolted joint. This option addresses the situation
where the smaller end of a reducing flange includes a complete set of threaded holes to
match the drilling template applicable to the companion flange. This option is not available
for nozzles.
Complete substitution with cap screws for tapped holes at second size end, where
the cap screws only apply at the second size end (45) - The second size end requires a
reportable set of substitution cap screws (or substitution tap end stud bolts) for tapped holes
determined by the fitting itself, for example a reducing flange, instead of the bolted joint. Cap
screws are used for all bolt holes in this situation. This represents a complete bolt
substitution that would have otherwise been determined by the bolted joint. This option
addresses the situation where the smaller end of a reducing flange includes a complete set
of tapped holes to match the drilling template applicable to the companion flange. This
option is not available for nozzles.
Partial substitution with cap screws for full threaded holes at second size end, where
the cap screws only apply at the second size end (50) - The second size end requires a
reportable set of substitution cap screws for full threaded holes determined by the fitting
itself, for example a reducing flange, instead of some of the bolts determined by the bolted
joint. This option represents a partial bolt substitution that would have otherwise been
determined by the bolted joint. This option addresses the situation where the smaller end of
a reducing flange includes a partial set of threaded holes with respect to the drilling template
applicable to the companion flange, and also the situation where the smaller end of the
reducing flange includes a complete set of holes to match the drilling template applicable to
the companion flange, but only some of the holes are threaded. This option is not available
for nozzles.
Partial substitution with cap screws for tapped holes at second size end, where the
cap screws only apply at the second size end (55) - The second size end requires a
reportable set of substitution cap screws (or substitution tap end stud bolts) for tapped holes
determined by fitting itself, for example a reducing flange, instead of some of the bolts
determined by the bolted joint. This represents a partial bolt substitution that would have
otherwise been determined by the bolted joint. This will address the situation where the
smaller end of a reducing flange includes a partial set of tapped holes with respect to the
drilling template applicable to the companion flange, and also the situation where the smaller


end of a reducing flange includes a complete set of holes to match the drilling template
applicable to the companion flange, but only some of the holes are tapped. This option is not
available for nozzles.
Complete cap screw substitution for full threaded and tapped holes for each bolted
end (60) - Each bolted end requires a reportable set of substitution cap screws for full
threaded holes and also tapped holes determined by the fitting itself instead of the bolted
joint. Cap screws are used for all bolt holes in this situation. In other words, this represents a
complete bolt substitution that would have otherwise been determined by the bolted joint.
This option addresses the situation where the through-bolted fitting includes a complete set
of threaded holes and also tapped holes to match the drilling template applicable to the
companion flange. This can be required, as an example, for a larger size asymmetrical lug
body butterfly valve where tapped holes are required near the valve stem. This option is not
available for nozzles.

Any through-bolted joint, where the Termination Subclass for one of the bolted ends
indicates through-bolted end with bolt holes, but the Bolting Requirement property for the
fitting at that same bolted end indicates a complete substitution of cap screws (or tap end
stud bolts), the software considers it to be a bolted joint, not a through-bolted joint.
Although two or more through-bolted fittings may be involved in forming a through-bolted
connection, the software assumes that only one through-bolted fitting exists for any situation
where either complete substitution or partial substitution with cap screws (or tap end stud
bolts) applies. Furthermore, whenever two or more through-bolted fittings form a
through-bolted connection, the software assumes that the bolts extend through all of the
through-bolted fittings.
Bracket Category
The Bracket Category select list (codelist) defines the available bracket categories in the
software.
This select list is used in the Structural Detailing task. The list belongs to the UDP namespace.
Branch Reporting Ownership
The Branch Reporting Ownership select list (codelist) defines the options for reporting on
branch components.
If, during reporting, you want the software to report the branch component with the rest of the
branch, you must select Branch owns branch component (number 5).
However, if, during reporting, you want the software to report the branch component with the
header that it connects to, you must select Header owns branch component (number 10).



bsWeldType
The bsWeldType select list (codelist) specifies whether the weld is a fillet weld or a bevel-fillet
weld. This select list is in the HS_S3DParts_Codelists.xls workbook and belongs to the UDP
namespace.
bsWeldSide
The bsWeldSide select list (codelist) specifies whether the weld is placed on both sides or just
the side indicated by the arrow. This select list is in the HS_S3DParts_Codelists.xls workbook
and belongs to the UDP namespace.

Cable Route Status
The Cable Route Status select list (codelist) defines the available options for cable routing
status. The software uses the status for reporting on cable.
This select list is used in the Electrical task. The list belongs to the REFDAT namespace.
Cable Tray Component Class
The Cable Tray Component Class select list (codelist) defines all of the cable tray component
classes that you want to select from in the model.
You can change the textual values in this select list, but you must not change the
numeric values or the meaning of the values; and you must not add or delete values.
Cable Tray Component Type
The Cable Tray Component Type select list (codelist) defines all the cable tray component
types that you want to select from in the model.



Cable Tray Materials
The Cable Tray Materials select list (codelist) defines all cable tray materials that you want to
select from in the model.

Cable Tray Part Data Basis
The Cable Tray Part Data Basis select list (codelist) specifies the values for the basis of the
dimensional data for cable tray parts. The purpose of this property is to recognize those
components that require special treatment when interpreting the dimensional data.
Cable Tray Type
The Cable Tray Type select list (codelist) defines all the cable tray types available to route in
the model.
Cable Type
The Cable Type select list (codelist) defines the applicable values for the cable type property,
which is used when assigning values to cable runs for tray fill calculations.
Cap Screw Length Round Off Option
The Cap Screw Length Round Off Option select list (codelist) specifies the available methods
for bolt length round off in the cap screw length calculations.
Once the bolt length has been computed, the length of the cap screw must be rounded to a
practical value.
The specification writer can choose to specify a simple round off, or no round off; or can choose
to define the algorithm to round off the cap screw length on the basis of a list of the available
purchased, or preferred, cap screw lengths, as a function of the cap screw diameter, and
optionally, the materials grade of the cap screw.


Catalog Units of Measure Basis
The Catalog Units of Measure Basis select list (codelist) defines the method of querying the
piping catalog for units of measure. Refer to the Piping Commodity Filter topic in the Piping
Check Piping Mfg Priority
Check Piping Mfg Priority defines the available piping manufacturing priorities in the software.
The priorities are used in the check manufacturability process.
Catalog hierarchy and select CheckPipingMfgPriority.
Check Piping Priority
The Check Piping Priority select list (codelist) defines the piping priorities.
This select list is not currently used in the software. The list belongs to the UDP namespace.
Check Planning Priority
Check Planning Priority defines the available planning priorities in the software. The priorities
are used in the check manufacturability process.
Catalog hierarchy and select CheckPlanningPriority.
Clamp Option
The Clamp Option select list (codelist) specifies the list of available clamp selections enabled
by the specification writer.
A default clamp option represents the clamp that should be used when the piping designer has
not explicitly selected one. The clamp option, if applicable, is selected by the piping designer at
a bolted joint.
Clamp Requirement
The Clamp Requirement select list (codelist) specifies whether a reportable clamp is required
or not.



Clamp Selection Basis
The Clamp Selection Basis select list (codelist) defines the choices for clamp service limits
validation.
Cleaning Requirement
The Cleaning Requirement select list (codelist) defines all the possible cleaning requirements
that you can choose from in the model.
This select list is used in multiple tasks. The list belongs to the REFDAT namespace.
Cleaning Responsibility
The Cleaning Responsibility select list (codelist) defines all the parties available for cleaning
responsibility.
This select list is used in multiple tasks. The list belongs to the CMNSCH namespace.
Coating Color
The Coating Color select list (codelist) defines the available colors for a coating.
Coating Type
The Coating Type select list (codelist) defines all coating requirements and types available in
the model.
Collar Category
The Collar Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for collars in the
software.
Commodity Code Builder Option
The Commodity Code Builder Option select list (codelist) defines options to designate
whether the software provides assistance in selecting commodity codes when the specification
writer creates or revises commodity code properties in piping specifications or the piping
catalog. If this option has been enabled, the software provides the specification writer with the
Commodity Code Builder.
This list also includes the option for automated creation of the industry commodity code in the
piping commodity class data on the basis of property values and customizable formats.


Commodity Option
The Commodity Option select list (codelist) defines the list of commodity selections available
to the piping specification writer for a default commodity option. A default commodity option
represents the piping commodity that the software uses when the piping designer has not
explicitly selected a piping commodity. The default commodity option is also used when
selecting a branch fitting, as a consequence of using the Branch Intersection rule. The
commodity option is ignored in the automated selection of flanges.

Do not edit the Default record in this sheet.
You can change some of the textual values in this select list, but you must not change the
The following examples show how to use commodity options:
Selecting a specific type of piping commodity for a generic short code. For example,
selecting a pipe bend, when the default change-of-direction fitting is an elbow, or selecting a
gate valve, when the default vent/drain valve is a ball valve
Selecting an optional nipple length for a branch nipple
Selecting an optional angular offset for a tapered spacer
Selecting an optional rating, for example, a 300# valve in a 150# piping materials class
Selecting an optional fitting for a different version of an industry standard or manufacturer
catalog
Selecting an optional valve type for a specific valve
Selecting an optional valve operator type for a specific valve
Selecting an optional bend radius for an elbow or a pipe bend
Selecting a different number of miter cuts for a mitered elbow
Selecting an optional fitting with different end conditions than the default
Selecting an optional fitting with a different schedule (or thickness) than the default
Selecting an optional fitting with a different design code than the default
Selecting an optional fitting with a different manufacturer than the default
Selecting an optional choice for plain piping or tubing
Compart Coating Color
Compart Coating Color defines the available coating colors for compartments. This select list
(codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to
the UDP namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select CompartCoatingColor.



Compart Coating Process
Compart Coating Process specifies the different coating processes for compartments. This
select lists (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list
Catalog hierarchy and select CompartCoatingProcess.
Compart Coating Responsibility
Compart Coating Responsibility defines the list of responsible parties available for applying
the coating to compartments. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the
Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select CompartCoatingResponsibility.
Compart Coating Status
Compart Coating Status lists the different statuses for compartment coatings. This select list
the UDP namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select CompartCoatingStatus.
Compart Coating Type
Compart Coating Type lists the types of coatings that you want to use for compartments. This
select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list
Catalog hierarchy and select CompartCoatingType.
Compartment Authorization Class
Compartment Authorization Class specifies the levels of authorization for compartments. This
Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentAuthorizationClass.
Compartment Bulk Cargo Type
Compartment Bulk Cargo Type specifies the different types of bulk cargo for compartments.
This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select
list belongs to the UDP namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentBulkCargoType.


Compartment Bulkhead Tightness
Compartment Bulkhead Tightness specifies the levels of bulkhead tightness for
compartments. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation
task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentBulkheadTightness.
Compartment Capacity Context
Compartment Capacity Context specifies the levels of capacity for compartments. This select
list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list
Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentCapacityContext.
Compartment Cargo Context
Compartment Cargo Context specifies the levels of cargo context for compartments. This
Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentCargoContext.
Compartment Coating Applicability
Compartment Coating Applicability specifies the coating applicability options for
Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentCoatingApplicability.
Compartment Coating Certification
Compartment Coating Certification specifies the levels of coating certification for
Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentCoatingCertification.
Compartment Coating Inspection
Compartment Coating Inspection specifies the coating inspection options for compartments.
Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentCoatingInspection.



Compartment Compartment Group
Compartment Compartment Group specifies the groups for compartments. This select list
the UDP namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentCompartmentGroup.
Compartment Compartment Type
Compartment Compartment Type specifies the different types for compartments. This select
Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentCompartmentType.
Compartment Contact Material Type
Compartment Contact Material Type specifies the types of contact materials for
Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentContactMaterialType.
Compartment Damage Location
Compartment Damage Location specifies the damage locations for compartments. This select
Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentDamageLocation.
Compartment Damage Type
Compartment Damage Type specifies the types of damage for compartments. This select list
the UDP namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentDamageType.
Compartment Design Requirement
Compartment Design Requirement specifies the design requirement options for
Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentDesignRequirement.



Compartment Function Type
Compartment Function Type specifies the types of functions for compartments. This select list
the UDP namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentFunctionType.
Compartment Insulation Category
Compartment Insulation Category specifies the categories of insulation for compartments.
Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentInsulationCategory.
Compartment Naval Nuclear Class
Compartment Naval Nuclear Class specifies the naval nuclear classes for compartments. This
Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentNavalNuclearClass.
Compartment Naval Safety Category
Compartment Naval Safety Category specifies the categories of naval safety for
Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentNavalSafetyCategory.
Compartment Naval Security Class
Compartment Naval Security Class specifies the classes of naval security for compartments.
Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentNavalSecurityClass.
Compartment Noise Category
Compartment Noise Category specifies the categories of noise levels for compartments. This
Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentNoiseCategory.


Compartment Positional Rel Type
Compartment Positional Rel Type specifies the types of positional relationships for
Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentPositionalRelType.
Compartment Property Context
Compartment Property Context specifies the property context options for compartments. This
Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentPropertyContext.
Compartment Relevant Cargos
Compartment Relevant Cargos specifies the relevant types of cargo for compartments. This
codelist is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to
the UDP namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentRelevantCargor.
Compartment Structure Type
Compartment Structure Type specifies the types of structure for compartments. This select list
the UDP namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentStructureType.
Compartment Surface Preparation
Compartment Surface Preparation specifies the different types of surface preparation for
Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentSurfacePreparation.
Conduit Selection Basis
The Conduit Selection Basis select list (codelist) defines the conduits available for use in the
model.


Connection Type
The Connection Type select list (codelist) defines the types of connections available in the
software.
This select list is used in the Piping task. The list belongs to the CMNSCH namespace.
Construction Type
The Construction Type select list (codelist) defines the list of construction types available for
use in the model.
Construction type is the same as construction status in PDS. The construction type property is
used in rules in the specification, but its value is specified in the model.
This select list is used in multiple tasks and is also used in an integrated environment. The list
belongs to the CMNSCH namespace.
Control Point Subtype
The Control Point Subtype select list (codelist) defines subtypes, or disciplines, for the control
points.
This select list is used in the Common task. The list belongs to the CMNSCH namespace.

Numbers 1 through 6, and 10 through 19 are reserved for use by the software and should
not be modified.
You can define numbers 20 through 31.
Control Point Type
The Control Point Type select list (codelist) defines the different control points that you can
place or edit in the model.
This select list is used in the Common task. The list belongs to the CMNSCH namespace.
Create Exclusive WBS Item
The Create Exclusive WBS Item select list (codelist) is a Boolean (Yes/No) list that specifies
whether or not a WBS item is exclusive.



Cross Section Cardinal Points
The Cross Section Cardinal Points select list (codelist) defines the cardinal points for
members in the model.
This select list is used in the Structure task. The list belongs to the CMNSCH namespace.
Cross Section Edges
The Cross Section Edges select list (codelist) defines the edges for cross sections of members
in the model.
This select list is used in the Structure task. The list belongs to the REFDAT namespace.
Cross Section Shape Types
The Cross Section Shape Types select list (codelist) defines the available duct cross section
shapes.
This select list is used in the HVAC task. The list belongs to the REFDAT namespace.
Deck Category
The Deck Category select list (codelist) defines the available deck categories in the software.
Design Responsibility
The Design Responsibility select list (codelist) defines the list of parties available for the
design responsibility of an object.
Design Standard
The Design Standard select list (codelist) defines the available design standards.
This select list is used in multiple tasks. For example, in the Piping task, the list is used in
calculating piping wall thickness and branch reinforcements. The list belongs to the CMNSCH
namespace.


Door Frame Position
The Door Frame Position select list (codelist) specifies the values that represent the door
frame position within the specified support.
This select list is used in the Structure task. The list belongs to the UDP namespace.

Door Type
The Door Type select list (codelist) specifies the different types of doors available in the model.
Doors Windows Kinematics
The Doors Windows Kinematics select list (codelist) specifies the values that represent the
motion of doors and windows.
Drawing Style Codelist
The Drawing Style select list (codelist) defines the list of drawing types available for use in
drawings.
This select list is used in the Drawings and Reports task.

Drilling Template Pattern
The Drilling Template Pattern select list (codelist) specifies the values that represent the
arrangement of bolt holes at a bolted end. For pictures of common drilling patterns, see Bolt
Hole Patterns (on page 105).
\
Eccentric Offset Basis
The Eccentric Offset Basis select list (codelist) specifies the values for the basis on which the
eccentric offset is computed for an eccentric reducer. The eccentric reducer symbol uses this
property to determine whether the eccentric offset is based on the inside diameter or the outside
diameter.



Edge Reinforcement Category
The Edge Reinforcement Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for
edge reinforcements in the software.
Elevation Plane Type
The Elevation Plane Type select list (codelist) defines the elevation planes that you want to
place in the model.
This select list is used in the Grids task. The list belongs to the REFDAT namespace.
EMI
The EMI select list (codelist) defines the available electromagnetic interference types.
EMI Radiator
The EMI Radiator select list (codelist) defines the available electromagnetic radiator values.
EMI Suceptor
The EMI Suceptor select list (codelist) defines the available electromagnetic suceptor values.
This codelist is used in the Electrical task. The list belongs to the REFDAT namespace.
End Preparation
The End Preparation select list (codelist) defines all end preparations available for modeling.


End Standard
The End Standard select list (codelist) defines the list of end standards available for modeling.
Property Page Behavior
When you view this select list on Properties dialog boxes, the software only displays the
practices that have child values. For example, only the parent End Practices with child values
(End Standards) display.
Upon migration, if a parent has been previously selected (and this parent has no children), the
software shows the following behavior. The first time you display the Properties dialog box and
click the parent field, that parent value is discarded. The software does not allow you to re-select
this parent, unless child values are added in the catalog.
Environmental Zone
The Environmental Zone select list (codelist) defines the list of environmental zones for which
outside coating type, outside surface treatment, and auxiliary treatment of piping and fittings
apply.
Equipment Component Types
The Equipment Component Types select list (codelist) defines the available types of
equipment for use when designing equipment.
This select list is used in the Equipment and Furnishings task. The list belongs to the CMNSCH
namespace.
Some of the values in this select list should not be changed.
Equipment Types
The Equipment Types select list (codelist) defines the available types of equipment for use in
the model.
This select list is used in the Equipment and Furnishings task. The list belongs to the CMNSCH
namespace.
Some of the values in this select list should not be changed.


Examination
The Examination select list (codelist) specifies the values representing the industry practices
for examination, inspection, and testing. Refer to the Piping Materials Class Data topic in the
Piping Reference Data Guide for more information on how this select list is used.
Exterior Surface Treatment
The Exterior Surface Treatment select list (codelist) defines the list of available exterior
surface treatments in the model.
External Welded Pipe Part
The External Welded Pipe Part select list (codelist) defines the list of available external welded
pipe parts in the model.
This select list is used in the Hangers and Supports task. The list belongs to the REFDAT
namespace.
Fabrication Responsibility
The Fabrication Responsibility select list (codelist) defines the parties that are responsible for
fabricating objects.
Fabrication Type
The Fabrication Type select list (codelist) defines the different fabrication requirements for
objects in the model. In many cases, fabrication requirements and type can vary from project to
project.



Fabrication Type Basis
The Fabrication Type Basis select list (codelist) defines the available fabrication types in the
software.
Feature Type
The Feature Type select list (codelist) specifies the feature types that determine boundaries
during fitting placement.
Fireproofing Exposure Type
The Fireproofing Exposure Type select list (codelist) defines the types of fireproofing
exposure for members in the model.
Fireproofing Method
The Fireproofing Method select list (codelist) defines the fireproofing methods for members in
the model.
Fireproofing Type
The Fireproofing Type select list (codelist) defines the fireproofing types for members in the
model.
Flange Category
The Flange Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for flanges in the
software.



Flange Face Surface Finish
The Flange Face Surface Finish select list (codelist) specifies the surface finishes for the
flange faces of piping commodities. Surface finish is a measure of the smoothness of a flange
face.
Flange Facing
The Flange Facing select list (codelist) specifies the different flange facing values for gaskets.
Flange Insulation Kit Type
The Flange Insulation Kit Type select list (codelist) specifies the values that represent the type
of flange insulation kit. This value is only required when the gasket represents a flange
insulation kit.
The Flange Insulation Kit Type value is used to determine the additional bolt length required due
to the insulating washer(s) and the metallic electro-plated washer(s).
Flip Component
The Flip Component select list (codelist) specifies whether an object is on the bottom left or on
the top right.
Flow Direction
The Flow Direction select list (codelist) defines the available flow directions for runs in the
model. Flow direction is used in the model when users place flow-directional components, such
as check valves.



Fluid Code
The Fluid Code select list (codelist) defines the fluid systems and fluid codes available for use
in the model.
Front End Type
The Front End Type select list (codelist) specifies the front end types for heat exchanger
equipment.
This select list is used in the Equipment task. The list belongs to the UDP namespace.
Gasket Inside Diameter Basis
The Gasket Inside Diameter Basis select list (codelist) represents the basis values for
computing the inside diameter of gaskets. Refer to the Gasket Part Data topic in the Piping
Gasket Option
The Gasket Option select list (codelist) defines the gaskets available for use in the model.
Gasket Outside Diameter Basis
The Gasket Outside Diameter Basis select list (codelist) represents the basis values for
computing the outside diameter of gaskets. Refer to the Gasket Part Data topic in the Piping
Gasket Requirement Override
The Gasket Requirement Override select list (codelist) provides options that enable the
specification writer to define whether gaskets are required for lined, flanged fittings. In effect, this
property represents an override of the Gasket Requirement property in the Catalog.



Gasket Requirements
The Gasket Requirements select list (codelist) defines the list of gasket requirements available
for use in the model.
Gasket Selection Based on Fluid Code
The Gasket Selection Based on Fluid Code select list (codelist) specifies the options for
gasket selection based on fluid code.
This list is intended to address a situation where a piping spec is applicable to 15-20 different
values of fluid code. Most of the fluid code values applicable to this piping spec use the default
gasket. However, a few fluid code values require special gaskets. The intent of this select list is
to avoid the situation where the spec writer must create gasket records for each fluid code.
Gasket Selection for Mismatched Bolted Ends Option
The Gasket Selection for Mismatched Bolted Ends Option select list (codelist) specifies the
options for gasket selection based on bolted ends.
Gasket Style Number
The Gasket Style Number select list (codelist) specifies the gasket manufacturers and gasket
style numbers.
Gasket Type
The Gasket Type select list (codelist) defines the gasket categories and types available for use
in the model. Refer to the Gasket Part Data topic in the Piping Reference Data Guide for more
information on how this select list is used.



Geometric Industry Standard
The Geometric Industry Standard select list (codelist) defines the source, normally either an
industry standard or a manufacturer, used in the preparation of the catalog data applicable to
the piping commodity.
Two cases for geometric industry standards exist:
The piping commodity is of a type, size, or function such that its dimensions are governed
by an industry standard. Many fittings and certain sizes of some valves fall into this category.
In this case, the geometric industry standard specifies the governing standard.
The piping commodity is of a type, size, or function such that its dimensions are
manufacturer-specific, and, therefore, are not controlled by any industry standard. Many
smaller-sized fittings and valves fall into this category. This situation has two additional
possibilities.
Precise dimensions are not critical. A company-specific engineering standard may be
created for the piping commodity type that enables a standard catalog definition in order
to permit modeling in those situations where the precise dimensions of the piping
commodity are not critical. This situation is practical when the piping system in question
is field-routed and fabricated. It is not practical in situations where space tolerances are
extremely critical, or when the piping is to be shop-fabricated. In these cases, the
geometric industry standard must reflect the engineering standard.
Precise dimensions are critical. In this case, the geometric industry standard must
eventually reflect the manufacturer of the piping commodity.

The geometric industry standard distinguishes between versions of an industry standard or
manufacturer data. In other words, version 'a' of a specific industry standard is different from
version 'b' of the same industry standard by two distinct values of the geometric industry
standard. When a model is revamped, it is possible that the dimensional data for some
fittings will have changed between the existing, or as-built, data and the most recent
dimensional data. In some situations, it will be necessary for the piping designer to model an
older version of a fitting in the same model, where the newer version of the fitting is
modeled.



Geometry Type
The Geometry Type select list (codelist) defines the geometric characteristics and the topology
of the piping ports for piping parts. You must specify the correct geometry type so that the
software knows how to handle the item when placing it in the model.
This select list is used in the reference data for the Piping task when defining piping instruments
and specialty item parts. The list belongs to the REFDAT namespace. You can use this list to
map the Component Geometry to Route Feature Type.

Number Short
Description
Long
Description
Route
Feature
Type
Picture of a Typical
Component
Description Placement
Restrictions
5 Variable
length pipe
stock or
tubing
Plain piping
or tubing
variable
length
SF

This value
applies to
pipe stock or
tubing,
where the
length is not
constrained
by a
purchase
length.

10 Fixed length
pipe stock or
tubing
Plain piping
or tubing
fixed length
SF

This value
applies to
pipe stock or
tubing,
where the
length is
constrained
by a
purchase
length.



Number Short
Description
Long
Description
Route
Feature
Type
Component
Restrictions
11 Variable
length
integral core
and jacket
piping
Integral core
and jacket
piping
Variable
length
ALF_C
OMPON
ENT

This value
applies to
pipe stock,
which
represents a
jacket
integral with
the core,
where the
length is not
constrained
by a
purchase
length.
Can be
placed in a
straight or on
an end port.
15 Linear,
full-size
Linear, full
size
ALF_C
OMPON
ENT

This value
applies to
any fitting or
valve, where
the ports are
colinear and
of equal
size, for
example, a
gate valve
or a flange.
Can be
placed in a
straight or on
an end port.
16 Linear, with
size change
Linear, with
size change
ALF_RU
NCHAN
GE

This value
applies to
any fitting or
valve, where
the ports are
colinear, but
the sizes
differ, for
example, a
concentric
reducer or
concentric
swage.
Can be
placed in a
straight or on
an end port.
20 Elbow, fixed
angle
Elbow, fixed
angle
(including
angle
valves)
DC_EL
BOW

This value
applies to
any full-size
change-of-di
rection
fitting, where
the bend
angle is
constant,
Can only be
placed at an
end port.


Number Short
Description
Long
Description
Route
Feature
Type
Component
Restrictions
that is, the
elbow
cannot be
trimmed, for
example a
flanged
elbow.
25 Elbow, fixed
/ trimmable
angle
Elbow,
trimmable
DC_EL
BOW

This value
applies to
any full-size
change-of-di
rection
fitting, where
the elbow
can be
trimmed.
Can only be
placed at an
end port.
30 Elbow, side
outlet
Elbow, side
outlet
DC_EL
BOW

This value
applies to
any full-size
change-of-di
rection fitting
with a side
outlet.
Can only be
placed at an
end port.
35 Elbow,
radial outlet
Elbow,
radial outlet
DC_EL
BOW

This value
applies to
any full-size
change-of-di
rection fitting
with a radial
outlet.
Can only be
placed at an
end port.
36 Elbow,
reducing
Elbow,
reducing
DC_RE
DUCIN
GELBO
W

This value
applies to
any
reducing
change-of-di
rection
fitting.
Can only be
placed at an
end port.
37 Elbow,
gooseneck
Elbow,
gooseneck
ALF_EN
DLEG

This value
applies to
any full-size
gooseneck
fitting, for
example, a
standpipe
Can only be
placed at an
end port.


Number Short
Description
Long
Description
Route
Feature
Type
Component
Restrictions
gooseneck.
40 Return Return ALF_EN
DLEG

This value
applies to
any 180
return fitting.
Can only be
placed at an
end port.
45 Return,
bottom
outlet
Return,
bottom
outlet
ALF_EN
DLEG

This value
applies to
any 180
return fitting
with a
bottom
outlet, for
example, a
biological-ph
armaceutical
use point
with a
bottom
outlet.
Can only be
placed at an
end port.
50 Return, side
outlet
Return, side
outlet
ALF_EN
DLEG

This value
applies to
any 180
return fitting
with a side
outlet, for
example, a
biological-ph
armaceutical
use point
with a side
outlet.
Can only be
placed at an
end port.
55 Pipe bend Pipe bend DC_BE
ND

Can only be
placed at an
end port.


Number Short
Description
Long
Description
Route
Feature
Type
Component
Restrictions
60 Mitered
elbow
(pre-fabricat
ed part to be
purchased)
Miter DC_MIT
ER

This value
applies to
any
pre-fabricate
d, mitered,
change-of-di
rection
fitting.
Can only be
placed at an
end port.
65 Eccentric,
with size
change
Eccentric
size change
ALF_RU
NCHAN
GE

This value
applies to
any fitting or
valve, where
the inline
ports are
offset, but
the sizes
differ, for
example, an
eccentric
reducer or
eccentric
swage.
Can only be
placed at an
end port.
66 Eccentric,
full size
Eccentric,
full size
ALF_RU
NCHAN
GE

This value
applies to
any fitting or
valve, where
the inline
ports are
offset and of
equal size,
for example
an
expansion
joint with an
offset.
Can only be
placed at an
end port.
70

Concentric
size change
ALF_RU
NCHAN
GE

This value
applies to
any fitting or
valve, where
the ports are
colinear, but
the sizes
differ, for
example, a
concentric
reducer or
concentric
Can only be
placed at an
end port.


Number Short
Description
Long
Description
Route
Feature
Type
Component
Restrictions
swage.
75 Tee, full size
(including
3-way
valves)
Tee, full size
(including
3-way
valves)
BP_HE
ADER

This value
applies to
any full-size
tee-type
branch
fitting or
3-way valve.
Can be
placed in a
straight or on
an end port.
80 Tee,
reducing
branch
Tee,
reducing
branch
BP_HE
ADER

This value
applies to
any tee-type
branch
fitting or
3-way valve
with a
reducing
branch.
Can be
placed in a
straight or on
an end port.
85 Tee,
eccentric
reducing
branch
Tee,
eccentric
reducing
branch
ALF_C
OMPON
ENT

This value
applies to
any tee-type
branch
fitting or
3-way valve
with an
eccentric
reducing
branch.
Can be
placed in a
straight or on
an end port.
90 Tee,
reducing run
and branch
Tee,
reducing run
and branch

BP_HE
ADER

This value
applies to
any tee-type
branch
fitting or
3-way valve
with a
reducing run
and a
reducing
branch.
Can be
placed in a
straight or on
an end port.


Number Short
Description
Long
Description
Route
Feature
Type
Component
Restrictions
95 Tee,
reducing
runs
Tee,
reducing
runs
BP_HE
ADER

This value
applies to
any tee-type
branch
fitting or
3-way valve
with two
reducing run
legs, for
example, a
bullhead
tee.
Can be
placed in a
straight or on
an end port.
100 Tee with
offset, full
size
Tee with
offset, full
size
ALF_C
OMPON
ENT

This value
applies to
any full-size
tee-type
branch
fitting or
3-way valve
with an
offset.
Can be
placed in a
straight or on
an end port.
105 Tee with
offset,
reducing
branch
Tee with
offset,
reducing
branch
ALF_C
OMPON
ENT

This value
applies to
any tee-type
branch
fitting or
3-way valve
with an
offset and a
reducing
branch.
Can be
placed in a
straight or on
an end port.
110 Tee with
offset,
reducing run
and branch
Tee with
offset,
reducing run
and branch
ALF_C
OMPON
ENT

This value
applies to
any tee-type
branch
fitting or
3-way valve
with an
offset, a
reducing
run, and a
reducing
branch.
Can be
placed in a
straight or on
an end port.


Number Short
Description
Long
Description
Route
Feature
Type
Component
Restrictions
115 Tee with
offset,
reducing
runs
Tee with
offset,
reducing
runs
ALF_C
OMPON
ENT

This value
applies to
any tee-type
branch
fitting or
3-way valve
with an
offset and
two reducing
runs.
Can be
placed in a
straight or on
an end port.
120 Tee with
double
offset, full
size
Tee with
double
offset, full
size
ALF_C
OMPON
ENT

This value
applies to
any full-size
tee-type
branch
fitting or
3-way valve
with a
double
offset.
Can be
placed in a
straight or on
an end port.
125 Tee with
double
offset,
reducing
branch
Tee with
double
offset,
reducing
branch
ALF_C
OMPON
ENT

This value
applies to
any tee-type
branch
fitting or
3-way valve
with a
double
offset and a
reducing
branch.
Can be
placed in a
straight or on
an end port.
130 Tee with
double
offset,
reducing run
and branch
Tee with
double
offset,
reducing run
and branch
ALF_C
OMPON
ENT

This value
applies to
any tee-type
branch
fitting or
3-way valve
with a
double
offset, a
reducing
run, and a
reducing
branch.
Can be
placed in a
straight or on
an end port.


Number Short
Description
Long
Description
Route
Feature
Type
Component
Restrictions
135 Tee with
double
offset,
reducing
runs
Tee with
double
offset,
reducing
runs
ALF_C
OMPON
ENT

This value
applies to
any tee-type
branch
fitting or
3-way valve
with a
double
offset and
two reducing
runs.
Can be
placed in a
straight or on
an end port.
140 Tee,
non-symmet
rical
Tee,
non-symmet
rical
ALF_C
OMPON
ENT

This value
applies to
any tee-type
branch
fitting or
3-way valve
with
non-symmet
rical runs.
Can be
placed in a
straight or on
an end port.
145 Cross, full
size
(including
4-way
valves)
Cross, full
size
(including
4-way
valves)
ALF_C
OMPON
ENT

This value
applies to
any full-size
cross-type
branch
fitting or
4-way valve.
Can be
placed in a
straight or on
an end port.
150 Cross,
reducing
branches
Cross,
reducing
branches
ALF_C
OMPON
ENT

This value
applies to
any
cross-type
branch
fitting or
4-way valve
with two
reducing
branches.
Can be
placed in a
straight or on
an end port.
155 Cross,
reducing run
and one
branch
Cross,
reducing run
and one
branch
ALF_C
OMPON
ENT

This value
applies to
any
cross-type
branch
fitting or
4-way valve
Can be
placed in a
straight or on
an end port.


Number Short
Description
Long
Description
Route
Feature
Type
Component
Restrictions
with a
reducing run
and a
reducing
branch.
160 Cross,
reducing run
and two
branches
Cross,
reducing run
and two
branches
ALF_C
OMPON
ENT

This value
applies to
any
cross-type
branch
fitting or
4-way valve
with a
reducing run
and two
reducing
branches.
Can be
placed in a
straight or on
an end port.
165 Lateral,
full-size
Lateral, full
size
BP_HE
ADER

This value
applies to
any full-size
lateral-type
branch
fitting or
valve.
Can be
placed in a
straight or on
an end port.
170 Lateral,
reducing
branch
Lateral,
reducing
branch
BP_HE
ADER

This value
applies to
any
lateral-type
branch
fitting or
valve with a
reducing
branch.
Can be
placed in a
straight or on
an end port.
175 Lateral,
reducing run
and branch
Lateral,
reducing run
and branch
BP_HE
ADER

This value
applies to
any
lateral-type
branch
fitting or
valve with a
reducing run
and a
reducing
branch.
Can be
placed in a
straight or on
an end port.
180 Lateral
reducing
Lateral
reducing
BP_HE
ADER

This value
applies to
Can be
placed in a


Number Short
Description
Long
Description
Route
Feature
Type
Component
Restrictions
runs runs any
lateral-type
branch
fitting or
valve with
two reducing
runs.
straight or on
an end port.
185 Olet-type
branch,
fixed angle
Olet-type
branch,
fixed angle
BF_BR
ANCH

This value
applies to
any
olet-type
branch
fitting, where
the branch
angle is
constant,
that is, the
olet-type
branch
cannot be
trimmed.
Can only be
placed on a
straight.
186 Olet-type
branch,
variable
angle
Olet-type
branch,
variable
angle
BF_BR
ANCH

This value
applies to
any
olet-type
branch
fitting, where
the olet-type
branch can
be trimmed.
Can only be
placed on a
straight.
187 Olet-type
branch,
double
outlet
Olet-type
branch,
double
outlet
ALF_C
OMPON
ENT

This value
applies to
any
olet-type
branch
fitting with
two outlets.
Can be
placed in a
straight or on
an end port.
190 Latrolet-ty
pe branch
Latrolet-ty
pe branch
BF_BR
ANCH

This value
applies to
any
olet-type
branch
fitting, where
the acute
branch
angle is less
than 90.
Can only be
placed on a
straight.


Number Short
Description
Long
Description
Route
Feature
Type
Component
Restrictions
195 Non-radial
branch
Non-radial
branch
BF_BR
ANCH

This value
applies to
any
olet-type
branch
fitting, where
the branch
centerline is
offset from
the header
centerline.
Can only be
placed on a
straight.
200 Endolet-type
branch
(Flatolet)
Endolet-type
branch
ALF_C
OMPON
ENT

This value
applies to
any
olet-type
branch
fitting that,
due to the
branch size
being so
small and
the run size
so large, the
branch
fitting is
basically flat
on the
bottom.
Can be
placed in a
straight or on
an end port.
205 Elbolet Elbolet ALF_RU
NCHAN
GE

This value
applies to
any
elbolet-type
branch
fitting, where
the elbolet
fitting is
used to
branch from
a
change-of-di
rection
fitting.
Can only be
placed at an
end port.


Number Short
Description
Long
Description
Route
Feature
Type
Component
Restrictions
210 True Y-type
branch
True Y-type
branch
ALF_EN
DLEG

This value
applies to
any
wye-type
branch
fitting or
valve.
Can only be
placed at an
end port.
215 Double
Y-type
branch
Double
Y-type
branch
ALF_EN
DLEG

This value
applies to
any double
wye-type
branch
fitting or
valve.
Can only be
placed at an
end port.
220 Closing
fitting
(including
instrument
indicators
and
instrument
transmitters)
Closing
(including
instrument
indicators)
EF_EN
DFEAT
URE

This value
applies to
any closing
fitting, for
example, a
cap, a plug,
a blind
flange, an
instrument
indicator, or
an
instrument
transmitter.
By
definition, a
closing
fitting has
one port.
Can only be
placed at an
end port.
225 Orifice
flange
Orifice
flange
ALF_C
OMPON
ENT

This value
applies to
any flange
with three or
more ports.
Can be
placed in a
straight or on
an end port.
230 Multi-port
valve
Multi-port
valve
ALF_EN
DLEG

This value
applies to
any
multiport
valve.
Can only be
placed at an
end port.
235 Surface-mo Surface-mo SMC_F

This value Can only be


Number Short
Description
Long
Description
Route
Feature
Type
Component
Restrictions
unted unted EATUR
E

applies to
any
surface-mou
nted fitting
other than a
wall
penetration
fitting, for
example a
centering
flange or a
surface-mou
nted
instrument.
placed on a
straight.
240 Tandem
valve,
horizontal
main at
drain angle
with vertical
tandem
Tandem
valve,
horizontal
main at
drain angle
with vertical
tandem
ALF_C
OMPON
ENT

This value
applies to
any sanitary
or aseptic
tandem
valve, where
the drainage
geometry is
described in
this manner.
Can be
placed in a
straight or on
an end port.
245 Tandem
valve,
horizontal
main with
vertical
tandem
Tandem
valve,
horizontal
main with
vertical
tandem
ALF_C
OMPON
ENT

This value
applies to
any sanitary
or aseptic
tandem
valve, where
the drainage
geometry is
described in
this manner.
Can be
placed in a
straight or on
an end port.
250 Tandem
valve,
vertical main
with tandem
at drain
angle
Tandem
valve,
vertical main
with tandem
at drain
angle
ALF_C
OMPON
ENT

This value
applies to
any sanitary
or aseptic
tandem
valve, where
the drainage
geometry is
described in
this manner.
Can be
placed in a
straight or on
an end port.
255 Tandem
valve,
horizontal
Tandem
valve,
horizontal
ALF_C
OMPON
ENT

This value
applies to
any sanitary
Can be
placed in a
straight or on


Number Short
Description
Long
Description
Route
Feature
Type
Component
Restrictions
main with
tandem at
drain angle
main with
tandem at
drain angle
or aseptic
tandem
valve, where
the drainage
geometry is
described in
this manner.
an end port.
256 Angle valve Angle valve ALF_EN
DLEG

This value
applies to
any full-size,
change-of-di
rection
valve.
Can only be
placed at an
end port.
257 Angle valve,
reducing
Angle valve,
reducing
DC_RE
DUCIN
GELBO
W

This value
applies to
any
reducing,
change-of-di
rection
valve.
Can only be
placed at an
end port.
260 Valve
fitting/assem
bly,
horizontal
valve with
vertical
fitting
access
Valve/fitting
assembly,
horizontal
main at
drain angle
with vertical
access on
primary side
of center
ALF_EN
DLEG

This value
applies to
any sanitary
or aseptic
access
valve with
an access
fitting
assembly,
where the
drainage
geometry is
described in
this manner.
Can only be
placed at an
end port.


Number Short
Description
Long
Description
Route
Feature
Type
Component
Restrictions
265 Valve
fitting/assem
bly,
horizontal
valve at
drain angle
with vertical
fitting
access
Valve/fitting
assembly,
horizontal
main at
drain angle
with vertical
access on
secondary
side of
center
ALF_EN
DLEG

This value
applies to
any sanitary
or aseptic
access
valve with
an access
fitting
assembly,
where the
drainage
geometry is
described in
this manner.
Can only be
placed at an
end port.
270 Valve
fitting/assem
bly,
horizontal
valve at
drain angle
with
horizontal
fitting
access
Valve/fitting
assembly,
horizontal
main at
drain angle
with
horizontal
access at
drain angle
ALF_EN
DLEG

This value
applies to
any sanitary
or aseptic
access
valve with
an access
fitting
assembly,
where the
drainage
geometry is
described in
this manner.
Can only be
placed at an
end port.
275 Valve
fitting/assem
bly, vertical
valve with
horizontal
fitting
access
Valve/fitting
assembly,
vertical main
with
horizontal
access at
drain angle
below main
center
ALF_EN
DLEG

This value
applies to
any sanitary
or aseptic
access
valve with
an access
fitting
assembly,
where the
drainage
geometry is
described in
this manner.
Can only be
placed at an
end port.


Number Short
Description
Long
Description
Route
Feature
Type
Component
Restrictions
280 Valve/fitting
assembly,
vertical main
with
horizontal
access at
drain angle
below main
center and
45 from
assembly
center
Valve/fitting
assembly,
vertical main
with
horizontal
access at
drain angle
below main
center and
45 from
assembly
center
ALF_EN
DLEG

This value
applies to
any sanitary
or aseptic
access
valve with
an access
fitting
assembly,
where the
drainage
geometry is
described in
this manner.
Can only be
placed at an
end port.
285 Valve/fitting
assembly,
vertical main
with
horizontal
access at
drain angle
above main
center

Valve/fitting
assembly,
vertical main
with
horizontal
access at
drain angle
above main
center
ALF_EN
DLEG

This value
applies to
any sanitary
or aseptic
access
valve with
an access
fitting
assembly,
where the
drainage
geometry is
described in
this manner.
Can only be
placed at an
end port.
290 Valve/fitting
assembly,
vertical main
with
horizontal
access at
drain angle
above main
center and
45 from
assembly
center
Valve/fitting
assembly,
vertical main
with
horizontal
access at
drain angle
above main
center and
45 from
assembly
center
ALF_EN
DLEG

This value
applies to
any sanitary
or aseptic
access
valve with
an access
fitting
assembly,
where the
drainage
geometry is
described in
this manner.
Can only be
placed at an
end port.


Number Short
Description
Long
Description
Route
Feature
Type
Component
Restrictions
295 Lift check
valve,
horizontal
orientation
only
Lift check
valve,
horizontal
orientation
only
ALF_C
OMPON
ENT

This value
applies to
any
flow-depend
ent valve,
where the
valve can
only be
installed in a
horizontal
pipe run.
Can be
placed in a
straight or on
an end port.
300 Lift check
valve,
vertical
orientation
only
Lift check
valve,
vertical
orientation
only
ALF_C
OMPON
ENT

This value
applies to
any
flow-depend
ent valve,
where the
valve can
only be
installed in a
vertical pipe
run.
Can be
placed in a
straight or on
an end port.
305

Fitting with
multiple
branches,
e.g. bleed
ring or drip
ring tree
ALF_EN
DLEG

This value
applies to
any circular
fitting with
multiple
branches,
for example,
bleed ring or
drip ring tee.
Can only be
placed at an
end port.
310 Wall
penetration
fitting

Wall
penetration
fitting
SMC_F
EATUR
E

This value
applies to
any
surface-mou
nted fitting,
for example,
a
penetration
sleeve,
where the
fitting is to
be aligned
with a hole
in a wall or
other
structure.
Can only be
placed on a
straight.


Number Short
Description
Long
Description
Route
Feature
Type
Component
Restrictions
315 Clamp-on
fitting

Clamp-on
fitting
SMC_F
EATUR
E

This value
applies to
any
clamp-on
fitting, for
example, a
clamp-on
saddle or a
clamp-on
flow sensor.
Can only be
placed on a
straight.
500 Generic Generic ALF_EN
DLEG

This value
applies to
any other
fitting.
Can only be
placed at an
end port.
Grid Plane Type
The Grid Plane Type select list (codelist) defines the grid planes available for use in the model.
This select list is used in the Grids task. The list belongs to the REFDAT namespace.
Hand Wheel Orientation
The Hand Wheel Orientation select list (codelist) defines the rotation angles available for
instrument hand wheels.
Handrail Connection Type
The Handrail Connection Type select list (codelist) defines the connection types for handrails.
Handrail End Treatment
The Handrail End Treatment select list (codelist) defines the end treatments for handrails.


Handrail Inline Connection Type
The Handrail Inline Connection Type select list (codelist) defines the inline connection types
available for handrails.
Handrail Offset
The Handrail Offset select list (codelist) defines the offset for handrails in the model.
Handrail Orientation
The Handrail Orientation select list (codelist) defines the orientation of handrails.
Handrail Side Connection Type
The Handrail Side Connection Type select list (codelist) defines the side connections available
for handrails.
Hazardous Fluid Category
The Hazardous Fluid Category select list (codelist) defines the different hazardous fluid
services available for use in the model.
This codelist is used in multiple tasks. The list belongs to the UDP namespace.
Header Branch Size Basis Option
The Header Branch Size Basis Option select list (codelist) enables the specification writer to
designate whether the Header Size and Branch values for the Branch Intersection Rule are
determined automatically based on the size ranges for the pipe stock and branch nipples in the
piping commodity filter, or based on the sizes in the Permissible Nominal Piping Diameters Rule
for the applicable piping materials class.


Heat Tracing Medium
The Heat Tracing Medium select list (codelist) defines heat tracing requirements, types, and
media available for use in the model.
HngSup Associated Part Type
The HngSup Associated Part Type select list (codelist) specifies the available associated part
types for hangers and supports.
namespace.
HngSup Association Type
The HngSup Association Type select list (codelist) specifies the available association types for
hangers and supports.
namespace.
HngSup BOM Type
The HngSup BOM Type select list (codelist) specifies the different types of bills of materials
(BOM).
namespace.
HngSup Bounding Box Type
The HngSup Bounding Box Type select list (codelist) specifies the different types of bounding
boxes.
This select list is used in the Hangers and Supports task. The list belongs to the UDP
namespace.



HngSup Class Node Type
The HngSup Class Node Type select list (codelist) specifies the available hangers and
supports classification nodes.
namespace.
HngSup Command
The HngSup Command select list (codelist) specifies the available types of commands for the
hangers and supports part classes.
This select list is used in the Hangers and Supports task. The list belongs to the CMNSCH
namespace.
HngSup Connect Obj
The HngSup Connect Obj select list (codelist) specifies the hangers and supports connectable
object types.
namespace.
HngSup Connection Type
The HngSup Connection Type select list (codelist) specifies the available connection types for
hangers and supports.
namespace.
HngSup Cut Type
The HngSup Cut Type select list (codelist) specifies the available cut types for hangers and
supports.
namespace.



HngSup Discipline
The HngSup Discipline select list (codelist) specifies the available disciplines for the hangers
and supports part classes.
namespace.
HngSup ET Type
The HngSup ET Type select list (codelist) specifies the available end treatments for hangers
and supports.
namespace.
HngSup Face Selection Type
The HngSup Face Selection Type select list (codelist) defines the faces available for selection.
namespace.
HngSup Joint Type
The HngSup Joint Type select list (codelist) specifies the available joint types for hangers and
supports joints.
namespace.
HngSup Manufacturer
The HngSup Manufacturer select list (codelist) specifies the available hangers and supports
manufacturers.
namespace.



HngSup Mating Joint Type
The HngSup Mating Joint Type select list (codelist) defines the mating types available at
joints, specifically symbol ports for support parts.
namespace.
HngSup Part Class Type
The HngSup Part Class Type select list (codelist) defines a list of part class types for hangers
and supports. Part class types for other disciplines are listed in the Part Class Types select list.
namespace.
HngSup Physical Connection
The HngSup Physical Connection select list (codelist) defines the physical connection types
for hangers and supports component ports.
namespace.
HngSup Port Category
The HngSup Port Category select list (codelist) defines symbol port categories.
namespace.
HngSup Port Type
The HngSup Port Type select list (codelist) defines symbol port types.
namespace.



HngSup Rule Type
The HngSup Rule Type select list (codelist) specifies types of rules.
namespace.
HngSup Strict Face Selection
The HngSup Strict Face Selection select list (codelist) specifies whether or not to force strict
face selection during placement of hangers and supports.
namespace.
HngSup Support Type
The HngSup Support Type select list (codelist) specifies the different types and disciplines of
supports.
namespace.
HngSup Type Selection Rule
The HngSup Type Selection Rule select list (codelist) specifies the values describing the
locations of supports relative to routed objects.
namespace.
HVAC Component Types
The HVAC Component Types select list (codelist) specifies duct component types.



HVAC Lining Material
The HVAC Lining Material select list (codelist) specifies the lining requirements and materials
for duct.
HVAC Part Data Basis
The HVAC Part Data Basis select list (codelist) specifies the values for the basis of the
dimensional data for HVAC parts. The purpose of this property is to recognize those
HVAC Part Generation Basis
The HVAC Part Generation Basis select list (codelist) specifies whether to enable breaks on
feature boundaries for HVAC systems.
HVAC Width and Depth Basis
The HVAC Width and Depth Basis select list (codelist) provides options for the width and
depth dimensions of HVAC.
Icarus Column Base Option
The Icarus Column Base Option select list (codelist) specifies the types of connections at
column bases.
This select list is used in the Space Management task. The list belongs to the UDP namespace.
Icarus is a cost-estimation software package.



Icarus Concrete Type
The Icarus Concrete Type select list (codelist) specifies the types of concrete.
Icarus Exclude End Bent
The Icarus Exclude End Bent select list (codelist) specifies options for exclusion of end bents.
Icarus Grating Type
The Icarus Grating Type select list (codelist) specifies the types of gratings.
Icarus Pipe Rack Type
The Icarus Pipe Rack Type select list (codelist) specifies the types of pipe racks.
Icarus Struct Steel Analysis
The Icarus Struct Steel Analysis select list (codelist) specifies the types of stress analysis.
Icarus Third Column
The Icarus Third Column select list (codelist) specifies third column options.
IFCAspectCodeValue
The IFC Aspect Code Value select list (codelist) defines the interference checking priority for
aspects.
This select list is used in the interference checking process. The list belongs to the CMNSCH
namespace.


IFC Process Status
The IFC Process Status select list (codelist) defines the status of the interference process on
the server.
namespace.
IFC Required Action
The IFC Required Action select list (codelist) defines the actions that users can take regarding
interferences. For example, one action is to ignore the interference.
namespace.
IFC Type
The IFC Type select list (codelist) defines the different types of interferences that appear.
namespace.
Ignore Boundaries
The Ignore Boundaries select list (codelist) is a Boolean (Yes/No) list that specifies whether or
not the software searches beyond boundaries to find intrinsic breaks during WBS item creation.
Industry Commodity Code Option
The Industry Commodity Code Option select list (codelist) defines options for commodity
codes. Refer to the Default Project Options Sheet topic in the Piping Reference Data Guide for
more information on how this select list is used.



Inlet Port Geometry Type
The Inlet Port Geometry Type select list (codelist) defines options for the inlet port geometry
on diverter valves.
Installation Responsibility
The Installation Responsibility select list (codelist) defines the list of parties available for
installation responsibility.
Instrument Functional Type
The Instrument Functional Type select list (codelist) defines the different types of instruments
available in the model.
Insulation Material
The Insulation Material select list (codelist) defines all the insulation materials available for use
in the model.
Insulation Purpose
The Insulation Purpose select list (codelist) defines all the insulation purposes available for use
in the model.
This select list is used in multiple tasks. This list belongs to the CMNSCH namespace.
Insulation Temperature Basis
The Insulation Temperature Basis select list (codelist) defines options for temperature basis.
This information is used during insulation design. For example, the basis can be the normal
operating temperature.



Insulation Thickness Basis
The Insulation Thickness Basis select list (codelist) defines all the insulation thicknesses
available for use in the model.
This select list is used in multiple tasks. The list belongs to the UDP namespace.
IntelliShip Data Integrity Msgs
The IntelliShip Data Integrity Msgs select list (codelist) defines database integrity messages.
IntelliShip Msgs
The IntelliShip Msgs select list (codelist) defines the messages for the To Do List in the
software.
Interior Surface Treatment
The Interior Surface Treatment select list (codelist) defines the interior surface treatments
available for use in the model.
Is Bend Planar
The Is Bend Planar select list (codelist) specifies the options for whether or not the centerline of
a pipe bend configuration lies within a single plane.
The following picture shows a non-planar pipe bend configuration.



Jacketed Closure Method
The Jacketed Closure Method select list (codelist) defines the methods by which the end of
jacketed pipe is closed.
Jacketed Piping Basis
The Jacketed Piping Basis select list (codelist) specifies whether a piping commodity applies
to the core piping or the jacketed piping.
Lining Material
The Lining Material select list (codelist) defines the lining materials available for a piping
commodity. Some examples of lining materials are concrete, epoxy, rubber, and plastic. Refer to
the Piping Materials Class Data Sheet topic in the Piping Reference Data Guide for more
The lining material select list has a dependent property called lining requirements that identifies
whether a specific value of the lining material is interpreted as lined or not lined.
Load Case Liquid Pressure
Load Case Liquid Pressure specifies liquid pressure ratings for load cases on compartments.
Catalog hierarchy and select LoadCasLiquidPressure.
Load Case Sea Pressure
Load Case Sea Pressure specifies sea pressure ratings for load cases on compartments. This
Catalog hierarchy and select LoadCaseSeaPressure.



Load Span Classification
The Load Span Classification select list (codelist) defines the load span classification
standards for raceway.
Longitudinal Beam Category
The Longitudinal Beam Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for
longitudinal beams in the software.
Longitudinal Bulkhead Category
The Longitudinal Bulkhead Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for
longitudinal bulkheads in the software.
Longitudinal Profile Category
The Longitudinal Profile Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for
longitudinal profiles in the software.
Longitudinal Seam Category
The Longitudinal Seam Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for
longitudinal seams in the software.
Longitudinal Tube Category
The Longitudinal Tube Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for
longitudinal tubes in the software.
Loose Material Requirements
The Loose Material Requirements select list (codelist) defines the options for any loose
material created with a piping commodity, even though the loose material is supplied by the
vendor. In some situations, it is necessary to track such loose material for construction
purposes, although the loose material is not managed by the material control system.



Mach Bolt Length Round Off Option
The Mach Bolt Length Round Off Option select list (codelist) specifies the available methods
for machine bolt length round-off in machine bolt length calculations.
Once the bolt length has been computed, the length of the machine bolt must be rounded to a
practical value.
The specification writer can choose to specify a simple round off to be applied, or no round off;
or can choose to define the algorithm to round off the machine bolt length on the basis of a list of
the available purchased, or preferred, machine bolt lengths, as a function of the machine bolt
diameter, and optionally the materials grade of the machine bolt.
Manufacturer
The Manufacturer select list (codelist) defines the list of manufacturers of piping commodities.
The manufacturers are grouped into categories of industry practices.
Specifically, this select list is intended to be used when the geometric industry standard
identifies the industry standard, but the specification writer is required to track the manufacturer
for reporting purposes. Typically, this value is imported from a material control system, if
required.
Manufacturing Method
The Manufacturing Method select list (codelist) specifies the method of manufacturing for plain
piping and nipples.
Map Type
The Map Type select list (codelist) defines the type of symbol mapping for isometric drawings.
This select list is used in the Drawings and Reports task. The list belongs to the REFDAT
namespace.


Material Description Builder Option
The Material Description Builder Option select list (codelist) specifies the options that specify
whether material descriptions are created automatically for piping commodities, stock piping
specialties, and stock instruments on the basis of embedded labels.
This option is only applicable when the Commodity Code Builder option has been enabled.
Materials Grade
The Materials Grade select list (codelist) defines the many different grades of materials that you
plan to use in your model.
Materials of Construction Class
The Materials of Construction Class select list (codelist) defines the different classes of piping
materials.
The materials of construction class property is not the same as the materials grade property.
The materials grade is specific to each fitting within a piping materials class. As an example,
forged fittings have a different materials grade than welded fittings.
The materials of construction class select list is intended for grouping similar piping materials
classes for the benefit of the specification writer in managing piping specifications. As an
example, consider three piping specifications, which all use carbon steel ASTM-A106B and
ASTM-A53-B pipe; all are the same pressure class, CL150; and all use trim 8 valves. However,
the fluid service designation and the service limits vary among these piping materials classes.
Materials Type
The Materials Type select list (codelist) defines the many different groups and types of
materials that you plan to use in your model.



Member Fireproofing Application Method
The Member Fireproofing Application Method select list (codelist) defines the methods that
are available to apply fireproofing to an object.
This select list is used by the Structure task and belongs to the UDP name space.

Member Fireproofing Application Type
The Member Fireproofing Application Type select list (codelist) defines the fireproofing type
to apply to the object (contour fully encased, contour flange exposed, and so forth).

Member Fireproofing Exposure Type
The Member Fireproofing Exposure Type select list (codelist) defines the fireproofing
exposure type (exterior or interior).

Member Orientation
The Member Orientation select list (codelist) specifies the default direction in the global
coordinate system for the local z-axis of the structural section.
The only entry in this select list that is used is the ZX-axis rule. This rule is described as follows:
The local z-axis of the member is parallel to the global Z-axis by default. However, if you rotate
the member such that the local x-axis of the member (along the member line) becomes parallel
to the global Z-axis, then the software switches the local z-axis of the member to be parallel to
the positive global X-axis.
Methods of Jacket Pipe Construction
The Methods of Jacket Pipe Construction select list (codelist) specifies rules for providing
jackets for pipe couplings and other connections. Refer to the Piping Reference Data Guide for
more information on the default piping commodity selection rule.



Methods of Trimming
The Methods of Trimming select list (codelist) specifies rules for trimming piping branches and
other connections. For example, it might be necessary to trim the welded end of a flange at a
nozzle in order to align with a sloped run of plain piping. Refer to the Port Alignment topic in the
Piping Reference Data Guide for more information on how this select list is used.
Min Bend To Bend Tangent Len Option
The Min Bend To Bend Tangent Len Option sheet defines values that provide the
specification writer with the ability to specify both standard and non-standard minimum
bend-to-bend tangent lengths for each type of pipe bend configuration.
The specification writer can provide standard minimum tangent lengths and any number of
alternate minimum tangent lengths, similar to the Commodity Option in the piping commodity
filter. In other words, alternate minimum tangent lengths are possible on the same bending
machine.
Mirror Behavior Option
The Mirror Behavior Option select list (codelist) defines available mirroring options for objects
in the model.
The mirror behavior options include the following values.
The component can be mirrored.
The component cannot be mirrored or rotated but can be copied and translated.
The component is asymmetrical, and mirroring results in an orientation of the component
that is not representative of that component type. However, a 180 degree rotation results in
the component's connection points remaining aligned with the adjacent routing. In this
situation, the software rotates the component by 180 degrees.
The component is asymmetrical, and mirroring results in an orientation of the component
that is not representative of that component type. However, in this situation, the component
is replaced by one with the appropriate orientation.


Misc Requisition Classification
The Misc Requisition Classification select list (codelist) organizes piping commodities in a
meaningful way for the purposes of requisitioning.
Multiport Valve Op Req
The Multiport Valve Op Req select list (codelist) specifies the options for whether or not
multiport valve operators are required for a valve body.
Note Purpose
The Note Purpose select list (codelist) defines the different types of notes for objects in the
model.
Nozzle Entrance Type
The Nozzle Entrance Type select list (codelist) defines the choices for types of nozzle
entrances. For example, the type can be radial or axial.
This select list is used in the Piping task and is also used in an integrated environment. The list
Nozzle Flange Type
The Nozzle Flange Type select list (codelist) defines the types for nozzle flanges.
Nozzle Function
The Nozzle Function select list (codelist) defines the different functions possible for nozzles.



Nut Creation Option
The Nut Creation Option select list (codelist) defines the options for nut creation.
By default, the software creates nuts at a bolted joint. The specification writer can disable nut
creation when nuts are not tracked for material management purposes.
Even if this option is disabled, the specification writer can still use the nut height for the bolt
length calculation if the nut selection filter and accompanying nut part data are defined in the
catalog.
In other words, the nut selection filter, and the accompanying nut part data, may be used for bolt
length calculations, even when this option has been disabled. In this situation, the nut height, as
well as the bolt extension, will be included in the bolt length calculation, although the bolt
extension will be expected to not consider the nut height.
Nut Option
The Nut Option select list (codelist) specifies the optional nut selections that can be enabled by
the specification writer.
A default nut option represents the nut that should be used when the piping designer has not
explicitly selected one. The nut option, if applicable, is selected by the piping designer at a
bolted joint.
Nut Type
The Nut Type select list (codelist) defines the list of nuts available for use in the model.
Open or Blind Spacer Install State
The Open or Blind Spacer Install State select list (codelist) shows whether the open spacer or
the blind spacer has been installed.
This select list is used in the Piping task. The list belongs to the REFDATA namespace.

Opening Category
The Opening Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for openings in the
software.



Orifice Flange Tap Orientation
The Orifice Flange Tap Orientation select list (codelist) defines the locations available for the
placement of taps.
The piping specification writer must specify whether the two taps are oriented 180 degrees apart
on the outside diameter of the flange or 90 degrees apart. This select list defines those options.
Outlet Port Geometry Type
The Outlet Port Geometry Type select list (codelist) defines options for the outlet port
geometry on diverter valves.
Painting Responsibility
The Painting Responsibility select list (codelist) defines the list of parties available for doing
painting work.
Part Class Types
The Part Class Types select list (codelist) defines the available part classes in the software.
When you define a part class in a reference data workbook, you type the name of a part class
type in the Definition section on each part class sheet.
Do not edit the text under Specific Part Class. However, you may edit the text under
Generic Part Class.
Part Data Basis
The Part Data Basis select list (codelist) specifies the values for the basis of the dimensional
data defined in piping commodity part data. The purpose of this property is to recognize those
For example, the symbols for linear fittings and valves are designed on the basis of a
face-to-face dimension. However, if the manufacturer provides the face-to-center dimension, the
symbol can be designed to react accordingly on the basis of this property.



Part Data Source
The Part Data Source select list (codelist) specifies the source of the part data in the piping
catalog. If a value has not been specified, the source of the data is assumed to be the piping
commodity class data. For example, you can specify that certain data, such as gasket type and
gasket material, reside in the gasket part data.
This property provides the means to recognize that a reportable piping commodity is not a
generic piping commodity, but might be a gasket, a bolt, or a cap screw. For example, a clamp
typically implies that a gasket is included as a reportable piping commodity.
Pipe Bend Radius By User Option
The Pipe Bend Radius By User Option select list (codelist) is used to specify whether piping
designers can override the pipe bend radius in the piping specification. Refer to the Default
Project Options topic in the Piping Reference Data Guide for more information on how this
select list is used.
Pipe Bend Radius Multiplier Option
The Pipe Bend Radius Multiplier select list (codelist) defines the options for determining the
absolute bend radius value. The absolute bend radius can be the product of the nominal piping
diameter and the pipe bend radius multiplier, or as the product of the outside diameter and the
pipe bend radius multiplier, or as a rule based on the nominal piping diameter and the pipe bend
radius multiplier.
Pipe Bend Type
The Pipe Bend Type select list (codelist) defines the different types of pipe bend configurations.
Pipe Bending Machine Type
The Pipe Bending Machine Type select list (codelist) specifies the different types of bending
machines.


Pipe Stock Usage
The Pipe Stock Usage select list (codelist) specifies the uses for pipe stock.
Piping Commodity Catalog Part Number Basis Option
The Piping Commodity Catalog Part Number Basis Option select list (codelist) defines the
options for defining a piping commodity catalog part number.
Piping Commodity Override Option
The Piping Commodity Override Option select list (codelist) defines the options for piping
commodity overrides in a piping material class.
Piping Commodity Procurement Data Option
The Piping Commodity Procurement Data Option select list (codelist) defines options for the
piping commodity procurement data. The data can be based on the contractor commodity code
or the industry commodity code.


Piping Commodity Type
The Piping Commodity Type select list (codelist) is used to create the hierarchy in the Catalog
task.
This select list is used in the Piping task and in the Catalog task for the piping parts hierarchy.
The list belongs to the REFDAT namespace.

You can change some of the textual values in this select list, but you must not change the
The following list documents the required usage of selected values of the Piping Component
Subclass property.
Piping Component Subclass Value and Purpose
Stub Ends Bolt Length Calculations - Used to determine whether lap thickness is to be
considered.
Lap Joint Flanges Bolt Length Calculations - Used to determine whether lap thickness is to
be considered.
Flared Pipe Rule - Used to determine whether the pipe stock is to be flared.
Unions Used to determine the extents of spool breaks.
Slip-on Flanges - Used to determine the applicability of the Slip-on Flange Setback Distance
Rule.
Reducing Slip-on Flanges - Used to determine the applicability of the Slip-on Flange
Setback Distance Rule.
Plate Flanges Plate Flange Setback Distance Rule - Used to determine the applicability of
this rule.
Reducing Plate Flanges Plate Flange Setback Distance Rule - Used to determine the
applicability of this rule.
Orifice Flanges - Automated flange selection.
Blind Flanges - Automated flange selection.
Reinforcing Pads - Verification of Branch Intersection rule.
Hose Accessories Verification of the piping commodity part data Used to determine
whether a value is required for Water Weight.
The value of 'Accessories' for the Piping Component Class property is also used in the
verification of the piping commodity part data to determine whether a value is required for Water
Weight.


Catalog Parts Hierarchy
This sheet defines the Piping > Parts hierarchy in the Catalog task. The Piping Commodity
Class Short Descriptions (column B) defines the first level of nodes under the Parts node. The
Piping Commodity Sub Class Short Description (column D) defines the next level in the
hierarchy. The Piping Commodity Type Short Description (column F) defines the final level
before the parts are listed.

Piping Point Usage
The Piping Point Usage select list (codelist) defines the piping point basis for objects in the
model.
Piping Spec Status
The Piping Spec Status select list (codelist) lists the different statuses for a piping materials
class. Refer to the Piping Materials Class Data topic in the Piping Reference Data Guide for
more information on how this select list is used.
Piping Spec Version Management Option
The Piping Spec Version Management Option select list (codelist) defines the options for the
versioning of piping specifications.



Piping Specification Notes Option
The Piping Specification Notes Option select list (codelist) defines the options that designate
whether piping specification notes display as the numeric value or as the textual value.
Plane Of Flip
The Plane Of Flip select list (codelist) specifies that the rotation axis is parallel to depth.
Plane of Turn
The Plane of Turn select list (codelist) defines the options for rotating HVAC turn components.
This select list is used in the HVAC task. The list belongs to the UDP namespace.
Plate Part Category
The Plate Part Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for plate parts in
the software.
This list populates the Naming Category box when you select Standalone in the Type
box on the Properties dialog box for plate parts.
Pressure Rating
The Pressure Rating select list (codelist) defines the available pressure rating for bolted joints.
The software ignores any alphabetic characters in the pressure rating when using the rating for
comparison. For example, CL300, 300#, and 300 are equivalent.
When the Bulkload utility finds pressure rating and schedule/thickness values in the
Piping reference data workbooks, the utility attempts to find the values in the Short Description
column first and in the Codelist Number column second.


practices that have child values. For example, only the parent Rating Practices with child values
(Pressure Ratings) display.
Profile Part Category
The Profile Part Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for profile parts
in the software.
This list populates the Naming Category box when you select Standalone in the Type
box on the Properties dialog box for stiffener profile parts.
ProfileEncasementType
The Struct Insulation Encasement select list (codelist) defines the insulation encasement
types.
This select list is used by the Structure task and belongs to the User Defined Package name
space.
change the meaning. Do not change the numeric values of the delivered select list items.
Custom (user added) select list numbers must be between 10,001 and 40,000.

Property Categories
Property Categories defines the categories for custom interfaces. This select list is used in the
reference data for multiple tasks. You can define custom interfaces and user attributes on the
Custom Interfaces sheets in the reference data workbooks.
To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in
the Catalog hierarchy and select PropertyCategories.
Property Categories
The Property Categories select list (codelist) defines the categories for custom interfaces.
This select list is used in multiple tasks: Compartmentation, Planning, and Structural
Manufacturing. The list belongs to the CORE namespace.

Intergraph product codes are in the range 1000-9999: 1000-7999 for SmartPlant software
and 8000-9999 for SmartMarine software.
User reference data codes start at 10,000.



Purchase Length Basis Option
The Purchase Length Basis Option select list (codelist) specifies the basis on which the
purchase length in piping specifications is determined. The purchase length option applies to all
piping materials classes within a piping specification.
The following options are available in this select list:
By user
The purchase length is based on the commodity option specified by the piping designer. In
other words, all pipe stock lengths for the applicable pipe run are based on the same
purchase length.
By system
All purchase length options provided by the specification writer are to be used. In other
words, multiple pipe stock lengths for the applicable pipe run are based on the purchase
lengths of all commodity options specified for the pipe stock in the piping commodity filter.

Rear End Type
The Rear End Type select list (codelist) specifies the rear end types available for heat
exchangers with variable head options.
This select list is used in the Equipment and Furnishings task. The list belongs to the REFDAT
namespace.
Reference Plane View Directions
The Reference Plane View Directions select list (codelist) specifies reference plane view
directions.



Reporting Requirement Basis
The Reporting Requirement Basis select list (codelist) defines the basis for reporting
requirements: piping specification, rule, or piping designer.
Reporting Type
The Reporting Type select list (codelist) defines the available reporting types and
requirements.
Requisition Responsibility
The Requisition Responsibility select list (codelist) defines the list of parties available for
doing requisition work.
Requisition Type
The Requisition Type select list (codelist) defines the list of requisition types.
In piping projects, the requisition type value represents the basis for requisitioning the piping
specialty as either custom- engineered or stock. Stock piping specialties represent those piping
specialties, including steam traps, strainers, and some types of filters, that are purchased from a
manufacturer's catalog, where no real engineering is required other than selecting the correct
size, material, and so forth.



Respect Assembly Boundaries
The Respect Assembly Boundaries select list (codelist) is a Boolean (Yes/No) list that
specifies whether or not the boundaries of assembly parents must be honored during WBS item
creation. For example, if a pipe part belongs to a spool, all of the parts of the spool must be
included in the same WBS item if this Boolean is True.
Revision History Notes Option
The Revision History Notes Option select list (codelist) defines the options for whether
revision history notes are created, when revising data in piping specifications, piping catalog, or
insulation specifications.
Ring Number
The Ring Number select list (codelist) defines the list of ring numbers for ring joint gaskets.
Refer to the Gasket Part Data topic in the Piping Reference Data Guide for more information on
how this select list is used.
Ring Profile Category
The Ring Profile Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for ring profiles
in the software.



Rotation Offset Type
The RotationOffsetType select list (codelist) defines the offset used when rotating a grid plane
from an elevation plane (Z).
This select list is used in the Grids task. The list belongs to the GRDSYS namespace.

Route Direction
The Route Direction select list (codelist) defines the available directions for routing in a zone.
The auto-routing functionality routes pipe through zones based on the property value that is
defined for that zone.
This select list is used in the Space Management task. The list belongs to the REFDAT
namespace.
Route Layout
The Route Layout select list (codelist) defines options for the routing applications.
This select list is used in the Space Management task. The list belongs to the CMNSCH
namespace.
Route on Face
The Route on Face select list (codelist) defines options for routing from the faces of objects in
the model.
This select list is used in the Space Management task. The list belongs to the CMNSCH
namespace.



Rule Class Type
Rule Class Type defines the types of rule classes available in the software. This select list is
used in the reference data for multiple tasks.
Catalog hierarchy and select RuleClassType.
Rule Type
Rule Type defines the available types of rules in the software. This select list is used in the
reference data for multiple tasks.
Catalog hierarchy and select Rule Type.
Schedule Thickness
The Schedule Thickness select list (codelist) defines the thickness schedules available for use
in the model.
When the Bulkload utility finds pressure rating and schedule/thickness values in the
Piping reference data workbooks, the utility attempts to find the values in the Short Description
column first and in the Codelist Number column second.
practices that have child values. For example, only the parent Schedule Thickness Practices
with child values (Schedule Thicknesses) display.



Selection Basis
The Selection Basis select list (codelist) defines the values that indicate whether the piping
commodity is available for manual selection by the piping designer or for selection only as a
result of a rule.
The following examples show how this select list is used:
For flanges, this select list provides an indication of whether the automated flange selection
logic is applied. The value should be enabled for the default flange connected to fitting short
code and the default flange connected to plain piping short code. Otherwise, the value
should be disabled such that the flange selected by the piping designer overrides the default
flange, as selected by the software. In other words, this select list provides the means for the
piping designer to optionally (at the discretion of the specification writer) be able to select a
flange that is not subject to the automated selection logic for flanges.
For reinforcing pads, this select list provides an indication of whether the reinforcing pad
thickness and the reinforcing pad width are to be specified by the software (system) or by
the user.
For reinforcing welds, this select list provides an indication of whether the reinforcing weld
size is to be specified by the software (system) or by the user.
For pipe bends, this select list provides an indication that the bend radius is determined from
the piping commodity filter, and that the corresponding specification and catalog data are not
required. The commodity code for the pipe bend is expected to be the commodity code of
the plain piping from which the pipe bend is fabricated.
For mitered elbows, this select list provides an indication that the number of miter cuts is
determined from the piping commodity filter, and that the corresponding specification and
catalog data are not required. The commodity code for the pipe bend is expected to be the
commodity code of the plain piping from which the mitered elbow is fabricated.
Reinforcing Pads
Reinforcing pads are treated as piping commodities, where the commodity code is included in
the piping specification. Reinforcing pads appear in the bill of material on the isometric drawing.
Some users include the reinforcing pad thickness and width on the isometric drawing, while
other users do not show this data in the material description on the isometric drawing. In the
latter case, the reinforcing pad thickness and width are based on a standard that is included with
the paper piping specification and, while the data from the standard is accurate, the reinforcing
pad thickness and width are determined from the chart for fabrication, and not from the material
description on the isometric drawing.
If the reinforcing pad is placed by the system, its reinforcing pad width and reinforcing pad
thickness are computed. Any reinforcing pad that is placed as a result of the Branch Intersection
rule should be considered as placed by the system. However, if the reinforcing pad is placed by
the user, the piping designer must specify the pad width and thickness. If branch reinforcement
calculations have been enabled for the piping specification, the reinforcing pad width and the
reinforcing pad thickness, after subtracting the applicable mill tolerance as specified by the
piping designer at placement time, must be verified to represent adequate reinforcement by
means of the branch reinforcement calculations. This verification must consider the minimum
fillet weld size between the header and the pad, and the minimum fillet weld size between the
branch and the pad.
The acceptability of the reinforcing pad should be re-verified in any situation where the
reinforcing pad is re-computed on the basis of any reference data changes or changes to


engineering data in the model that affect the selection of the reference data for that reinforcing
pad.
Reinforcing Welds
A reinforcing weld, which can be either a stub-on type or a stub-in type welded to the header
pipe, is not a piping commodity that can be purchased. Typically, a reinforcing weld does not
include a commodity code in the piping specification. Likewise, a reinforcing weld is typically not
included in the bill-of-materials with the isometric drawing. A reinforcing weld should
automatically be placed as a non- material take-off item, if enabled by a project-wide option.
If the reinforcing weld is placed by the system, its reinforcing weld size is computed. Any
reinforcing weld that is placed as a result of the Branch Intersection rule should be considered
as placed by the system. However, if the reinforcing weld is placed by the user, the piping
designer must specify the weld size. If branch reinforcement calculations have been enabled for
the piping specification, the reinforcing weld size, as specified by the piping designer at
placement time, must be verified to represent adequate reinforcement by means of the branch
reinforcement calculations.
Shell Category
The Shell Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for shells in the
software.
Ship Design Loading Condition Type
Ship Design Loading Condition Type specifies the loading condition types for compartments.
This codelist is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list
Catalog hierarchy and select ShipDesignLoadingConditionType.



Short Code Hierarchy
The Short Code Hierarchy select list (codelist) defines the applicable short codes for each
class. The specification writer can designate which short codes are exposed to the piping
designer under which configurations. Refer to the Short Code Hierarchy Rule topic in the Piping
This select list is used in the Piping task by the routing solver. The list belongs to the REFDAT
namespace.

Number Description Route Feature When to use
5 Valves Along Leg Feature For valves
10 Flanges Along Leg Feature For flanges
15 Concentric Size
Change Fittings
Intermediate End
Feature Pair
For reducers, reducing flanges,
and so forth.
20 Eccentric Size
Change Fittings
Intermediate End
Feature Pair
For eccentric reducers
25 Closing Fittings End Feature Components with only one port
that are meant to close the run.
30 Elbolets Intermediate End
Feature
For elbolets. Currently, Elbolets
are modeled as single size along
leg features. In the future, this
could change to a branch-feature
to represent the true two-size
nature.
35 Other Inline Fittings Along Leg Feature All other inline fittings including
those that have offset. Examples
include 2-port steam traps with
offset, bosses, orifice plates, and
so forth. This can also include
3-port components that are not
rule driven branches such as
3-way valves.
40 Elbows Turn Feature Elbows, angle-valves, and so
forth.
45 Pipe Bends Turn Feature Pipe bends
50 Miters Turn Feature Miters
55 Tee Type Branches Along Leg
Feature-Branch Parent
Branch components that are
inserted on the header run and
that are rule-driven (short-code
appears in branch rule).


Number Description Route Feature When to use
60 Olet Type Branches Branch Feature Olet type branches that penetrate
the header without splitting
it. Examples include olets,
bosses, r-pads.
65 Lateral Type
Branches
Along Leg
Feature-Branch Parent
Branch components that are
inserted on the header run and
that are rule-driven (short-code
appears in branch rule)
70 Lateralolet Type
Branches
Branch Feature Same as olet type branches
except the angle need not be 90.
75 Cross Branches Along Leg Feature Cross branches
80 Other Branches Along Leg Feature
85 Miscellaneous Along Leg Feature-End
Leg
Components with more than three
ports where it is required that
routing be possible from the
ports. Also, components with
three-ports where primary ports
are not inline and/or the third port
is not in the same plane as the
primary ports. Essentially, this
option is a catch-all for
components that do not fall into
other categories.
90 Returns AlongLeg Feature-End
Leg
For 180 returns
95 Pipes Straight Feature and/or
Turn Feature based on
topology
For pipes
100 Tubes Straight Feature and/or
topology
For tubes
105 Hoses Straight Feature and/or
topology
For hoses



If you are not sure which select list number to use for your non-standard component, refer to the
following table:
For a component having The Short Code Hierarchy type in the
specification rule should be...
Resulting Route
Feature Type
One port Inline Fittings/Closing Fittings End feature
Two ports with a change in
direction
Change Of Direction Fittings Turn feature
Two inline ports having
different NPD (with and
without offset)
Inline Fittings/Concentric Size Change
Fittings
Inline Fittings/Eccentric Size Change
Fittings
Intermediate end
feature.
Two inline ports with same
NPD (with and without offset)
Inline Fittings/Valves
Inline Fittings/Flanges
Inline Fittings/Other Inline Fittings
Along-leg feature.
Component having three
ports with two inline ports
and one offline port and all
ports intersect at symbol
origin.
Branches/Tee Type Branches Along-leg branch
parent feature.
Component having three or
more ports with at least two
inline ports. If a three-port
component, then all ports do
not intersect at symbol origin.
Inline Fittings/Other Inline Fittings
Branches/Other Branches
Along-leg feature.
Component having more
than two ports with only one
inline port
Miscellaneous Fittings/Miscellaneous End feature.
Components having four
ports where two are inline
and all ports intersect at
symbol origin
Branches/Cross Branches Along-leg feature.
Signal Type
The Signal Type select list (codelist) specifies the applicable values for the cable usage
property, which is used for tray fill calculations.



Size Reduction Preference
The Size Reduction Preference select list (codelist) defines the size reductions in the model.
For example, a reduction from 24 in. to 6 in. would require two reducers: a 24 in. x 12 in. reducer
and a 12 in. x 6 in. reducer.
Size Reduction Type
The Size Reduction Type select list (codelist) specifies the types of size reductions (either
concentric or eccentric) available for use in the model.
Slab Boundary Reference
The Slab Boundary Reference select list (codelist) specifies slab boundary references for
members in the model. Refer to the Slab General Type topic in the Structure Reference Data
Guide for more information on how this select list is used.
Slab Composition
The Slab Composition select list (codelist) specifies the options for composition of slabs.
Slab Continuity
The Slab Continuity select list (codelist) specifies the continuity types for slabs in the model.
Refer to the Structure Reference Data Guide for more information on how this select list is used
when defining layers and slabs.



Slab Corner Type
The Slab Corner Type select list (codelist) defines the corner types for slabs in the model.
This select list is used in the reference data for the Structure task, when extending the possible
value and behavior of the slab assembly connections. The list belongs to the REFDAT
namespace.
You should not change the pre-existing numeric values in this select list. You can add
new values, but you must customize a delivered Visual Basic program in the software.
Slab Cross Section Symbol
The Slab Cross Section Symbol select list (codelist) defines the cross section symbols for
slabs in the model.
Slab Direction Reference
The Slab Direction Reference select list (codelist) defines the directions for slabs in the model.
Refer to the Slab General Type topic in the Structure Reference Data Guide for more
Slab Face Position
The Slab Face Position select list (codelist) defines the face positions on slabs in the model.
information on how this select list is used. The face position of a slab affects the location of the
supports placed in the Hangers and Supports task.



Slab Fastener Type
The Slab Fastener Type select list (codelist) specifies the fastener types for slabs in the model.
Slab Layer Role
The Slab Layer Role select list (codelist) specifies the layer roles for slabs in the model.
Slab Manufacturing Process
The Slab Manufacturing Process select list (codelist) specifies the manufacturing processes
for slabs in the model.
Slab Nosing Material
The Slab Nosing Material select list (codelist) specifies the nosing materials for slabs in the
model.
Slab Nosing Type
The Slab Nosing Type select list (codelist) specifies the nosing types for slabs in the model.
Slab Priority
The Slab Priority select list (codelist) specifies the priorities for slabs in the model. Refer to the
Slab General Type topic in the Structure Reference Data Guide for more information on how this
select list is used.


Slab Reference Direction
The Slab Reference Direction select list (codelist) specifies the reference directions for slabs in
the model.
This select list is used in the Structure task when extending the possible value and behavior of
slab assembly connections. The list belongs to the REFDAT namespace.
SmartMarine 3D Data Integrity Msgs
SmartMarine 3D Data Integrity Msgs defines the database integrity messages for Ship
Structure and Structural Detailing in the software.
Catalog hierarchy and select SmartMarine 3DDataIntegrityMsgs.
SmartMarine 3D Msgs
SmartMarine 3D Msgs defines the messages for the To Do List in the software.
Catalog hierarchy and select SmartMarine 3DMsgs.
Space Access Type
Space Access Type specifies the types of access for space objects. This select list (codelist) is
used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP
namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select SpaceAccessType.
Space Adjacency Contact Type
Space Adjacency Contact Type specifies the adjacency contact types for space objects. This
Catalog hierarchy and select SpaceAdjacencyContactType.
Space Adjacency Geometry Type
Space Adjacency Geometry Type the adjacency geometry types for space objects. This select
Catalog hierarchy and select SpaceAdjacencyGeometryType.



Space Arrangement Orientation
Space Arrangement Orientation specifies arrangement options for space objects. This select
Catalog hierarchy and select SpaceArrangementOrientation.
Space Arrangement Type
Space Arrangement Type specifies the types of arrangements for space objects. This select
Catalog hierarchy and select SpaceArrangementType.
Space Item Purpose
Space Item Purpose specifies lists the item purposes for space objects. This select list
the UDP namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select SpaceItemPurpose.
Space Physical Orientation Type
Space Physical Orientation Type specifies the types of physical orientation for space objects.
Catalog hierarchy and select SpacePhysicalOrientationType.



Space Positional Relationship Type
Space Positional Relationship Type specifies the types of positional relationships for space
objects. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task.
This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select SpacePositionalRelationshipType.
Space Product Structure Type
Space Product Structure Type specifies the type of structure for space objects. This select list
the UDP namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select SpaceProductStructureType.
Spectacle Position
The Spectacle Position select list (codelist) specifies the available positions for spectacle
blinds in the model.
This select list is used in the Piping task. The list belongs to the UDP namespace.
Spool Break by Control Point
The Spool Break by Control Point select list (codelist) specifies the different methods of
spooling at control points.
Spool Include Welded Parts
The Spool Include Welded Parts select list (codelist) defines the available options for spooling.
In the past, the spooling command only added the portion of a pipe support that was actually
connected to the pipe via a weld. The Route Spooling Command adds a third option that allows
not only the welded parts, but the entire support to be included as a child of the spool object.
This behavior is optional and can be set by modifying the Include Items Welded to Pipe in
Spools attribute on the Options tab in the Spool Generation dialog box.
When using the All Shop Parts option, only support components that have a Fabrication
Requirement of "By fabricator", a Fabrication Type of "Shop fabricated" and a Fabrication
Responsibility of "By Piping" will be included in the spool.



Spool Sequence Type
The Spool Sequence Type select list (codelist) specifies the different ways of sequencing
spools.
Spooling Basis
The Spooling Basis select list (codelist) specifies the types of spooling, either by pipeline or
block. Plant design users typically spool by pipeline, and ship design users typically spool by
block. You can also spool by WBS (Work Breakdown Structure) Item. This functionality allows
WBS Items to be used to group pipe parts. The collections of pipe parts are used during the
creation of isometric drawings.
Steamout Requirement
The Steamout Requirement select list (codelist) specifies the steamout requirements for use in
the model.
Stress Relief
The Stress Relief select list (codelist) specifies the values representing the industry practices
for stress relief. Refer to the Piping Materials Class Data topic in the Piping Reference Data
Guide for more information on how this select list is used.
Stress Relief Requirement
The Stress Relief Requirement select list (codelist) lists options for whether stress relief is
required.



Struct 2L Back to Back Rule
The Struct 2L Back to Back Rule select list (codelist) specifies the back-to-back rules for 2L
members in the model.
Struct AC Left Right Both
The Struct AC Left Right Both select list (codelist) specifies the available axis connections in
the model.
Struct AC Pad Type
The Struct AC Pad Type select list (codelist) specifies the pad types for assembly connections
in the model.
Struct AC Sizing Rule
The Struct AC Sizing Rule select list (codelist) specifies the sizing rules for axis connections in
the model.
Struct AC Splice Types
The Struct AC Splice Types select list (codelist) specifies the available splice types for
assembly connections in the model.
Struct AC To Do Messages
The Struct AC To Do Messages select list (codelist) specifies the To Do List messages for
assembly connections in the model.
Struct Alignment
The Struct Alignment select list (codelist) specifies the alignment options for members in the
model.



Struct Boundary Conditions
The Struct Boundary Conditions select list (codelist) specifies the boundary conditions for
structural analysis.
This select list is used in the Structural Analysis task. The list belongs to the CMNSCH
namespace.
Valid member end releases numbers are between 0 and 64. In the workbook, you can
comment out those you do not want to appear in the software. You can name and uncomment
those you want to appear in the software.
Struct Can Diameter Rule
The StructCanDiameterRule select list (codelist) defines the diameter of the cans used in
trusses and onshore facilities.
Struct Can Length Compute Method
The StructCanLengthComputeMethod select list (codelist) determines the hull factor and
length, and the centerline factor and length.

Struct Can Type
The StructCanType select list (codelist) defines the can type: inline, stub end, or end.

Struct Cone Length Compute Method
The StructConeLengthComputeMethod select list (codelist) defines the slope, angle, and
length of the can.

Struct Compute Rule
The Struct Compute Rule select list (codelist) determines whether the designed member
section properties is computed by system or by user.



Struct Continuity
The Struct Continuity select list (codelist) specifies the continuity options for members in the
model.
Struct Coord Sys Reference
The Struct Coord Sys Reference select list (codelist) specifies the coordinate systems used for
structural operations in the model.
Struct Custom Plate Part Type
The Struct Custom Plate Part Type select list (codelist) specifies the plate types available in
the model.
Struct End Releases
The Struct End Releases select list (codelist) specifies the end release options for members in
the model.
Valid member end releases numbers are between 1 and 63. In the workbook, you can
comment out those you do not want to appear in the software. You can name and uncomment
those you want to appear in the software.
Struct Eqp To Do Messages
The Struct Eqp To Do Messages select list (codelist) specifies the To Do List messages for
equipment foundations in the model.
Struct FC Chevron WPO
The Struct FC Chevron WPO select list (codelist) specifies the work point offsets for frame
connection chevrons in the model.


Struct FC End Controlling
The Struct FC End Controlling select list (codelist) specifies the end controlling values for
frame connections.
Struct FC Offset Along
The Struct FC Offset Along select list (codelist) lists the offset along references for frame
connections in the model.
Struct FC Offset Direction
The Struct FC Offset Direction select list (codelist) specifies the offset directions for frame
Struct FC Supported Edge
The Struct FC Supported Edge select list (codelist) specifies the supported edges for frame
Struct FC Supporting CPs
The Struct FC Supporting CPs select list (codelist) specifies the supporting cardinal points for
frame connections in the model.
Struct FC Supporting Side
The Struct FC Supporting Side select list (codelist) specifies the supporting sides for frame



Struct FC To Do Messages
The Struct FC To Do Messages select list (codelist) specifies the To Do List messages for
frame connections in the model.
Struct Feature Radius Type
The Struct Feature Radius Type select list (codelist) specifies the radius types for structure
features.
Struct Feature To Do Messages
The Struct Feature To Do Messages select list (codelist) specifies the To Do List messages for
structural features in the model.
Struct Footing Comp Sizing Rule
The Struct Footing Comp Sizing Rule select list (codelist) specifies the composite sizing rules
for footings in the model.
Struct Footing To Do Messages
The Struct Footing To Do Messages select list (codelist) specifies the To Do List messages
for structural footings in the model.
Struct Frm Conn Position Ref
The Struct Frm Conn Position Ref select list (codelist) specifies the frame connection
positions for members in the model.


Struct Insulation Purpose
The Struct Insulation Purpose select list (codelist) defines the different purposes for the
insulation.
This select list is used by the Structure task and belongs to the REFDAT name space.

Struct Member End Selection Rule
The Struct Member End Selection Rule select list (codelist) specifies the end selection rules
for members in the model. The rules determine from which end of the supporting member the
software makes its measurements.
Struct Member Position Rule
The Struct Member Position Rule select list (codelist) specifies the position rules for members
in the model. The rules determine the position of the end of the supported member along the
supporting member.
Struct Plate Part To Do Messages
The Struct Plate Part To Do Messages select list (codelist) specifies the To Do List messages
for plate parts in the model.
Struct Prismatic Footing Shapes
The Struct Prismatic Footing Shapes select list (codelist) specifies the shapes for prismatic
footings in the model.
Struct SC To Do Messages
The Struct SC To Do Messages select list (codelist) specifies the To Do List messages for split



Struct Wall Boundary Size
The Struct Wall Boundary Size select list (codelist) specifies Finite or Infinite boundary size
for wall structure features. This select list is used in the Structure task. The list belongs to the
UDP namespace.


Struct Wall Boundary Type
The Struct Wall Boundary Type select list (codelist) specifies Above, Below, Start/End and
Contact boundaries for wall structure features. This select list is used in the Structure task. The

Struct Wall Connection Type
The Struct Wall Connection Type select list (codelist) specifies available connections
(Undefined, Aligned, Along and Corner) for wall structure features. This select list is used in
the Structure task. The list belongs to the UDP namespace.

Struct Wall Reference Attribute
The Struct Wall Reference Attribute select list (codelist) specifies Center, Far or Near
reference points or attributes for wall structure features. This select list is used in the Structure
task. The list belongs to the UDP namespace.
StructInsulationSetbackReference
The Struct Insulation Setback Reference select list (codelist) defines the different starting
points from which fireproofing setbacks are measured. Insulation is frequently placed so that the
member is exposed at the ends to permit connections to be placed. This requires the insulation
to be trimmed from the end, or setback. The codelist values allow you to choose which geometry
of the memberPart to use as the datum for the setback distance. All four choices are available
for both ends. An example would be for a column where both references can be set to the
bottom of the column axis. For a beam, the start reference is set to the beam part start and the
end reference will use the part end.
change the meaning. Do not change the numeric values of the delivered select list items.
Custom (user added) select list numbers must be between 10,001 and 40,000.



Structural Load Case Source
The Structural Load Case Source select list (codelist) specifies the different sources of load in
the model.
Structural Member Priority
The Structural Member Priority select list (codelist) specifies the priorities for members in the
model.
Structural Member Type
The Structural Member Type select list (codelist) specifies the types for members in the model.
Structural WPO Intersection Index
The Structural WPO Intersection Index select list (codelist) specifies the available work point
offset (WPO) intersections.
Supplementary Nut Requirement
The Supplementary Nut Requirement select list (codelist) defines the options that indicate
whether a second, supplementary nut is required for each machine bolt or each end of each
stud bolt.



Supplementary Washer Requirement
The Supplementary Washer Requirement select list (codelist) defines the options that indicate
whether a second, supplementary washer is required for each machine bolt or each end of each
stud bolt.
Supply Responsibility
The Supply Responsibility select list (codelist) specifies the parties available for supplying
materials.
Surface Preparation
The Surface Preparation select list (codelist) specifies the different surface preparations for
piping commodities.
Tap End Stud Bolt Length Round Off Option
The Tap End Stud Bolt Length Round Off Option select list (codelist) provides either a
user-defined list or a list of preferred tap end stud bolt lengths. This select list is used in the
Piping task. The list belongs to the REFDATA namespace.

Testing Responsibility
The Testing Responsibility select list (codelist) specifies the parties that are responsible for
testing.
Testing Type
The Testing Type select list (codelist) specifies the available testing requirements and types.



Tightness
The Tightness select list (codelist) specifies the types of tightness for objects in the model.
Transverse Beam Category
The Transverse Beam Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for
transverse beams in the software.
Transverse Bulkhead Category
The Transverse Bulkhead Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for
bulkheads in the software.
Transverse Profile Category
The Transverse Profile Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for
transverse profiles in the software.
Transverse Seam Category
The Transverse Seam Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for
transverse seams in the software.
Transverse Tube Category
The Transverse Tube Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for
transverse tubes in the software.
Tray Specification Type
The Tray Specification Type select list (codelist) specifies that the numeric value for any new
code list entry added by the user should be greater than 10,000.



Type
The Type select list (codelist) specifies the types of foundation ports in the model.
Undefined Service Limits Rule Option
The Undefined Service Limits Rule Option select list (codelist) specifies the options for
temperature/pressure service limits.
Utility BOM Units
The Utility BOM Units select list (codelist) is used by the Utility_Generic_C part to set the units
(Imperial or Metric) used in the Bill of Materials report for a part. The list belongs to the UDP
namespace.


Utility Brace Orient
The Utility Brace Orient select list (codelist) determines which axis a brace port should be
rotated about. This codelist works with the Angle property of the Utility_GenericBrace
Part. For example, in the figure below, the Angle attribute is set to 30 degrees, and the Brace
Orientation attribute is set to Rotate about Y, the y-port axis is the blue axis.

The list belongs to the UDP namespace.

Utility_Holes
Utility_Holes lists the options for the number of holes. This select list (codelist) is used in the
namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select Utility_Holes.

Utility_Nuts
Utility_Nuts lists the options for the number of nuts. This select list (codelist) is used in the
namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select Utility_Nuts.


Utility_PlateThickness
Utility_PlateThickness lists the options for the thickness of plates. This select list (codelist) is
used in the reference data for the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the
UDP namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select Utility_PlateThickness.
Utility_Tabs
Utility_Tabs lists the options for the number of tabs. This select list (codelist) is used in the
namespace.
Catalog hierarchy and select Utility_Tabs.
Utility_YesNo
Utility_YesNo lists the options for whether or not to designate the part for the bill of
materials. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Hangers and Supports
Catalog hierarchy and select Utility_YesNo.

Valve Flow Pattern
The Valve Flow Pattern select list (codelist) provides the options of the flow pattern for a valve,
which can include T, Y, 2-way, 3-way and 5-way patterns, to name a few. The select list is used
in the reference data for the piping task.
This select list belongs to the REFDAT namespace.

Valve Model Number
The Valve Model Number select list (codelist) specifies the manufacturers and model numbers
for valves.



Valve Operator Geometric Industry Standard
The Valve Operator Geometric Industry Standard select list (codelist) specifies the industry
standards for valve operators.
Valve Operator Is Rotatable
The Valve Operator Is Rotatable select list (codelist) specifies the rotating options available for
valve operators.
Valve Operator Part Data Basis
The Valve Operator Part Data Basis select list (codelist). The select list is used in the
reference data for the piping task.
This select list belongs to the REFDAT namespace.

Valve Operator Type
The Valve Operator Type select list (codelist) specifies the valve operators available for use in
the model.
Valve Port Option
The Valve Port Option select list (codelist) specifies the valve port types, such as a
conventional port, a regular port or a reduced port, available for use in the model.


Valve Trim
The Valve Trim select list (codelist) specifies the standards for valve trim, which includes valve
working parts and materials.
Vendor
The Vendor select list (codelist) specifies the vendors that supply piping commodities. Typically,
values for the vendor property are imported from a material control system, if required.
The meaning of vendor differs from the meaning of manufacturer in this usage. A vendor
supplies the commodities, while a manufacturer produces the commodities.
Vertical Beam Category
The Vertical Beam Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for vertical
beams in the software.
Vertical Profile Category
The Vertical Profile Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for vertical
profiles in the software.
Vertical Seam Category
The Vertical Seam Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for vertical
seams in the software.
Vertical Tube Category
The Vertical Tube Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for vertical
tubes in the software.



Vessel Head Type
The Vessel Head Type select list (codelist) specifies the various head types for horizontal and
vertical tanks.
This select list is used in the Equipment and Furnishings task. The list belongs to the REFDAT
namespace.
Voltage Grade
The Voltage Grade select list (codelist) specifies the grades for cable voltages. Voltage grade
can be seen as an electrical service level. The different grades can be assigned to cable runs
and cableway and cable tray runs and can be used for fill calculations, naming rules, or labeling.
Washer Creation Option
The Washer Creation Option select list (codelist) defines the option of whether washers are
created at a bolted joint. The specification writer can disable this option when washers are not
tracked for material management purposes.
Even if this option is disabled, the specification writer can still use the washer thickness for the
bolt length calculation if the washer selection filter and accompanying washer part data are
defined in the catalog.
In other words, the washer selection filter, and the accompanying washer part data, may be
used for bolt length calculations, even when this option has been disabled. In this situation, the
washer thickness, as well as the bolt extension, will be included in the bolt length calculation,
although the bolt extension will be expected to not consider the washer thickness.
Washer Option
The Washer Option select list (codelist) specifies the types of washers available in the model.
A default washer option represents the washer that should be used when the piping designer
has not explicitly selected one. The washer option, if applicable, is selected by the piping
designer at a bolted joint.
Washer Type
The Washer Type select list (codelist) specifies the types of washers that are available.



WBS Assignment
The WBS Assignment select list (codelist) defines the different ways to assign items during
automated WBS creation - by system or by assembly.
WBS Auto Grouping Rule Type
The WBS Auto Grouping Rule Type select list (codelist) defines the different ways to group
items during automated WBS creation.
WBS Item Purpose
The WBS Item Purpose select list (codelist) specifies the different purposes for items in the
work breakdown structure (WBS).

User reference data codes start at 10,000.
WBS Project Purpose
The WBS Project Purpose select list (codelist) specifies the project purposes for the work
breakdown structure (WBS).

Intergraph system codes are in the range 1-999.


WBS Pull In Associated Items
The WBS Pull In Associated Items select list (codelist) specifies whether or not the software
includes associated items during WBS item creation.
Weld Type
The Weld Type select list (codelist) specifies the available weld types for welded joints in the
model. Refer to the Weld Model Representation Rule, Weld Type Rule, and the Weld Clearance
Rule topics in the Piping Reference Data Guide for more information on how this select list is
used.
Welding Procedure Specification
The Welding Procedure Specification select list (codelist) defines the standards for weld sizes
in different countries.


Welding Requirement
The Welding Requirement select list (codelist) defines the welding requirements for welds on
piping commodities, if welded ends apply.
The following options are available:
Each welded end requires a reportable weld. This value is the default for any piping
commodity with one or more welded ends.
The face of the flange requires an additional weld. This situation can occur for a slip-on
flange.
The face of the flange can have an optional, additional weld. This situation can occur for a
plate flange, where the additional weld is based on the plate flange thickness.
Each welded end requires a reportable weld. However, the weld at the second piping point
is determined on the basis of the Weld Type Exception option rather than the Weld Type
Rule. This situation occurs for fittings (for example, sleeves), where the weld type always
differs between the two ends of the fitting.
None of the ends requires welding. This value is the default for any piping commodity
without any welded ends.


A P P E N D I X B
The software provides a standard set of unit types and units for reference data. The unit
information is stored in the Core component.
You can specify unit types and units for each user-defined attribute on the Custom Interfaces
sheet in the reference data workbooks. Unit types are categories of measurement, and units are
the specific quantities of measurement. For example, distance is a unit type, and meters (m) is a
unit for the distance unit type.
Unit information can be grouped into the following categories:
Unit Type Definitions to Names
Unit Type Names to Definitions
Unit Abbreviations to Names
Unit Names to Abbreviations
Unit Type Definitions to Names
Unit Type Definition Unit Type Name
distance UNIT_DISTANCE
angle UNIT_ANGLE
mass UNIT_MASS
time UNIT_TIME
temperature UNIT_TEMPERATURE
electric current UNIT_ELECTRIC_CURRENT
luminous intensity UNIT_LUMINOUS_INTENSITY
amount of substance UNIT_AMOUNT_OF_SUBSTANCE
solid angle UNIT_SOLID_ANGLE
angular acceleration UNIT_ANGULAR_ACCELERATION
angular momentum UNIT_ANGULAR_MOMENTUM
angular velocity UNIT_ANGULAR_VELOCITY
area UNIT_AREA
body force UNIT_BODY_FORCE
coefficient of thermal expansion UNIT_COEFFICIENT_OF_THERMAL_EXPANSIO
N
density UNIT_DENSITY
electrical capacitance UNIT_ELECTRICAL_CAPACITANCE
electrical conductance UNIT_ELECTRICAL_CONDUCTANCE
electrical field strength UNIT_ELECTRICAL_FIELD_STRENGTH
Appendix: Units of Measure


electrical inductance UNIT_ELECTRICAL_INDUCTANCE
electrical potential difference UNIT_ELECTRICAL_POTENTIAL
electrical resistance UNIT_ELECTRICAL_RESISTANCE
energy UNIT_ENERGY
entropy UNIT_ENTHROPY
film coefficient UNIT_FILM_COEFFICIENT
force UNIT_FORCE
force per area UNIT_FORCE_PER_AREA
force per distance UNIT_FORCE_PER_DISTANCE
frequency UNIT_FREQUENCY
heat capacity UNIT_HEAT_CAPACITY
heat flux per area UNIT_HEAT_FLUX_PER_AREA
heat flux per distance UNIT_HEAT_FLUX_PER_DISTANCE
heat source UNIT_HEAT_SOURCE
illuminance UNIT_ILLUMINANCE
linear acceleration UNIT_LINEAR_ACCELERATION
linear per angular UNIT_LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR
linear velocity UNIT_LINEAR_VELOCITY
luminous flux UNIT_LUMINOUS_FLUX
magnetic field strength UNIT_MAGNETIC_FIELD_STRENGTH
magnetic flux UNIT_MAGNETIC_FLUX
magnetic flux density UNIT_MAGNETIC_FLUX_DENSITY
mass flow rate UNIT_MASS_FLOW_RATE
mass moment of inertia UNIT_MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA
mass per area UNIT_MASS_PER_AREA
mass per length UNIT_MASS_PER_LENGTH
momentum UNIT_MOMENTUM
per distance UNIT_PER_DISTANCE
power UNIT_POWER
electric charge UNIT_ELECTRIC_CHARGE
radiant intensity UNIT_RADIANT_INTENSITY
rotational stiffness UNIT_ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS
second moment of area UNIT_SECOND_MOMENT_OF_AREA
thermal conductivity UNIT_THERMAL_CONDUCTIVITY


dynamic viscosity UNIT_DYNAMIC_VISCOSITY
kinematic viscosity UNIT_KINEMATIC_VISCOSITY
volume UNIT_VOLUME
volume flow rate UNIT_VOLUME_FLOW_RATE
scalar UNIT_SCALAR
force per area per length UNIT_FORCE_PER_AREA_PER_LENGTH
moment UNIT_MOMENT
first moment of area UNIT_FIRST_MOMENT_OF_AREA
torsional warping constant UNIT_TORSIONAL_WARPING_CONSTANT
slope UNIT_SLOPE
enumerator UNIT_ENUM
NPD UNIT_NPD
moment per distance UNIT_MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE
wire gauge UNIT_WIRE_GAUGE
Unit Type Names to Definitions
Unit Type Name Unit Type Definition
UNIT_DISTANCE distance
UNIT_ANGLE angle
UNIT_MASS mass
UNIT_TIME time
UNIT_TEMPERATURE temperature
UNIT_ELECTRIC_CURRENT electric current
UNIT_LUMINOUS_INTENSITY luminous intensity
UNIT_AMOUNT_OF_SUBSTANCE amount of substance
UNIT_SOLID_ANGLE solid angle
UNIT_ANGULAR_ACCELERATION angular acceleration
UNIT_ANGULAR_MOMENTUM angular momentum
UNIT_ANGULAR_VELOCITY angular velocity
UNIT_AREA area
UNIT_BODY_FORCE body force
UNIT_COEFFICIENT_OF_THERMAL_EXPAN
SION
coefficient of thermal expansion
UNIT_DENSITY density


UNIT_ELECTRICAL_CAPACITANCE electrical capacitance
UNIT_ELECTRICAL_CONDUCTANCE electrical conductance
UNIT_ELECTRICAL_FIELD_STRENGTH electrical field strength
UNIT_ELECTRICAL_INDUCTANCE electrical inductance
UNIT_ELECTRICAL_POTENTIAL electrical potential difference
UNIT_ELECTRICAL_RESISTANCE electrical resistance
UNIT_ENERGY energy
UNIT_ENTHROPY entropy
UNIT_FILM_COEFFICIENT film coefficient
UNIT_FORCE force
UNIT_FORCE_PER_AREA force per area
UNIT_FORCE_PER_DISTANCE force per distance
UNIT_FREQUENCY frequency
UNIT_HEAT_CAPACITY heat capacity
UNIT_HEAT_FLUX_PER_AREA heat flux per area
UNIT_HEAT_FLUX_PER_DISTANCE heat flux per distance
UNIT_HEAT_SOURCE heat source
UNIT_ILLUMINANCE illuminance
UNIT_LINEAR_ACCELERATION linear acceleration
UNIT_LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR linear per angular
UNIT_LINEAR_VELOCITY linear velocity
UNIT_LUMINOUS_FLUX luminous flux
UNIT_MAGNETIC_FIELD_STRENGTH magnetic field strength
UNIT_MAGNETIC_FLUX magnetic flux
UNIT_MAGNETIC_FLUX_DENSITY magnetic flux density
UNIT_MASS_FLOW_RATE mass flow rate
UNIT_MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA mass moment of inertia
UNIT_MASS_PER_AREA mass per area
UNIT_MASS_PER_LENGTH mass per length
UNIT_MOMENTUM momentum
UNIT_PER_DISTANCE per distance
UNIT_POWER power
UNIT_ELECTRIC_CHARGE electric charge
UNIT_RADIANT_INTENSITY radiant intensity


UNIT_ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS rotational stiffness
UNIT_SECOND_MOMENT_OF_AREA second moment of area
UNIT_THERMAL_CONDUCTIVITY thermal conductivity
UNIT_DYNAMIC_VISCOSITY dynamic viscosity
UNIT_KINEMATIC_VISCOSITY kinematic viscosity
UNIT_VOLUME volume
UNIT_VOLUME_FLOW_RATE volume flow rate
UNIT_SCALAR scalar
UNIT_FORCE_PER_AREA_PER_LENGTH force per area per length
UNIT_MOMENT moment
UNIT_FIRST_MOMENT_OF_AREA first moment of area
UNIT_TORSIONAL_WARPING_CONSTANT torsional warping constant
UNIT_SLOPE slope
UNIT_ENUM enumerator
UNIT_NPD NPD
UNIT_MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE moment per distance
UNIT_WIRE_GAUGE wire gauge
Unit Abbreviations to Names
Unit Abbreviation Name
m DISTANCE_METER
nm DISTANCE_NANOMETER
mm DISTANCE_MILLIMETER
cm DISTANCE_CENTIMETER
km DISTANCE_KILOMETER
in DISTANCE_INCH
ft DISTANCE_FOOT
yd DISTANCE_YARD
mi DISTANCE_MILE
tenth DISTANCE_TENTH
hundredth DISTANCE_HUNDREDTH
thousandth DISTANCE_THOUSANDTH
rod DISTANCE_ROD
pole DISTANCE_POLE


link DISTANCE_LINK
chain DISTANCE_CHAIN
pt DISTANCE_POINT
furlong DISTANCE_FURLONG
rad ANGLE_RADIAN
deg ANGLE_DEGREE
min ANGLE_MINUTE
sec ANGLE_SECOND
gr ANGLE_GRADIAN
rev ANGLE_REVOLUTION
kg MASS_KILOGRAM
g MASS_GRAM
mg MASS_MILLIGRAM
Mg MASS_MEGAGRAM
grain MASS_GRAIN
slug MASS_SLUG
lbm MASS_POUND_MASS
slinch MASS_SLINCH
oz MASS_OUNCE
tonne MASS_METRIC_TON
ton MASS_LONG_TON
net-ton MASS_SHORT_TON
sec TIME_SECOND
min TIME_MINUTE
hr TIME_HOUR
day TIME_DAY
wk TIME_WEEK
yr TIME_YEAR
ms TIME_MILLISECOND
ns TIME_NANOSECOND
K TEMPERATURE_KELVIN
F TEMPERATURE_FAHRENHEIT
C TEMPERATURE_CELCIUS
R TEMPERATURE_RANKINE


A ELECTRIC_CURRENT_AMPERE
cd LUMINOUS_INTENSITY_CANDELA
mol AMOUNT_OF_SUBSTANCE_MOLE
sr SOLID_ANGLE_STERADIAN
rad/s
2
ANGULAR_ACCELERATION_RADIAN_PER_SQ_SECOND
deg/s
2
ANGULAR_ACCELERATION_DEGREE_PER_SQ_SECOND
Hz/s ANGULAR_ACCELERATION_CYCLE_PER_SQ_SECOND
kg-m
2
/s ANGULAR_MOMENTUM_KILOGRAM_SQ_METER_PER_SE
COND
rad/s ANGULAR_VELOCITY_RADIAN_PER_SECOND
rad/min ANGULAR_VELOCITY_RADIAN_PER_MINUTE
rad/hr ANGULAR_VELOCITY_RADIAN_PER_HOUR
Hz ANGULAR_VELOCITY_CYCLE_PER_SECOND
rpm ANGULAR_VELOCITY_CYCLE_PER_MINUTE
rph ANGULAR_VELOCITY_CYCLE_PER_HOUR
deg/s ANGULAR_VELOCITY_DEGREE_PER_SECOND
deg/m ANGULAR_VELOCITY_DEGREE_PER_MINUTE
deg/hr ANGULAR_VELOCITY_DEGREE_PER_HOUR
m
2
AREA_SQUARE_METER
mm
2
AREA_SQUARE_MILLIMETER
cm
2
AREA_SQUARE_CENTIMETER
km
2
AREA_SQUARE_KILOMETER
in
2
AREA_SQUARE_INCH
ft
2
AREA_SQUARE_FOOT
yd
2
AREA_SQUARE_YARD
mi
2
AREA_SQUARE_MILE
ac AREA_SQUARE_ACRE
ac AREA_ACRE
N/m
3
BODY_FORCE_NEWTON_PER_CU_METER
N/cm
3
BODY_FORCE_NEWTON_PER_CU_CENTIMETER
N/mm
3
BODY_FORCE_NEWTON_PER_CU_MILLIMETER
kN/m
3
BODY_FORCE_KILONEWTON_PER_CU_METER
lbf/in
3
BODY_FORCE_POUND_FORCE_PER_CU_INCH
lbf/ft
3
BODY_FORCE_POUND_FORCE_PER_CU_FOOT


/K COEFFICIENT_OF_THERMAL_EXPANSION_PER_KELVIN
/C COEFFICIENT_OF_THERMAL_EXPANSION_PER_CELCIUS
/F COEFFICIENT_OF_THERMAL_EXPANSION_PER_FAHREN
HEIT
/R COEFFICIENT_OF_THERMAL_EXPANSION_PER_RANKINE
kg/m
3
DENSITY_KILOGRAM_PER_CU_METER
kg/mm
3
DENSITY_KILOGRAM_PER_CU_MILLIMETER
kg/cm
3
DENSITY_KILOGRAM_PER_CU_CENTIMETER
lbm/ft
3
DENSITY_POUND_MASS_PER_CU_FOOT
lbm/in
3
DENSITY_POUND_MASS_PER_CU_INCH
slug/ft
3
DENSITY_SLUG_PER_CU_FOOT
slinch/in
3
DENSITY_SLINCH_PER_CU_INCH
F ELECTRICAL_CAPACITANCE_FARAD
S ELECTRICAL_CONDUCTANCE_SIEMENS
V/m ELECTRICAL_FIELD_STRENGTH_VOLT_PER_METER
V ELECTRICAL_POTENTIAL_VOLT
ohm ELECTRICAL_RESISTANCE_OHM
J ENERGY_JOULE
mJ ENERGY_MICRO_JOULE
kJ ENERGY_KILOJOULE
W-s ENERGY_WATT_SECOND
W-hr ENERGY_WATT_HOUR
kW-hr ENERGY_KILOWATT_HOUR
in-lbf ENERGY_INCH_POUND_FORCE
ft-lbf ENERGY_FOOT_POUND_FORCE
BTU ENERGY_BTU
erg ENERGY_ERG
eV ENERGY_ELECTRON_VOLT
J/K ENTHROPY_JOULE_PER_KELVIN
W/m
2
-K FILM_COEFFICIENT_WATT_PER_SQ_METER_KELVIN
BTU/hr- ft
2
F FILM_COEFFICIENT_BTU_PER_HOUR_SQ_FOOT_FAHREN
HEIT
ft- lbf/ft
2
F FILM_COEFFICIENT_FOOT_POUND_PER_SQ_FOOT_FAH
RENHEIT
in- lbf/in
2
F FILM_COEFFICIENT_INCH_POUND_PER_SQ_INCH_FAHR


ENHEIT
N FORCE_NEWTON
nN FORCE_NANONEWTON
mN FORCE_MILLINEWTON
kN FORCE_KILONEWTON
lbf FORCE_POUND_FORCE
dyne FORCE_DYNE
kip FORCE_KIP
Pa FORCE_PER_AREA_PASCAL
mPa FORCE_PER_AREA_MILLIPASCAL
kPa FORCE_PER_AREA_KILOPASCAL
MPa FORCE_PER_AREA_MEGAPASCAL
psi FORCE_PER_AREA_POUND_FORCE_PER_SQ_INCH
ksi FORCE_PER_AREA_KIP_PER_SQ_INCH
psf FORCE_PER_AREA_POUND_FORCE_PER_SQ_FOOT
ksf FORCE_PER_AREA_KIP_PER_SQ_FOOT
bar FORCE_PER_AREA_BAR
mbar FORCE_PER_AREA_MILLIBAR
atm FORCE_PER_AREA_ATMOSPHERE
N/m FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_NEWTON_PER_METER
N/mm FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_NEWTON_PER_MILLIMETER
N/cm FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_NEWTON_PER_CENTIMETER
kN/m FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_KILONEWTON_PER_METER
lbf/in FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_POUND_FORCE_PER_INCH
lbf/ft FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_POUND_FORCE_PER_FOOT
kpi FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_KIP_PER_INCH
kpf FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_KIP_PER_FOOT
dyne/m FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_DYNE_PER_METER
dyne/mm FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_DYNE_PER_MILLIMETER
/sec FREQUENCY_PER_SECOND
/min FREQUENCY_PER_MINUTE
/hr FREQUENCY_PER_HOUR
J/kg-K HEAT_CAPACITY_JOULE_PER_KILOGRAM_KELVIN
BTU/lbm-F HEAT_CAPACITY_BTU_PER_POUND_MASS_FAHRENHEIT


W/m
2
HEAT_FLUX_PER_AREA_WATT_PER_SQ_METER
kW/m
2
HEAT_FLUX_PER_AREA_KILOWATT_PER_SQ_METER
in-lbf/s- in
2
HEAT_FLUX_PER_AREA_INCH_POUND_FORCE_PER_SEC
OND_SQ_INCH
ft-lbf/s- ft
2
HEAT_FLUX_PER_AREA_FOOT_POUND_FORCE_PER_SE
COND_SQ_FOOT
BTU/hr- ft
2
HEAT_FLUX_PER_AREA_BTU_PER_HOUR_SQ_FOOT
hp/ft
2
HEAT_FLUX_PER_AREA_HORSEPOWER_P_PER_SQ_FOO
T
W/m HEAT_FLUX_PER_DISTANCE_WATT_PER_METER
kW/m HEAT_FLUX_PER_DISTANCE_KILOWATT_PER_METER
mW/m HEAT_FLUX_PER_DISTANCE_MICROWATT_PER_METER
mW/mm HEAT_FLUX_PER_DISTANCE_MICROWATT_PER_MILLIME
TER
in-lbf/s- in HEAT_FLUX_PER_DISTANCE_INCH_POUND_FORCE_PER
_SECOND_INCH
BTU/hr- ft HEAT_FLUX_PER_DISTANCE_BTU_PER_HOUR_FOOT
hp/ft HEAT_FLUX_PER_DISTANCE_HORSEPOWER_PER_FOOT
W/m
3
HEAT_SOURCE_WATT_PER_CU_METER
kW/m
3
HEAT_SOURCE_KILOWATT_PER_CU_METER
in-lbf/s- in
3
HEAT_SOURCE_INCH_POUND_FORCE_PER_SECOND_CU
_INCH
ft-lbf/s- ft
3
HEAT_SOURCE_FOOT_POUND_FORCE_PER_SECOND_C
U_FOOT
BTU/hr- ft
3
HEAT_SOURCE_BTU_PER_HOUR_CU_FOOT
hp/ft
3
HEAT_SOURCE_HORSEPOWER_PER_CU_FOOT
lx ILLUMINANCE_LUX
m/s
2
LINEAR_ACCELERATION_METER_PER_SQ_SECOND
km/s
2
LINEAR_ACCELERATION_KILOMETER_PER_SQ_SECOND
mm/s
2
LINEAR_ACCELERATION_MILLIMETER_PER_SQ_SECOND
cm/s
2
LINEAR_ACCELERATION_CENTIMETER_PER_SQ_SECON
D
in/s
2
LINEAR_ACCELERATION_INCH_PER_SQ_SECOND
ft/s
2
LINEAR_ACCELERATION_FOOT_PER_SQ_SECOND
mi/s
2
LINEAR_ACCELERATION_MILE_PER_SQ_SECOND
mi/hr
2
LINEAR_ACCELERATION_MILE_PER_SQ_HOUR


km/hr
2
LINEAR_ACCELERATION_KILOMETER_PER_SQ_HOUR
m/rad LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR_METER_PER_RADIAN
m/rev LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR_METER_PER_REVOLUTION
mm/rev LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR_MILLIMETER_PER_REVOLUTION
in/rev LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR_INCH_PER_REVOLUTION
ft/rev LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR_FOOT_PER_REVOLUTION
m/s LINEAR_VELOCITY_METER_PER_SECOND
mm/s LINEAR_VELOCITY_MILLIMETER_PER_SECOND
cm/s LINEAR_VELOCITY_CENTIMETER_PER_SECOND
km/s LINEAR_VELOCITY_KILOMETER_PER_SECOND
km/hr LINEAR_VELOCITY_KILOMETER_PER_HOUR
in/s LINEAR_VELOCITY_INCH_PER_SECOND
ft/s LINEAR_VELOCITY_FOOT_PER_SECOND
mi/s LINEAR_VELOCITY_MILE_PER_SECOND
mi/hr LINEAR_VELOCITY_MILE_PER_HOUR
lm LUMINOUS_FLUX_LUMEN
A/m MAGNETIC_FIELD_STRENGTH_AMPERE_PER_METER
Wb MAGNETIC_FLUX_WEBER
T MAGNETIC_FLUX_DENSITY_TESLA
kg/s MASS_FLOW_RATE_KILOGRAM_PER_SECOND
g/s MASS_FLOW_RATE_GRAM_PER_SECOND
Mg/s MASS_FLOW_RATE_MEGAGRAM_PER_SECOND
lbm/s MASS_FLOW_RATE_POUND_MASS_PER_SECOND
slug/s MASS_FLOW_RATE_SLUG_PER_SECOND
slinch/s MASS_FLOW_RATE_SLINCH_PER_SECOND
kg-m
2
MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_KILOGRAM_SQ_METER
kg-mm
2
MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_KILOGRAM_SQ_MILLIMETE
R
g-mm
2
MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_GRAM_SQ_MILLIMETER
g-cm
2
MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_GRAM_SQ_CENTIMETER
slug-ft
2
MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_SLUG_SQ_FOOT
slug-in
2
MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_SLUG_SQ_INCH
slinch- in
2
MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_SLINCH_SQ_INCH
lbm-in
2
MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_POUND_MASS_SQ_INCH


lbm-ft
2
MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_POUND_MASS_SQ_FOOT
kg/m
2
MASS_PER_AREA_KILOGRAM_PER_SQ_METER
kg/mm
2
MASS_PER_AREA_KILOGRAM_PER_SQ_MILLIMETER
g/mm
2
MASS_PER_AREA_GRAM_PER_SQ_MILLIMETER
g/cm
2
MASS_PER_AREA_GRAM_PER_SQ_CENTIMETER
slug/in
2
MASS_PER_AREA_SLUG_PER_SQ_INCH
slug/ft
2
MASS_PER_AREA_SLUG_PER_SQ_FOOT
slinch/in
2
MASS_PER_AREA_SLINCH_PER_SQ_INCH
lbm/in
2
MASS_PER_AREA_POUND_MASS_PER_SQ_INCH
lbm/ft
2
MASS_PER_AREA_POUND_MASS_PER_SQ_FOOT
kg/m MASS_PER_LENGTH_KILOGRAM_PER_METER
kg/mm MASS_PER_LENGTH_KILOGRAM_PER_MILLIMETER
g/mm MASS_PER_LENGTH_GRAM_PER_MILLIMETER
g/cm MASS_PER_LENGTH_GRAM_PER_CENTIMETER
slug/in MASS_PER_LENGTH_SLUG_PER_INCH
slug/ft MASS_PER_LENGTH_SLUG_PER_FOOT
slinch/in MASS_PER_LENGTH_SLINCH_PER_INCH
lbm/in MASS_PER_LENGTH_POUND_MASS_PER_INCH
lbm/ft MASS_PER_LENGTH_POUND_MASS_PER_FOOT
kg-m/s MOMENTUM_KILOGRAM_METER_PER_SECOND
/m PER_DISTANCE_PER_METER
/nm PER_DISTANCE_PER_NANOMETER
/mm PER_DISTANCE_PER_MILLIMETER
/cm PER_DISTANCE_PER_CENTIMETER
/km PER_DISTANCE_PER_KILOMETER
/in PER_DISTANCE_PER_INCH
/ft PER_DISTANCE_PER_FOOT
/yd PER_DISTANCE_PER_YARD
/mi PER_DISTANCE_PER_MILE
/tenth PER_DISTANCE_PER_TENTH
/hundredth PER_DISTANCE_PER_HUNDREDTH
/mil PER_DISTANCE_PER_MIL
W POWER_WATT
kW POWER_KILOWATT


mW POWER_MICROWATT
in-lbf/s POWER_INCH_POUND_FORCE_PER_SECOND
ft-lbf/s POWER_FOOT_POUND_FORCE_PER_SECOND
BTU/hr POWER_BTU_PER_HOUR
hp POWER_HORSEPOWER
C ELECTRIC_CHARGE_COULOMB
W/sr RADIANT_INTENSITY_WATT_PER_STERADIAN
N- m/rad ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_NEWTON_METER_PER_RADIA
N
N- m/deg ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_NEWTON_METER_PER_DEGR
EE
N- mm/rad ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_NEWTON_MILLIMETER_PER_R
ADIAN
N- mm/deg ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_NEWTON_MILLIMETER_PER_D
EGREE
kN- m/rad ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_KILONEWTON_METER_PER_R
ADIAN
kN- m/deg ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_KILONEWTON_METER_PER_D
EGREE
lbf- in/rad ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_POUND_FORCE_INCH_PER_R
ADIAN
lbf- in/deg ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_POUND_FORCE_INCH_PER_D
EGREE
lbf- ft/rad ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_POUND_FORCE_FOOT_PER_R
ADIAN
lbf- ft/deg ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_POUND_FORCE_FOOT_PER_D
EGREE
m
4
SECOND_MOMENT_OF_AREA_METER_TO_FOURTH
mm
4
SECOND_MOMENT_OF_AREA_MILLIMETER_TO_FOURTH
cm
4
SECOND_MOMENT_OF_AREA_CENTIMETER_TO_FOURT
H
in
4
SECOND_MOMENT_OF_AREA_INCH_TO_FOURTH
ft
4
SECOND_MOMENT_OF_AREA_FOOT_TO_FOURTH
W/m-C THERMAL_CONDUCTIVITY_WATT_PER_METER_CELCIUS
kW/m- C THERMAL_CONDUCTIVITY_KILOWATT_PER_METER_CEL
CIUS
BTU/hr- ft-F THERMAL_CONDUCTIVITY_BTU_PER_HOUR_FAHRENHEI
T


in-lbf/s- in-F THERMAL_CONDUCTIVITY_INCH_POUND_FORCE_PER_S
ECOND_INCH_FAHRENHEIT
Pa-s DYNAMIC_VISCOSITY_PASCAL_SECOND
kPa-s DYNAMIC_VISCOSITY_KILOPASCAL_SECOND
MPa-s DYNAMIC_VISCOSITY_MEGAPASCAL_SECOND
lbf-s/in
2
DYNAMIC_VISCOSITY_POUND_FORCE_SECOND_PER_SQ
_INCH
m
2
/s KINEMATIC_VISCOSITY_SQ_METER_PER_SECOND
mm
2
/s KINEMATIC_VISCOSITY_SQ_MILLIMETER_PER_SECOND
cm
2
/s KINEMATIC_VISCOSITY_SQ_CENTIMETER_PER_SECOND
in
2
/s KINEMATIC_VISCOSITY_SQ_INCH_PER_SECOND
ft
2
/s KINEMATIC_VISCOSITY_SQ_FOOT_PER_SECOND
m
3
VOLUME_CU_METER
mm
3
VOLUME_CU_MILLIMETER
L VOLUME_LITER
mL VOLUME_MILLILITER
in
3
VOLUME_CU_INCH
ft
3
VOLUME_CU_FOOT
yd
3
VOLUME_CU_YARD
gallon VOLUME_GALLON
quart VOLUME_QUART
pint VOLUME_PINT
ounce VOLUME_FLUID_OUNCE

UNIT_NOT_SET

SCALAR_NULL
m
3
/s VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_CU_METER_PER_SECOND
mm
3
/s VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_CU_MILLIMETER_PER_SECOND
L/s VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_LITER_PER_SECOND
mL/s VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_MILLILITER_PER_SECOND
in
3
/s VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_CU_INCH_PER_SECOND
ft
3
/s VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_CU_FOOT_PER_SECOND
yd
3
/s VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_CU_YARD_PER_SECOND
gallon/s VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_GALLON_PER_SECOND
gallon/min VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_GALLON_PER_MINUTE


H ELECTRICAL_INDUCTANCE_HENRY
ANGLE_DEGREE_SYMBOL
' ANGLE_MINUTE_SYMBOL
" ANGLE_SECOND_SYMBOL
' DISTANCE_FOOT_SYMBOL
" DISTANCE_INCH_SYMBOL
hectare AREA_HECTARE
N/mm
2
FORCE_PER_AREA_NEWTON_PER_SQ_MILLIMETER
P DYNAMIC_VISCOSITY_POISE
cP DYNAMIC_VISCOSITY_CENTIPOISE
cm
3
VOLUME_CU_CENTIMETER
lbm- ft
2
/s ANGULAR_MOMENTUM_POUND_MASS_SQ_FOOT_PER_S
ECOND
V/ft ELECTRICAL_FIELD_STRENGTH_VOLT_PER_FOOT
lbm-ft/s MOMENTUM_POUND_MASS_FOOT_PER_SECOND
A/ft MAGNETIC_FIELD_STRENGTH_AMPERE_PER_FOOT
m
3
/min VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_CU_METER_PER_MINUTE
m
3
/hr VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_CU_METER_PER_HOUR
Pa/m FORCE_PER_AREA_PASCAL_PER_METER
mPa/m FORCE_PER_AREA_MILLIPASCAL_PER_METER
kPa/m FORCE_PER_AREA_KILOPASCAL_PER_METER
MPa/m FORCE_PER_AREA_MEGAPASCAL_PER_METER
psi/in FORCE_PER_AREA_POUND_FORCE_PER_SQ_INCH_PER
_INCH
ksi/in FORCE_PER_AREA_KIP_PER_SQ_INCH_PER_INCH
psf/ft FORCE_PER_AREA_POUND_FORCE_PER_SQ_FOOT_PER
_FOOT
ksf/ft FORCE_PER_AREA_KIP_PER_SQ_FOOT_PER_FOOT
bar/m FORCE_PER_AREA_BAR_PER_METER
mbar/m FORCE_PER_AREA_MILLIBAR_PER_METER
atm/m FORCE_PER_AREA_ATMOSPHERE_PER_METER
N/mm
3
FORCE_PER_AREA_NEWTON_PER_CU_MILLIMETER
mmw/m FORCE_PER_AREA_MILLIMETERS_OF_WATER_PER_MET
ER
inw/ft FORCE_PER_AREA_INCHES_OF_WATER_PER_FOOT


mmw FORCE_PER_AREA_MILLIMETERS_OF_WATER
inw FORCE_PER_AREA_INCHES_OF_WATER
N-m MOMENT_NEWTON_METER
DN-m MOMENT_DECA_NEWTON_METER
HN-m MOMENT_HECTO_NEWTON_METER
kN-m MOMENT_KILO_NEWTON_METER
MN-m MOMENT_MEGA_NEWTON_METER
TN-m MOMENT_TERA_NEWTON_METER
kgf-m MOMENT_KILOGRAM_FORCE_METER
tonnef- m MOMENT_TONNE_FORCE_METER
lb-ft MOMENT_POUND_FOOT
lb-in MOMENT_POUND_INCH
tonuk-ft MOMENT_TON_UK_FOOT
tonus-ft MOMENT_TON_US_FOOT
m
3
FIRST_MOMENT_OF_AREA_METER_TO_THIRD
mm
3
FIRST_MOMENT_OF_AREA_MILLIMETER_TO_THIRD
cm
3
FIRST_MOMENT_OF_AREA_CENTIMETER_TO_THIRD
in
3
FIRST_MOMENT_OF_AREA_INCH_TO_THIRD
ft
3
FIRST_MOMENT_OF_AREA_FOOT_TO_THIRD
m
6
TORSIONAL_WARPING_CONSTANT_METER_TO_SIXTH
mm
6
TORSIONAL_WARPING_CONSTANT_MILLIMETER_TO_SIX
TH
cm
6
TORSIONAL_WARPING_CONSTANT_CENTIMETER_TO_SI
XTH
in
6
TORSIONAL_WARPING_CONSTANT_INCH_TO_SIXTH
ft
6
TORSIONAL_WARPING_CONSTANT_FOOT_TO_SIXTH
L/min VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_LITER_PER_MINUTE
ft
3
/min VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_CU_FOOT_PER_MINUTE
ft/min LINEAR_VELOCITY_FOOT_PER_MINUTE
ftnt TIME_FORTNIGHT
rad SLOPE_ANGLE_RADIAN
deg SLOPE_ANGLE_DEGREE
min SLOPE_ANGLE_MINUTE
sec SLOPE_ANGLE_SECOND


% SLOPE_PERCENT
SLOPE_PER_THOUSAND
/ SLOPE_RATIO_SEPARATOR
m / m SLOPE_RATIO_METER_IN_METER
cm / m SLOPE_RATIO_CENTIMETER_IN_METER
cm / cm SLOPE_RATIO_CENTIMETER_IN_CENTIMETER
mm / m SLOPE_RATIO_MILLIMETER_IN_METER
mm / cm SLOPE_RATIO_MILLIMETER_IN_CENTIMETER
mm / mm SLOPE_RATIO_MILLIMETER_IN_MILLIMETER
yd / yd SLOPE_RATIO_YARD_IN_YARD
ft / yd SLOPE_RATIO_FOOT_IN_YARD
ft / ft SLOPE_RATIO_FOOT_IN_FOOT
in / yd SLOPE_RATIO_INCH_IN_YARD
in / ft SLOPE_RATIO_INCH_IN_FOOT
in / in SLOPE_RATIO_INCH_IN_INCH
ea ENUM_EACH
/tn ENUM_PER_TEN
% ENUM_PER_HUNDRED
% ENUM_PERCENT
ENUM_PER_THOUSAND
tn ENUM_TEN
cn ENUM_HUNDRED
th ENUM_THOUSAND
dz ENUM_DOZEN
/dz ENUM_PER_DOZEN
mm/rad LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR_MILLIMETER_PER_RADIAN
m/deg LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR_METER_PER_DEGREE
mm/deg LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR_MILLIMETER_PER_DEGREE
in/deg LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR_INCH_PER_DEGREE
Pag FORCE_PER_AREA_PASCAL_GAUGE
mPag FORCE_PER_AREA_MILLIPASCAL_GAUGE
kPag FORCE_PER_AREA_KILOPASCAL_GAUGE
MPag FORCE_PER_AREA_MEGAPASCAL_GAUGE


psig FORCE_PER_AREA_POUND_FORCE_PER_SQ_INCH_GAU
GE
ksig FORCE_PER_AREA_KIP_PER_SQ_INCH_GAUGE
psfg FORCE_PER_AREA_POUND_FORCE_PER_SQ_FOOT_GA
UGE
ksfg FORCE_PER_AREA_KIP_PER_SQ_FOOT_GAUGE
barg FORCE_PER_AREA_BAR_GAUGE
mbarg FORCE_PER_AREA_MILLIBAR_GAUGE
N/mm
2
g FORCE_PER_AREA_NEWTON_PER_SQ_MILLIMETER_GA
UGE
mmwg FORCE_PER_AREA_MILLIMETERS_OF_WATER_GAUGE
inwg FORCE_PER_AREA_INCHES_OF_WATER_GAUGE
in NPD_INCH
mm NPD_MILLIMETER
N-m/m MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_NEWTON_METER_PER_METE
R
N- m/mm MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_NEWTON_METER_PER_MILLI
METER
N- mm/m MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_NEWTON_MILLIMETER_PER_
METER
kN- m/mm MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_KILONEWTON_METER_PER_M
ILLIMETER
kN- mm/m MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_KILONEWTON_MILLIMETER_P
ER_METER
lbf-ft/in MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_POUND_FORCE_FOOT_PER_I
NCH
lbf-in/in MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_POUND_FORCE_INCH_PER_IN
CH
lbf-ft/ft MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_POUND_FORCE_FOOT_PER_F
OOT
lbf-in/ft MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_POUND_FORCE_INCH_PER_F
OOT
kip-ft/ft MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_KIP_FORCE_FOOT_PER_FOOT
kip-ft/in MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_KIP_FORCE_FOOT_PER_INCH
kip-in/ft MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_KIP_FORCE_INCH_PER_FOOT
kip-in/in MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_KIP_FORCE_INCH_PER_INCH
AWG WIRE_GAUGE_AWG
mm WIRE_GAUGE_MILLIMETER


in WIRE_GAUGE_INCH
mil WIRE_GAUGE_MIL
cmil WIRE_GAUGE_CIRCULAR_MIL
kcmil WIRE_GAUGE_KILO_CIRCULAR_MIL
mm
2
WIRE_GAUGE_SQUARE_MILLIMETER
native NPD_NATIVE_INCH
native NPD_NATIVE
Unit Names to Abbreviations
Unit Name Abbreviation
DISTANCE_METER m
DISTANCE_NANOMETER nm
DISTANCE_MILLIMETER mm
DISTANCE_CENTIMETER cm
DISTANCE_KILOMETER km
DISTANCE_INCH in
DISTANCE_FOOT ft
DISTANCE_YARD yd
DISTANCE_MILE mi
DISTANCE_TENTH tenth
DISTANCE_HUNDREDTH hundredth
DISTANCE_THOUSANDTH thousandth
DISTANCE_ROD rod
DISTANCE_POLE pole
DISTANCE_LINK link
DISTANCE_CHAIN chain
DISTANCE_POINT pt
DISTANCE_FURLONG furlong
ANGLE_RADIAN rad
ANGLE_DEGREE deg
ANGLE_MINUTE min
ANGLE_SECOND sec
ANGLE_GRADIAN gr
ANGLE_REVOLUTION rev


MASS_KILOGRAM kg
MASS_GRAM g
MASS_MILLIGRAM mg
MASS_MEGAGRAM Mg
MASS_GRAIN grain
MASS_SLUG slug
MASS_POUND_MASS lbm
MASS_SLINCH slinch
MASS_OUNCE oz
MASS_METRIC_TON tonne
MASS_LONG_TON ton
MASS_SHORT_TON net-ton
TIME_SECOND sec
TIME_MINUTE min
TIME_HOUR hr
TIME_DAY day
TIME_WEEK wk
TIME_YEAR yr
TIME_MILLISECOND ms
TIME_NANOSECOND ns
TEMPERATURE_KELVIN K
TEMPERATURE_FAHRENHEIT F
TEMPERATURE_CELCIUS C
TEMPERATURE_RANKINE R
ELECTRIC_CURRENT_AMPERE A
LUMINOUS_INTENSITY_CANDELA cd
AMOUNT_OF_SUBSTANCE_MOLE mol
SOLID_ANGLE_STERADIAN sr
ANGULAR_ACCELERATION_RADIAN_PER_SQ_SECOND rad/s
2

ANGULAR_ACCELERATION_DEGREE_PER_SQ_SECOND deg/s
2

ANGULAR_ACCELERATION_CYCLE_PER_SQ_SECOND Hz/s
ANGULAR_MOMENTUM_KILOGRAM_SQ_METER_PER_SECOND kg-m
2
/s
ANGULAR_VELOCITY_RADIAN_PER_SECOND rad/s
ANGULAR_VELOCITY_RADIAN_PER_MINUTE rad/min


ANGULAR_VELOCITY_RADIAN_PER_HOUR rad/hr
ANGULAR_VELOCITY_CYCLE_PER_SECOND Hz
ANGULAR_VELOCITY_CYCLE_PER_MINUTE rpm
ANGULAR_VELOCITY_CYCLE_PER_HOUR rph
ANGULAR_VELOCITY_DEGREE_PER_SECOND deg/s
ANGULAR_VELOCITY_DEGREE_PER_MINUTE deg/m
ANGULAR_VELOCITY_DEGREE_PER_HOUR deg/hr
AREA_SQUARE_METER m
2

AREA_SQUARE_MILLIMETER mm
2

AREA_SQUARE_CENTIMETER cm
2

AREA_SQUARE_KILOMETER km
2

AREA_SQUARE_INCH in
2

AREA_SQUARE_FOOT ft
2

AREA_SQUARE_YARD yd
2

AREA_SQUARE_MILE mi
2

AREA_SQUARE_ACRE ac
AREA_ACRE ac
BODY_FORCE_NEWTON_PER_CU_METER N/m
3

BODY_FORCE_NEWTON_PER_CU_CENTIMETER N/cm
3

BODY_FORCE_NEWTON_PER_CU_MILLIMETER N/mm
3

BODY_FORCE_KILONEWTON_PER_CU_METER kN/m
3

BODY_FORCE_POUND_FORCE_PER_CU_INCH lbf/in
3

BODY_FORCE_POUND_FORCE_PER_CU_FOOT lbf/ft
3

COEFFICIENT_OF_THERMAL_EXPANSION_PER_KELVIN /K
COEFFICIENT_OF_THERMAL_EXPANSION_PER_CELCIUS /C
COEFFICIENT_OF_THERMAL_EXPANSION_PER_FAHRENHEIT /F
COEFFICIENT_OF_THERMAL_EXPANSION_PER_RANKINE /R
DENSITY_KILOGRAM_PER_CU_METER kg/m
3

DENSITY_KILOGRAM_PER_CU_MILLIMETER kg/mm
3

DENSITY_KILOGRAM_PER_CU_CENTIMETER kg/cm
3

DENSITY_POUND_MASS_PER_CU_FOOT lbm/ft
3

DENSITY_POUND_MASS_PER_CU_INCH lbm/in
3

DENSITY_SLUG_PER_CU_FOOT slug/ft
3

DENSITY_SLINCH_PER_CU_INCH slinch/in
3



ELECTRICAL_CAPACITANCE_FARAD F
ELECTRICAL_CONDUCTANCE_SIEMENS S
ELECTRICAL_FIELD_STRENGTH_VOLT_PER_METER V/m
ELECTRICAL_POTENTIAL_VOLT V
ELECTRICAL_RESISTANCE_OHM ohm
ENERGY_JOULE J
ENERGY_MICRO_JOULE mJ
ENERGY_KILOJOULE kJ
ENERGY_WATT_SECOND W-s
ENERGY_WATT_HOUR W-hr
ENERGY_KILOWATT_HOUR kW-hr
ENERGY_INCH_POUND_FORCE in-lbf
ENERGY_FOOT_POUND_FORCE ft-lbf
ENERGY_BTU BTU
ENERGY_ERG erg
ENERGY_ELECTRON_VOLT eV
ENTHROPY_JOULE_PER_KELVIN J/K
FILM_COEFFICIENT_WATT_PER_SQ_METER_KELVIN W/m
2
-K
FILM_COEFFICIENT_BTU_PER_HOUR_SQ_FOOT_FAHRENHEIT BTU/hr- ft
2
F
FILM_COEFFICIENT_FOOT_POUND_PER_SQ_FOOT_FAHRENHEIT ft- lbf/ft
2
F
FILM_COEFFICIENT_INCH_POUND_PER_SQ_INCH_FAHRENHEIT in- lbf/in
2
F
FORCE_NEWTON N
FORCE_NANONEWTON nN
FORCE_MILLINEWTON mN
FORCE_KILONEWTON kN
FORCE_POUND_FORCE lbf
FORCE_DYNE dyne
FORCE_KIP kip
FORCE_PER_AREA_PASCAL Pa
FORCE_PER_AREA_MILLIPASCAL mPa
FORCE_PER_AREA_KILOPASCAL kPa
FORCE_PER_AREA_MEGAPASCAL MPa
FORCE_PER_AREA_POUND_FORCE_PER_SQ_INCH psi
FORCE_PER_AREA_KIP_PER_SQ_INCH ksi


FORCE_PER_AREA_POUND_FORCE_PER_SQ_FOOT psf
FORCE_PER_AREA_KIP_PER_SQ_FOOT ksf
FORCE_PER_AREA_BAR bar
FORCE_PER_AREA_MILLIBAR mbar
FORCE_PER_AREA_ATMOSPHERE atm
FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_NEWTON_PER_METER N/m
FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_NEWTON_PER_MILLIMETER N/mm
FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_NEWTON_PER_CENTIMETER N/cm
FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_KILONEWTON_PER_METER kN/m
FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_POUND_FORCE_PER_INCH lbf/in
FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_POUND_FORCE_PER_FOOT lbf/ft
FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_KIP_PER_INCH kpi
FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_KIP_PER_FOOT kpf
FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_DYNE_PER_METER dyne/m
FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_DYNE_PER_MILLIMETER dyne/mm
FREQUENCY_PER_SECOND /sec
FREQUENCY_PER_MINUTE /min
FREQUENCY_PER_HOUR /hr
HEAT_CAPACITY_JOULE_PER_KILOGRAM_KELVIN J/kg-K
HEAT_CAPACITY_BTU_PER_POUND_MASS_FAHRENHEIT BTU/lbm-F
HEAT_FLUX_PER_AREA_WATT_PER_SQ_METER W/m
2

HEAT_FLUX_PER_AREA_KILOWATT_PER_SQ_METER kW/m
2

HEAT_FLUX_PER_AREA_INCH_POUND_FORCE_PER_SECOND_S
Q_INCH
in-lbf/s- in
2

HEAT_FLUX_PER_AREA_FOOT_POUND_FORCE_PER_SECOND_S
Q_FOOT
ft-lbf/s- ft
2

HEAT_FLUX_PER_AREA_BTU_PER_HOUR_SQ_FOOT BTU/hr- ft
2

HEAT_FLUX_PER_AREA_HORSEPOWER_P_PER_SQ_FOOT hp/ft
2

HEAT_FLUX_PER_DISTANCE_WATT_PER_METER W/m
HEAT_FLUX_PER_DISTANCE_KILOWATT_PER_METER kW/m
HEAT_FLUX_PER_DISTANCE_MICROWATT_PER_METER mW/m
HEAT_FLUX_PER_DISTANCE_MICROWATT_PER_MILLIMETER mW/mm
HEAT_FLUX_PER_DISTANCE_INCH_POUND_FORCE_PER_SECON
D_INCH
in-lbf/s- in
HEAT_FLUX_PER_DISTANCE_BTU_PER_HOUR_FOOT BTU/hr- ft


HEAT_FLUX_PER_DISTANCE_HORSEPOWER_PER_FOOT hp/ft
HEAT_SOURCE_WATT_PER_CU_METER W/m
3

HEAT_SOURCE_KILOWATT_PER_CU_METER kW/m
3

HEAT_SOURCE_INCH_POUND_FORCE_PER_SECOND_CU_INCH in-lbf/s- in
3

HEAT_SOURCE_FOOT_POUND_FORCE_PER_SECOND_CU_FOOT ft-lbf/s- ft
3

HEAT_SOURCE_BTU_PER_HOUR_CU_FOOT BTU/hr- ft
3

HEAT_SOURCE_HORSEPOWER_PER_CU_FOOT hp/ft
3

ILLUMINANCE_LUX lx
LINEAR_ACCELERATION_METER_PER_SQ_SECOND m/s
2

LINEAR_ACCELERATION_KILOMETER_PER_SQ_SECOND km/s
2

LINEAR_ACCELERATION_MILLIMETER_PER_SQ_SECOND mm/s
2

LINEAR_ACCELERATION_CENTIMETER_PER_SQ_SECOND cm/s
2

LINEAR_ACCELERATION_INCH_PER_SQ_SECOND in/s
2

LINEAR_ACCELERATION_FOOT_PER_SQ_SECOND ft/s
2

LINEAR_ACCELERATION_MILE_PER_SQ_SECOND mi/s
2

LINEAR_ACCELERATION_MILE_PER_SQ_HOUR mi/hr
2

LINEAR_ACCELERATION_KILOMETER_PER_SQ_HOUR km/hr
2

LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR_METER_PER_RADIAN m/rad
LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR_METER_PER_REVOLUTION m/rev
LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR_MILLIMETER_PER_REVOLUTION mm/rev
LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR_INCH_PER_REVOLUTION in/rev
LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR_FOOT_PER_REVOLUTION ft/rev
LINEAR_VELOCITY_METER_PER_SECOND m/s
LINEAR_VELOCITY_MILLIMETER_PER_SECOND mm/s
LINEAR_VELOCITY_CENTIMETER_PER_SECOND cm/s
LINEAR_VELOCITY_KILOMETER_PER_SECOND km/s
LINEAR_VELOCITY_KILOMETER_PER_HOUR km/hr
LINEAR_VELOCITY_INCH_PER_SECOND in/s
LINEAR_VELOCITY_FOOT_PER_SECOND ft/s
LINEAR_VELOCITY_MILE_PER_SECOND mi/s
LINEAR_VELOCITY_MILE_PER_HOUR mi/hr
LUMINOUS_FLUX_LUMEN lm
MAGNETIC_FIELD_STRENGTH_AMPERE_PER_METER A/m
MAGNETIC_FLUX_WEBER Wb


MAGNETIC_FLUX_DENSITY_TESLA T
MASS_FLOW_RATE_KILOGRAM_PER_SECOND kg/s
MASS_FLOW_RATE_GRAM_PER_SECOND g/s
MASS_FLOW_RATE_MEGAGRAM_PER_SECOND Mg/s
MASS_FLOW_RATE_POUND_MASS_PER_SECOND lbm/s
MASS_FLOW_RATE_SLUG_PER_SECOND slug/s
MASS_FLOW_RATE_SLINCH_PER_SECOND slinch/s
MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_KILOGRAM_SQ_METER kg-m
2

MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_KILOGRAM_SQ_MILLIMETER kg-mm
2

MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_GRAM_SQ_MILLIMETER g-mm
2

MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_GRAM_SQ_CENTIMETER g-cm
2

MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_SLUG_SQ_FOOT slug-ft
2

MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_SLUG_SQ_INCH slug-in
2

MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_SLINCH_SQ_INCH slinch- in
2

MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_POUND_MASS_SQ_INCH lbm-in
2

MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_POUND_MASS_SQ_FOOT lbm-ft
2

MASS_PER_AREA_KILOGRAM_PER_SQ_METER kg/m
2

MASS_PER_AREA_KILOGRAM_PER_SQ_MILLIMETER kg/mm
2

MASS_PER_AREA_GRAM_PER_SQ_MILLIMETER g/mm
2

MASS_PER_AREA_GRAM_PER_SQ_CENTIMETER g/cm
2

MASS_PER_AREA_SLUG_PER_SQ_INCH slug/in
2

MASS_PER_AREA_SLUG_PER_SQ_FOOT slug/ft
2

MASS_PER_AREA_SLINCH_PER_SQ_INCH slinch/in
2

MASS_PER_AREA_POUND_MASS_PER_SQ_INCH lbm/in
2

MASS_PER_AREA_POUND_MASS_PER_SQ_FOOT lbm/ft
2

MASS_PER_LENGTH_KILOGRAM_PER_METER kg/m
MASS_PER_LENGTH_KILOGRAM_PER_MILLIMETER kg/mm
MASS_PER_LENGTH_GRAM_PER_MILLIMETER g/mm
MASS_PER_LENGTH_GRAM_PER_CENTIMETER g/cm
MASS_PER_LENGTH_SLUG_PER_INCH slug/in
MASS_PER_LENGTH_SLUG_PER_FOOT slug/ft
MASS_PER_LENGTH_SLINCH_PER_INCH slinch/in
MASS_PER_LENGTH_POUND_MASS_PER_INCH lbm/in
MASS_PER_LENGTH_POUND_MASS_PER_FOOT lbm/ft


MOMENTUM_KILOGRAM_METER_PER_SECOND kg-m/s
PER_DISTANCE_PER_METER /m
PER_DISTANCE_PER_NANOMETER /nm
PER_DISTANCE_PER_MILLIMETER /mm
PER_DISTANCE_PER_CENTIMETER /cm
PER_DISTANCE_PER_KILOMETER /km
PER_DISTANCE_PER_INCH /in
PER_DISTANCE_PER_FOOT /ft
PER_DISTANCE_PER_YARD /yd
PER_DISTANCE_PER_MILE /mi
PER_DISTANCE_PER_TENTH /tenth
PER_DISTANCE_PER_HUNDREDTH /hundredth
PER_DISTANCE_PER_MIL /mil
POWER_WATT W
POWER_KILOWATT kW
POWER_MICROWATT mW
POWER_INCH_POUND_FORCE_PER_SECOND in-lbf/s
POWER_FOOT_POUND_FORCE_PER_SECOND ft-lbf/s
POWER_BTU_PER_HOUR BTU/hr
POWER_HORSEPOWER hp
ELECTRIC_CHARGE_COULOMB C
RADIANT_INTENSITY_WATT_PER_STERADIAN W/sr
ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_NEWTON_METER_PER_RADIAN N- m/rad
ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_NEWTON_METER_PER_DEGREE N- m/deg
ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_NEWTON_MILLIMETER_PER_RADIAN N- mm/rad
ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_NEWTON_MILLIMETER_PER_DEGREE N- mm/deg
ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_KILONEWTON_METER_PER_RADIAN kN- m/rad
ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_KILONEWTON_METER_PER_DEGREE kN- m/deg
ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_POUND_FORCE_INCH_PER_RADIAN lbf- in/rad
ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_POUND_FORCE_INCH_PER_DEGREE lbf- in/deg
ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_POUND_FORCE_FOOT_PER_RADIAN lbf- ft/rad
ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_POUND_FORCE_FOOT_PER_DEGREE lbf- ft/deg
SECOND_MOMENT_OF_AREA_METER_TO_FOURTH m
4

SECOND_MOMENT_OF_AREA_MILLIMETER_TO_FOURTH mm
4



SECOND_MOMENT_OF_AREA_CENTIMETER_TO_FOURTH cm
4

SECOND_MOMENT_OF_AREA_INCH_TO_FOURTH in
4

SECOND_MOMENT_OF_AREA_FOOT_TO_FOURTH ft
4

THERMAL_CONDUCTIVITY_WATT_PER_METER_CELCIUS W/m-C
THERMAL_CONDUCTIVITY_KILOWATT_PER_METER_CELCIUS kW/m- C
THERMAL_CONDUCTIVITY_BTU_PER_HOUR_FAHRENHEIT BTU/hr- ft-F
THERMAL_CONDUCTIVITY_INCH_POUND_FORCE_PER_SECOND_
INCH_FAHRENHEIT
in-lbf/s- in-F
DYNAMIC_VISCOSITY_PASCAL_SECOND Pa-s
DYNAMIC_VISCOSITY_KILOPASCAL_SECOND kPa-s
DYNAMIC_VISCOSITY_MEGAPASCAL_SECOND MPa-s
DYNAMIC_VISCOSITY_POUND_FORCE_SECOND_PER_SQ_INCH lbf-s/in
2

KINEMATIC_VISCOSITY_SQ_METER_PER_SECOND m
2
/s
KINEMATIC_VISCOSITY_SQ_MILLIMETER_PER_SECOND mm
2
/s
KINEMATIC_VISCOSITY_SQ_CENTIMETER_PER_SECOND cm
2
/s
KINEMATIC_VISCOSITY_SQ_INCH_PER_SECOND in
2
/s
KINEMATIC_VISCOSITY_SQ_FOOT_PER_SECOND ft
2
/s
VOLUME_CU_METER m
3

VOLUME_CU_MILLIMETER mm
3

VOLUME_LITER L
VOLUME_MILLILITER mL
VOLUME_CU_INCH in
3

VOLUME_CU_FOOT ft
3

VOLUME_CU_YARD yd
3

VOLUME_GALLON gallon
VOLUME_QUART quart
VOLUME_PINT pint
VOLUME_FLUID_OUNCE ounce
UNIT_NOT_SET
SCALAR_NULL
VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_CU_METER_PER_SECOND m
3
/s
VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_CU_MILLIMETER_PER_SECOND mm
3
/s
VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_LITER_PER_SECOND L/s
VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_MILLILITER_PER_SECOND mL/s


VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_CU_INCH_PER_SECOND in
3
/s
VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_CU_FOOT_PER_SECOND ft
3
/s
VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_CU_YARD_PER_SECOND yd
3
/s
VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_GALLON_PER_SECOND gallon/s
VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_GALLON_PER_MINUTE gallon/min
ELECTRICAL_INDUCTANCE_HENRY H
ANGLE_DEGREE_SYMBOL
ANGLE_MINUTE_SYMBOL '
ANGLE_SECOND_SYMBOL "
DISTANCE_FOOT_SYMBOL '
DISTANCE_INCH_SYMBOL "
AREA_HECTARE hectare
FORCE_PER_AREA_NEWTON_PER_SQ_MILLIMETER N/mm
2

DYNAMIC_VISCOSITY_POISE P
DYNAMIC_VISCOSITY_CENTIPOISE cP
VOLUME_CU_CENTIMETER cm
3

ANGULAR_MOMENTUM_POUND_MASS_SQ_FOOT_PER_SECOND lbm- ft
2
/s
ELECTRICAL_FIELD_STRENGTH_VOLT_PER_FOOT V/ft
MOMENTUM_POUND_MASS_FOOT_PER_SECOND lbm-ft/s
MAGNETIC_FIELD_STRENGTH_AMPERE_PER_FOOT A/ft
VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_CU_METER_PER_MINUTE m
3
/min
VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_CU_METER_PER_HOUR m
3
/hr
FORCE_PER_AREA_PASCAL_PER_METER Pa/m
FORCE_PER_AREA_MILLIPASCAL_PER_METER mPa/m
FORCE_PER_AREA_KILOPASCAL_PER_METER kPa/m
FORCE_PER_AREA_MEGAPASCAL_PER_METER MPa/m
FORCE_PER_AREA_POUND_FORCE_PER_SQ_INCH_PER_INCH psi/in
FORCE_PER_AREA_KIP_PER_SQ_INCH_PER_INCH ksi/in
FORCE_PER_AREA_POUND_FORCE_PER_SQ_FOOT_PER_FOOT psf/ft
FORCE_PER_AREA_KIP_PER_SQ_FOOT_PER_FOOT ksf/ft
FORCE_PER_AREA_BAR_PER_METER bar/m
FORCE_PER_AREA_MILLIBAR_PER_METER mbar/m
FORCE_PER_AREA_ATMOSPHERE_PER_METER atm/m
FORCE_PER_AREA_NEWTON_PER_CU_MILLIMETER N/mm
3



FORCE_PER_AREA_MILLIMETERS_OF_WATER_PER_METER mmw/m
FORCE_PER_AREA_INCHES_OF_WATER_PER_FOOT inw/ft
FORCE_PER_AREA_MILLIMETERS_OF_WATER mmw
FORCE_PER_AREA_INCHES_OF_WATER inw
MOMENT_NEWTON_METER N-m
MOMENT_DECA_NEWTON_METER DN-m
MOMENT_HECTO_NEWTON_METER HN-m
MOMENT_KILO_NEWTON_METER kN-m
MOMENT_MEGA_NEWTON_METER MN-m
MOMENT_TERA_NEWTON_METER TN-m
MOMENT_KILOGRAM_FORCE_METER kgf-m
MOMENT_TONNE_FORCE_METER tonnef- m
MOMENT_POUND_FOOT lb-ft
MOMENT_POUND_INCH lb-in
MOMENT_TON_UK_FOOT tonuk-ft
MOMENT_TON_US_FOOT tonus-ft
FIRST_MOMENT_OF_AREA_METER_TO_THIRD m
3

FIRST_MOMENT_OF_AREA_MILLIMETER_TO_THIRD mm
3

FIRST_MOMENT_OF_AREA_CENTIMETER_TO_THIRD cm
3

FIRST_MOMENT_OF_AREA_INCH_TO_THIRD in
3

FIRST_MOMENT_OF_AREA_FOOT_TO_THIRD ft
3

TORSIONAL_WARPING_CONSTANT_METER_TO_SIXTH m
6

TORSIONAL_WARPING_CONSTANT_MILLIMETER_TO_SIXTH mm
6

TORSIONAL_WARPING_CONSTANT_CENTIMETER_TO_SIXTH cm
6

TORSIONAL_WARPING_CONSTANT_INCH_TO_SIXTH in
6

TORSIONAL_WARPING_CONSTANT_FOOT_TO_SIXTH ft
6

VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_LITER_PER_MINUTE L/min
VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_CU_FOOT_PER_MINUTE ft
3
/min
LINEAR_VELOCITY_FOOT_PER_MINUTE ft/min
TIME_FORTNIGHT ftnt
SLOPE_ANGLE_RADIAN rad
SLOPE_ANGLE_DEGREE deg
SLOPE_ANGLE_MINUTE min
SLOPE_ANGLE_SECOND sec


SLOPE_PERCENT %
SLOPE_PER_THOUSAND
SLOPE_RATIO_SEPARATOR /
SLOPE_RATIO_METER_IN_METER m / m
SLOPE_RATIO_CENTIMETER_IN_METER cm / m
SLOPE_RATIO_CENTIMETER_IN_CENTIMETER cm / cm
SLOPE_RATIO_MILLIMETER_IN_METER mm / m
SLOPE_RATIO_MILLIMETER_IN_CENTIMETER mm / cm
SLOPE_RATIO_MILLIMETER_IN_MILLIMETER mm / mm
SLOPE_RATIO_YARD_IN_YARD yd / yd
SLOPE_RATIO_FOOT_IN_YARD ft / yd
SLOPE_RATIO_FOOT_IN_FOOT ft / ft
SLOPE_RATIO_INCH_IN_YARD in / yd
SLOPE_RATIO_INCH_IN_FOOT in / ft
SLOPE_RATIO_INCH_IN_INCH in / in
ENUM_EACH ea
ENUM_PER_TEN /tn
ENUM_PER_HUNDRED %
ENUM_PERCENT %
ENUM_PER_THOUSAND
ENUM_TEN tn
ENUM_HUNDRED cn
ENUM_THOUSAND th
ENUM_DOZEN dz
ENUM_PER_DOZEN /dz
LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR_MILLIMETER_PER_RADIAN mm/rad
LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR_METER_PER_DEGREE m/deg
LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR_MILLIMETER_PER_DEGREE mm/deg
LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR_INCH_PER_DEGREE in/deg
FORCE_PER_AREA_PASCAL_GAUGE Pag
FORCE_PER_AREA_MILLIPASCAL_GAUGE MPag
FORCE_PER_AREA_KILOPASCAL_GAUGE psig
FORCE_PER_AREA_MEGAPASCAL_GAUGE MPag
FORCE_PER_AREA_POUND_FORCE_PER_SQ_INCH_GAUGE psig


FORCE_PER_AREA_KIP_PER_SQ_INCH_GAUGE ksig
FORCE_PER_AREA_POUND_FORCE_PER_SQ_FOOT_GAUGE psfg
FORCE_PER_AREA_KIP_PER_SQ_FOOT_GAUGE ksfg
FORCE_PER_AREA_BAR_GAUGE barg
FORCE_PER_AREA_MILLIBAR_GAUGE mbarg
FORCE_PER_AREA_NEWTON_PER_SQ_MILLIMETER_GAUGE N/mm
2
g
FORCE_PER_AREA_MILLIMETERS_OF_WATER_GAUGE mmwg
FORCE_PER_AREA_INCHES_OF_WATER_GAUGE inwg
NPD_INCH in
NPD_MILLIMETER mm
MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_NEWTON_METER_PER_METER N-m/m
MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_NEWTON_METER_PER_MILLIMETER N- m/mm
MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_NEWTON_MILLIMETER_PER_METER N- mm/m
MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_KILONEWTON_METER_PER_MILLIMET
ER
kN- m/mm
MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_KILONEWTON_MILLIMETER_PER_MET
ER
kN- mm/m
MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_POUND_FORCE_FOOT_PER_INCH lbf-ft/in
MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_POUND_FORCE_INCH_PER_INCH lbf-in/in
MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_POUND_FORCE_FOOT_PER_FOOT lbf-ft/ft
MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_POUND_FORCE_INCH_PER_FOOT lbf-in-ft
MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_KIP_FORCE_FOOT_PER_FOOT kip-ft/ft
MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_KIP_FORCE_FOOT_PER_INCH kip-ft/in
MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_KIP_FORCE_INCH_PER_FOOT kip-in/ft
MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_KIP_FORCE_INCH_PER_INCH kip-in/in
WIRE_GAUGE_AWG AWG
WIRE_GAUGE_MILLIMETER mm
WIRE_GAUGE_INCH in
WIRE_GAUGE_MIL mil
WIRE_GAUGE_CIRCULAR_MIL cmil
WIRE_GAUGE_KILO_CIRCULAR_MIL kcmil
WIRE_GAUGE_SQUARE_MILLIMETER mm
2

NPD_NATIVE_INCH native
NPD_NATIVE native


A P P E N D I X C
You must consider naming limitations when creating and modifying data used by the software.
Naming limitations include restrictions on the length and content of names, such as database
table, view, and column names. These restrictions also affect reference data names.
Both SQL Server and Oracle use keywords and future keywords. Check the SQL Server or
Oracle documentation before you choose names for your metadata objects so that the names
you choose do not clash with SQL or Oracle keywords.
The following table shows the name length limitations in the reference data.
Name Maximum for SQL Server Maximum for Oracle
Codelist name 128 characters 30 characters
Codelist long or short
description
255 characters 255 characters
Property name 23 characters 23 characters
Interface name 23 characters 23 characters
Part class name (sheet
name)
121 characters 23 characters
Piping commodity name 128 characters 128 characters

Oracle allows only 30 characters for the database name of a table, view, or store procedure,
while SQL Server allows 128 characters.
Do not use special characters in names. Special characters include: | . - ! ? + ' % , ; & ~ * <
>
See Also
Appendix: Select Lists (Codelists) (on page 133)
Appendix: Name Limitations in
Reference Data
Appendix: Name Limitations in Reference Data



A P P E N D I X D
The end-user software delivery includes additional reference data and samples.
Additional Data
The additional workbooks are delivered in the [Product
Directory]\CatalogData\BulkLoad\AdditionalDataFiles folder. These files are not bulk loaded. If
you want to use this data, you will need to bulk load the workbooks into your Catalog database.
The following table summarizes the additional data files.
File name Description
Delta folders Contains delta files for migrating reference data between
versions of the software. The delta files follow a naming
convention to assist you in migration. The name consists of:
1) a number to indicate order of bulkloading, 2) an
abbreviation of the bulkload mode, 3) the version- to-version
upgrade, and 4) the name of the original workbook. Hence,
for the V2007 to V2009 delta upgrade, the file name is
1_AMD_Delta_2007_2009_Workbookname.xls.
Drawings-
ExtendCustomAttributes.xls
Provides a way to add custom attributes in the Drawings and
Reports task. For more information, see the Drawings and
Reports Reference Data Guide.
Equipment_SE.xls,
Equipment_SE_Sym.xls
Provides Solid Edge equipment parts and symbols.
GIF files Provides graphics for structural cross sections.
HS_Bline files Provides Cooper B-Line cable tray parts for hangers and
supports.
HS_Correspondence Provides ship-style generic supports.
HS_GenericAssy files Provides ship-style generic supports.
HS_GenericParts files Provides ship-style generic supports.
HS_Halfen_Assy files Provides Halfen assemblies for hangers and supports.
HS_Halfen_PC files Provides Halfen Powerclick parts for hangers and supports.
HS_HgrAisc_Deprecated.xls Provides parts for hangers and supports based on the
American Institute of Steel Construction standard.
HS_HgrAust-05_Deprecated.xl
s
Provides parts for hangers and supports based on the
Australian Steel Table, 2005.
You must bulk load StructCrossSections- Euro.xls
with this workbook.
HS_HgrEuro_OTUA_Deprecat
ed.xls
Provides parts for hangers and supports based on the
European OTUA standard.
Appendix: Other Reference Data


You must bulk load StructCrossSections- Japan.xls
with this workbook.
HS_HVAC_Assy.xls
HS_HVAC_Assy_Codelist.xls

HS_HVAC_Parts.xls
HS_HVAC_Parts_Codelist.xls

HS_Lisega.xls,
HS_Lisega_Codelist.xls
Provides parts for hangers and supports from the Lisega
catalog.
HS_Marine.xls
HS_Marine_Assy.xls
HS_Marine_Assy_Codelist.xls

HS_Power1_Assy.xls
HS_Power1_Assy_Codelist.xls
HS_Power1_Assy_Parts.xls

HS_PSL.xls
HS_PSL_Codelist.xls

HS_RestraintSupports.xls
HS_ShipSteel.xls Provides ship-style generic supports.
HS_Str-AISC-LRFD-3.0.xls,
HS_Str-AISC-Metric.xls,
HS_Str-AISC-SHAPES-3.1.xls
,
HS_Str-AUST-05.xls,
HS_Str-AUST.xls,
HS_Str-BS.xls,
HS_Str-Chile.xls,
HS_Str-China-2006.xls,
HS_Str-CISC-7.2.xls,
HS_Str-CISC-8.1.xls,
HS_Str-EURO-OTUA-2002.xls
,
HS_Str-Euro.xls,
HS_Str-Japan-2005.xls,
HS_Str-Japan.xls,
HS_Str-Russia.xls,
Hs_Str-SAISC-2002.xls



HS_Struct-AISC-LRFD-3.0.xls,
HS_Struct-AISC-Metric.xls,
HS_Struct-AISC-SHAPES-3.1.
xls
HS_Struct-AUST-05.xls,
HS_Struct-AUST.xls,
HS_Struct-BS.xls,
HS_Struct-Chile.xls,
HS_Struct-China-2006.xls,
HS_Struct-CISC-7.2.xls,
HS_Struct-CISC-8.1.xls,
HS_Struct-EURO-OTUA-2002.
xls
HS_Struct-Euro.xls,
HS_Struct-Japan-2005.xls,
HS_Struct-Japan.xls,
HS_Struct-Russia.xls,
Hs_Struct-SAISC-2002.xls

HS_TrayShip.xls,
HS_TrayShip_Assy.xls,
HS_TrayShip_Assy_Codelist.x
ls, HS_TrayShip_Codelist.xls

HS_Util_Metric.xls,
HS_Util_Metric_Codelist.xls
Provides parts for utility hangers and supports. The data is
metric.
StructCrossSections files Provides structural cross section data based on different
standards.
StructEmbedments.xls Provides embedded plate assembly for demonstration of
importing embedded plates from CIMsteel.
StructMemPartFireproofing.xls Provides properties for fireproofing structural members.
Sample Reference Data
Sample reference data is delivered in the [Product
Directory]\CatalogData\BulkLoad\SampleDataFiles folder. You can use these samples as a
guide when customizing the data. The table below lists the delivered samples.
1S6470 Catalog.xls
1S6470 Specification.xls
Provides a representative bio- pharm piping
specification (1S6470), which allows you to set
up and test different types of clamps.
4C0844 Catalog.xls
4C0844 Specification.xls

9L3760 Catalog.xls
9L3760 Specification.xls
Provides a representative hub and clamp
specification (9L3760), used in the oilfield
industry.


Additional data for ASME B16.47 Flanges
Catalog.xls
Additional data for ASME B16.47 Flanges
Specification.xls
Automated Selection of Parts at Spec Break
Rules.xls

Axial Roof Ventilator BD40C Sample
Data.xls
Provides an axial roof ventilator (HVAC
equipment).
Bay Light Fixture Sample Data.xls Provides a bay light fixture (electrical equipment).
Bio Pharm Catalog.xls Provides biopharmaceutical data.
Bio Pharm Specification.xls Provides biopharmaceutical specifications and
rules.
Bolt Commodity Code Substitution.xls Provides a representative Bolt Commodity
Substitution rule.
Bolt Diameter Equivalence.xls Provides a representative Bolt Diameter
Equivalence rule.
BoltSelection Filter for Nozzles Sample
data.xls
Provides data for nozzles that require special
bolting.
Cable Tray 90 Degree Expanding Reducing
Elbow Sample Data.xls
Provides sample data for cable tray expanding
and reducing elbows.
Cable Tray Additional Part Data.xls Provides Cooper B-Line cable tray specifications
and data.
Cable Tray Barrier Parts.xls Provides cable tray barrier parts
Cable Tray Around Vessels.xls Provides data for vessel tray systems.
Cable Tray Reducing Tee Sample Data.xls Provides cable tray reducing tee data.
Cable Tray Sample Data for Variable Angle
Bends.xls
Provides adjustable angle cable tray bend
fittings.
Center Web Saddle Component Sample
Data.xls
Provides a center web saddle assembly for use
with pumps.
Centrifugal Fan BIA SWSI Sample Data.xls Provides a centrifugal fan (HVAC equipment).
Clamp-on Flow Sensor Sample Data.xls Provides representative data for a clamp-on
sensor, which is an instrument placed on a pipe.
ComponentInsulationExclusion.xls Provides data for excluding components from
having insulation.
Conduit SampleData.xls Includes part information for electrical metallic
tubing and PVC conduit.
CustomScaleCodelist.xls
Direct Drive Tubeaxial Fan TA Sample
Data.xls
Provides a tube axial fan (HVAC equipment).


E[3-digit number] Equipment Sample
Data.xls
Provides data for equipment assemblies.
Electrical Disconnect Switch Sample Data.xls Provides data for an electrical disconnect switch
assembly.
Electrical Equipment.xls Provides miscellaneous electrical equipment
including a transformer, motor, control switch,
and variable frequency drive.
Electrical Panelboard Sample Data.xls Provides an electrical panelboard.
Emergency Beacon Sample Data.xls Provides an emergency beacon light (electrical
equipment).
Equipment Ends Component Sample
Data.xls
Provides data for different equipment end type
assemblies.
Field Lining Thickness.xls Provides sample field lining thickness data for
use with the 1C0100 and 1C0101 specifications.
Flange Insulation Kits Sample Data.xls Provides data for flange insulation kits to test bolt
length calculations.
Flared Piping Catalog.xls Provides catalog data for a piping spec using
flared pipe.
Flared Piping Specification.xls Provides specification data for a piping spec
using flared pipe.
FlexibleHoseAssemblyRuleData.xls Assembly Rule Data for the Route Flexible Pipe
command is Piping
FlexibleHoseCodelists.xls Select lists used for the Route Flexible Pipe
command in Piping
Fluorescent Light Fixture Sample Data.xls Provides a fluorescent light fixture assembly
(electrical equipment).
GasketSelection Filter for Nozzles Sample
Data.xls
Provides data for nozzles that require a special
gasket.
Handrail Mount Fluorescent Light Fixture
Sample Data.xls

Hatch Cover Sample Data.xls
High Mast Flood Light Fixture Sample
Data.xls

High Pressure Blower Sample Data.xls
Horizontal Pump [Type] Sample Data.xls Provides data for horizontal pumps of various
types.
Horizontal Vessel Nested Heads Sample
Data.xls
Provides data for a horizontal vessel assembly
(variable head options).
Use this workbook as a sample when you
want to add customized user attributes to certain


objects. An example is adding attributes to pipe
runs.
HVAC Sample Equipments.xls
Hvac SampleData.xls
IFCCustomInterfaces.xls
Instrument Sample Data.xls
Instrument Transmitter Sample Data.xls
Jacketed Piping Catalog.xls
Jacketed Piping Specification.xls
Lighting Fixture BH Type 1 Sample Data.xls
Lighting Fixture BHAR Sample Data.xls
Lighting Fixture BHDR Sample Data.xls
Lighting Fixture BTAR Sample Data.xls
Lighting Fixture BTDR Sample Data.xls
Manhole Cover Sample Data.xls
Marine Hatch Cover Sample Data.xls
McGill HVAC Catalog.xls
Metstrut Cable Tray Data.xls
Non Radial Branches.xls
Offset Web Saddle Component Sample
Data.xls

Pipe Bending Manufacturability rules.xls
Pipe Sleeve with Puddle Flange Sample
Data.xls

Piping Commodity Procurement Data.xls
Piping Specialty Sample Data.xls
Pressure Transmitter Sample Data.xls
Pullpit or Manhole Sample Data.xls
Reportable Commodities for Filters.xls
Roof Exhauster ACX Sample Data.xls
Roof Exhauster ATB Sample Data.xls
Ruskin HVAC Sample Data.xls
Sample Codelists.xls
Sample Data Flange Face Adapter.xls
Sample Data for 45 Degree Angle Valve.xls


Sample Data for Angle Lift Check Valve.xls
Sample Data for Butterfly Valve.xls
Sample Data for Cable Tray Parts.xls
Sample data for Cable tray Riser Box.xls
Sample Data for Catch Basin Type F.xls
Sample Data for Catch Basin.xls
Sample Data for Check Valve with External
Spring Operator.xls

Sample data for Concentric Reducer
Biological-pharmaceutical.xls

Sample Data for Coupling.xls
Sample Data for Deck Scupper.xls
Sample Data for Detailed Valves.xls
Sample Data for Double Basket Strainers.xls
Sample Data for Dresser Coupling.xls
Sample Data for Drilling Templates of
Flanges.xls

Sample Data for Elbows.xls
Sample Data for Exhaust Heads.xls
Sample data for Expansion Joints.xls
Sample Data for Filters.xls
Sample Data for Fire and Safety Symbols.xls
Sample Data for Fitting Reducer.xls
Sample Data for Fittings.xls
Sample Data for Flame Arresters.xls
Sample Data for Flanged Elbow-Pipet.xls
Sample Data for Flanged Olet.xls
Sample Data for Flex Coupling.xls
Sample Data for Fluorescent Lighting Fixture
without Reflector.xls

Sample Data for Foam Chamber.xls
Sample Data for GooseNeck Bull Plug.xls
Sample Data for Grade Ring.xls
Sample Data for Half Coupling.xls
Sample Data for Hose Connection.xls


Sample Data for Hose Couplings.xls
Sample Data for Hydraulic Flanges.xls
Sample Data for Jacketed Piping
Symbols.xls

Sample Data for JIS Fittings.xls
Sample Data for Lap Joint Flanges.xls
Sample Data for Latrolet.xls
Sample Data for Long Sweep Tees.xls
Sample Data for Long Tangent Elbows.xls
Sample Data for Manhole.xls
Sample Data for Mining Symbols.xls
Sample Data for Mitered Elbows.xls
Sample Data for MultiCableTransit.xls
Sample Data for On-the-fly Instruments.xls
Sample Data for On-the-fly Specialties.xls
Sample Data for Open and Blind Spacer
set.xls

Sample Data for Orifice Flanges with Multi
Taps.xls

Sample Data for Orifice Flanges with Two
Taps.xls

Sample Data for Rupture Disc with Holder.xls
Sample Data for Saddles.xls
Sample Data for Sight Flow Indicators.xls
Sample Data for Silencers.xls
Sample Data for Siphons.xls
Sample Data for Spectacle Blind.xls
Sample Data for Steam Traps.xls
Sample Data for Strainers.xls
Sample Data for Street Elbows.xls
Sample Data for Surface Mounted
Components.xls

Sample Data for Surface Mounted Doubler
Plate.xls

Sample Data for Surface Mounted Insert
Plate.xls



Sample Data for Surface Mounted Pipe
Sleeve With Seal.xls

Sample Data for Surface Mounted Pipe
Sleeve.xls

Sample Data for Tapered Spacers.xls
Sample Data for Tee with asymmetric
branch.xls

Sample Data for Trimmable Olets.xls
Sample Data for Trimmable Reducing
Tee.xls

Sample Data for True Wye.xls
Sample data for Underground and Sanitary
Symbols.xls

Sample Data for Vacuum Piping.xls
Sample Data for Valve Operators.xls
Sample Data for Valves.xls
Sample Data for Versionable Pipe Specs.xls
Sample Data for Zero Radius Elbow.xls
Sample Data Piping Specification.xls
Sample Data Torus Miter Equipment
Components.xls

Sample End Generic Data for Socket Welded
Fittings based on Socket Wall Thickness.xls

Sequence Electrical Parts Naming Rules
AMD mode.xls

Skirt Base Plate Type A Component Sample
Data.xls

Skirt Base Plate Type B Component Sample
Data.xls

Skirt Base Plate Type C Component Sample
Data.xls

Skirt Base Plate Type D Component Sample
Data.xls

Slip Fitter Flood Light Fixture Sample
Data.xls

Socket Offset Rule.xls
Spiral Stair Tank Equipment Comp Sample
Data.xls



Spiral Stair Tank Equipment Sample Data.xls
Stanchion Fluorescent Type A Handrail
Mount Light Sample Data.xls

Stanchion Fluorescent Type B Handrail
Mount Light Sample Data.xls

Standard Nozzle Data.xls
Street Light Fixture Sample Data.xls
Support Legs Component Sample Data.xls
Switch Gear Equipment Sample Data.xls
Switch Gear Sections Component Sample
Data.xls

SystemDotNetNamingRules.xls
Systems.xls
SystemUserDefinedDefaultProperties.xls Provides default properties for piping, electrical,
and conduit systems.
Titus HVAC Catalog.xls
TJ Cope CableTray Sample Data.xls Provides sample data for cable tray from the TJ
Cope catalog.
Union Fitting Assembly Data.xls Provide data for union fitting assemblies.
Utility Blower BIUB Sample Data.xls Provides a utility blower (HVAC equipment).
Vertical Pump Symbol OH3 Sample Data.xls Provides data for vertical pumps (API 610 Type
OH3).
Vertical Pump Type [Type] Sample Data.xls Provides data for vertical suspended pumps,
single and double casings.
Vertical Vessel Nested Heads Sample
Data.xls
Provides data for a vertical vessel assembly
(variable head options).
Before bulk loading this workbook, you
must bulk load the Equipment Ends
Component Sample Data.xls workbook.
Victaulic Catalog.xls
Victaulic Codelists.xls
Victaulic Plant Rules.xls
Victaulic Spec A4.xls
Victaulic Spec A11.xls
Wall Exhauster AWX Sample Data.xls Provides a centrifugal wall exhauster (HVAC
equipment).
Wear Plate Equipment Sample Data.xls


Templates
Templates for defining your own reference data are delivered in the [Product
Directory]\CatalogData\BulkLoad\Templates folder. The templates are for the piping and
equipment disciplines.
See Also
Delivered Excel Workbooks (on page 50)




A P P E N D I X E
This section lists frequently-asked questions about reference data.
Catalog Database
Q: How do I create a new Catalog?
Using the Bulkload utility, you can create a starting Catalog database and Catalog Schema
database from a template file named AppRepos.dat for Microsoft SQL Server database or
Apprepos.dmp for Oracle databases.

When using the Bulkload utility to create a new catalog, you must use the AppRepos.dat
template file to create the Catalog Schema. This file is located in [Product
Directory]\DatabaseTemplates on the administrator computer.
Do NOT use the template file named CatalogDB.dat to create a new catalog with the
Bulkload utility.
For more information, see Bulk Load Database with Data (on page 82).
Custom Interfaces
Q: What is an interface?
An interface is a collection of attributes. For more information about interfaces, see Adding and
Modifying Custom Interfaces (on page 61) and Custom Interfaces Sheet (on page 68).
Q: What is the Custom Interfaces sheet for?
The Custom Interfaces sheet provides a method to define user-defined interfaces and add
attributes to classes. It also provides a mechanism to link between class attributes and
parametric symbol arguments.
Q: How can I create a new interface?
You can create a new interface using the Custom Interfaces sheet and then add it to the
Catalog Schema using the Bulkload utility. You can also add an interface by adding an attribute
associated with the interface to an existing class sheet and running the Bulkload utility in the
modify mode.
Q: Do I need to add the letter A in the first column to add the new interface?
No. The Bulkload utility does not recognize the update modes for the Custom Interfaces sheet.
It tries to relate the interface to the classes in the workbook.
Q: Do I need to synchronize the Model with the Catalog after adding new interfaces?
Yes. If the new interfaces were created on existing classes, then you need to synchronize the
Model with the Catalog database.
Q: Do I need to re-generate the Reports databases after adding new interfaces?
Yes. You must re-create the Reports databases in order to query or report on the new attributes.
You must first synchronize the Model with the Catalog.
Appendix: Questions and Answers
about Reference Data
Appendix: Questions and Answers about Reference Data


Q: How can I delete user interfaces?
You can delete an existing interface by typing the letter D in the first column of the interface row
and running the Bulkload utility in the delete mode. This action does not actually delete the
interface from the Catalog Schema; it removes the interface from all of its implemented classes.
Q: What is the limitation of an interface name?
The interface names cannot exceed 23 characters. The Bulkload utility will not include warnings
in the log file if interface names exceed this limit. For more information about limitations on
names, see Appendix: Name Limitations in Reference Data (on page 293).
Q: Can I add additional attributes on existing user interfaces?
Yes. You can add attributes to existing interfaces by typing A in the first column of the rows to
add.
Q: Do I need to synchronize the Model with the Catalog database after adding new attributes on
existing interface?
After adding new attributes to an existing interface, the user must synchronize the Model with
the Catalog database. Also, you must re-create the Reports databases in order to query and
report on the new attributes.
Q: Can I modify any of the data in existing attributes?
No, you cannot modify existing attributes after bulk loading them.
Q: What is the limitation of an attribute name?
Attribute names cannot exceed 23 characters. The Bulkload utility will not include warnings in
the log file if attribute names exceed this limit. For more information about limitations on names,
see Appendix: Name Limitations in Reference Data (on page 293).
Q: Must the attribute name be unique for all interfaces?
No. An attribute with the same name can exist on more than one interface.
On a part class sheet, you can scope the user attributes based on their interfaces and symbol
parameters. The scoping syntax is: Interface::UserAttribute<Symbol Parameter>.
Q: Can I create a new interface with the same name as a deleted interface?
No. If you "delete" an interface and want to re-bulk load it with new properties, you must change
the interface name. However, you can restore back the deleted interface by re- bulk loading it
with the same attribute.
Q: Why does the system display all the attributes for that interface if the object uses only one of
them?
When an object uses a single attribute from an interface, the object also inherits all the attributes
for that interface regardless of whether the object uses the other attributes.
Q: I want to add user attributes to a class, such as pipe runs. How do I do this?
Open the Systems.xls file, which is delivered in the [Product
Directory]\CatalogData\DataFiles\BulkLoad\SampleDataFiles folder. This file provides a sample
that you can follow. Create a custom interface, and then map the class name to your new
interface. For more information, see Add User Attributes to a Class (on page 67).


Codelists
Q: Where are the user-defined codelist tables stored?
User-defined codelist tables are added to the Catalog Schema under the User Defined Package
namespace. For more information about namespaces, see Select List (Codelist) Namespaces
(on page 144).
Q: Do I need to add the letter A to add the codelist table?
Yes. The system creates the codelist table using the first column name. You must use the letter
A to add the codelist values into the codelist table. The name for a codelist is not necessarily the
sheet name in the workbook.
Q: Can the user create a hierarchical codelist table (a two- level codelist, for example)?
Yes. For example, the Commodity Option codelist in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook is a
hierarchical codelist. You can find this workbook in the [Product
Directory]\CatalogData\BulkLoad\DataFiles folder.
You can also create hierarchical codelists using the Catalog task functionality.
Q: Can I add new codelist values to existing codelist tables?
Yes, you can add simple codelists (without a hierarchy) unless otherwise specified on the sheet.
For existing hierarchical codelists, you can add the lowest level in a hierarchical codelist, but you
must not add any higher levels in the codelist.
Q: Can I start the Head Definition at row 1 on the Excel sheet?
Yes. The Head Definition can start at row 1.
Q: Why can I use the same codelist values in some of the codelists?
The codelist values are only required to be unique in each hierarchy level.
Q: What does the Sort Order column do?
The values in this column specify the order in which to display items in the software.
Q: Can I delete a codelist table?
You cannot delete a codelist table. However, you can delete entries in the selected codelist
table by running the Bulkload utility in the delete mode. The software marks the selected codelist
entries as deleted.
Q: What happens if codelist values are deleted?
The software marks them as deleted items.
Q: Can I modify the short description of a codelist?
Yes. You can modify the short description of a codelist.
Q: Does the name of the codelist have to be unique?
The name for each codelist must be unique in the Catalog Schema.
Q: What is the namespace for user-defined codelists?
The codelist namespace for user-defined codelists is UDP (User Defined Package).
Q: What is the limitation on a codelist name?
The limit for codelist names depends on the server type, SQL Server or Oracle. For more
information about limitations on names, see Appendix: Name Limitations in Reference Data (on
page 293).
Q: What is the limitation on a codelist description?
The limit for the long and short descriptions in a codelist is 255 characters. For more information
about limitations on names, see Appendix: Name Limitations in Reference Data (on page 293).


Part Classes
Q: Does the Custom Interfaces sheet need to be in the same workbook as the part classes?
Yes. The Custom Interfaces sheet must reside in the same workbook as the part classes that
you are bulk loading.
Q: Do I need to synchronize the Model with the Catalog if I edit a part class?
If you modify an existing class definition, you must run the Synchronize Model with Catalog
command on any model that has occurrences of the class that you modified.
Q: How can I delete classes?
You can delete an existing class by typing the letter D in the first column of the Class Type
Definition row and running the Bulkload utility in the delete mode. This action does not actually
delete the class from the Catalog Schema. The software marks the class as a deleted item. You
cannot reuse the part class name in the same database set.
After deleting the class from the catalog, you also must synchronize the model with the catalog
in order to remove all occurrences of the class from the model.
Q: Must the UserClassName field be unique for a class?
Yes. The UserClassName for a class must be unique. If it is not unique, the software will have a
problem displaying the name in the graphical user interface.
Q: Does the order of the attributes in the class sheet matter?
Order of the attributes (columns) is not important. The software uses the names of the attributes
regardless of the order on the sheet.
Q: What is the length limitation on a piping commodity code?
The limit for piping commodity codes is 128 characters. For more information about limitations
on names, see Appendix: Name Limitations in Reference Data (on page 293).
Structure
Q: Can I add additional occurrence attributes on a Cross Section class?
The Cross Section classes do not support occurrence attributes.
Q: Can I edit the Class Type Definition on a cross section class?
You can only edit the SymbolIcon file name. You cannot modify the Reference Standard on any
cross section class.
For more information about structural reference data, see the Structure Reference Data Guide
GUIDs (Globally Unique Identifiers)
Q: What is the purpose of the GUIDs sheet?
GUIDs are registry identifiers for the part classes and interfaces. The primary purpose of the
GUIDs is to create a connection between part classes in the Catalog database and the
occurrences created in the model from those part classes. Do not modify the contents of the
GUIDs sheets in the delivered sample workbooks or in workbooks that you have used to create
a Catalog database set for a project. For more information about GUIDs, see GUIDs Sheet (on
page 70).
See Also


A P P E N D I X F
Metadata consistency is important when copying objects between models with different
catalogs. This topic discusses how to ensure that the metadata in both the source Catalog
Schema and the target Catalog Schema is consistent.
The two catalogs must be consistent in their schema and in their data. However, exceptions
exist. For example, only the object name for a part must be the same. The rest of the data for a
part does not need to be consistent.
While reading the following information about data consistency, it is helpful to know the
difference between user classes and system classes in reference data.
System classes are modeled during design time using the Rose model. User classes are those
classes that the user creates by bulkloading part sheets. Furthermore, there are two types of
user classes that are created during the processing of the part class sheets during bulkloading.
The first type is a definition class, and the other type is an occurrence class. The definition class
name appears in the Catalog task and in the Catalog browser. You can specify the definition
class name in the UserClassName field on the part class sheets. The occurrence class name
appears in the business object hierarchy on the Object Type tab on the Filter Properties dialog
boxes. You can specify the occurrence class name in the OccClassName field on the part class
sheets.
In the delivered reference data, the definition class name and occurrence class name for a part
class are often the same name. For example, on the 3WayBallValve part class sheet in Piping
Catalog.xls, the definition class name and occurrence class name are both specified as 3-Way
Ball Valve.
Catalog Schema Consistency
The user classes must have the same CLSID. A CLSID is an identifier that is assigned when
you specify the schema.
Any of the system classes (non-virtual) that implement virtual interfaces (during the bulkload
process) in the source catalog should have the same set of implemented interfaces in the
target schema.
The user interfaces that are intended to exist in both catalogs must have the same IID. An
IID is an identifier that is assigned when you specify the schema.
The user properties that are intended to exist in both catalogs must have the same DispID.
A DispID is an identifier that is assigned when you specify the schema.
Each user attribute definition in the original schema should match with the definition in the
target catalogs schema. User attribute definition includes its Type, UnitsType, and
PrimaryUnits attributes. For metadata consistency, we are concerned about the following
attributes: Name, Type, UnitsType, PrimaryUnits, and Codelist.
User attributes that are codelisted should have the codelist table exist in the target catalog
schema. In addition, the target schema should have all the values of the codelist table in the
source schema. The valueIDs should match in both schemas. The short and long strings
can be different.
Properties that are mapped to symbol parameters must exist in both catalogs.
Properties associated to an interface that exists only in the source model will not be
exposed in the target model, even though the value of the property from the source object
will probably be copied.
Appendix: Metadata Consistency
Appendix: Metadata Consistency


Properties associated to an interface that does not exist in the source model will be exposed
in the target model, but the values will be NULL.
Catalog Consistency
Catalog objects that are related to model objects being copied must exist in the target
catalog and must have used the same internal name as in the source catalog.
Inconsistencies between catalogs can arise in the following areas:
User class definitions
Custom class definitions
User interface definitions
User attribute definitions
Symbols
When the source and target catalog schemas are different, the case may be that a definition
exists in the source but not in the target. Or, a definition exists in the target but not in the source.
Or, the definitions exist in both the source and target, but the definitions are different. The
procedures to remedy these situations depend on the exact details of the situation.
If you copy a part with different values in the target catalog and the source catalog, the target or
source set of values is used for the part when it is placed in the target model.
For assistance with metadata, contact Intergraph Process, Power & Marine Support.
See Also


A P P E N D I X G
General Setup
The setup instructions are global for the SmartPlant Reference data. They apply to all of the
specs, projects, and product groups in SmartPlant Reference Data.
General configuration settings are defined in the SP3D 10.01 General Configs dialog box. To
display this dialog box, click SP3D Interface > SP3D 10 Config.
For the delivered standard database, the DIN specs require a Transfer Type that will
need this item be set to Y, but the PIP specs (ANSI) will have a Transfer Type that will allow
this be set to N. You can create any Transfer Type that meets your needs.

Appendix: Importing SmartPlant
Reference Data Specs into SmartPlant
3D
Appendix: Importing SmartPlant Reference Data Specs into SmartPlant 3D


Exporting from the SmartPlant Reference Data
Standard Database
The Standard Database holds the information that is compatible with the SmartPlant 3D
specifications. That includes codelists, plant level reference data and rules, specification-level
rules, part data in the catalog, generic piping component data, and piping specification data. The
general idea is that all that information is created, managed and modified in SmartPlant
Reference Data, and then exported to SmartPlant 3D catalogs when needed.
Output from SmartPlant Reference Data is Excel sheets which can be manually bulkloaded into
SmartPlant 3D. These Excel sheets should not be modified prior to downloading, because then
you lose control of further modifications. Output Excel file names are not by default what you
see in this document, but you can rename them to meet your requirements.
Export is done with export job definitions in SmartPlant Reference Data. This is done using the
SP3D 20.01 Export Jobs dialog box available from SP 3D Interface > SP 3D 20 Transfer.
The export job definition is different for ANSI specs and for EN/DIN specs. This
appendix does not deal with ANSI specs.
General Notes
It is better to start with a new destination. The data that you input there is for documentation
purposes only, but the destination itself holds a hook to inventory. If you export again to the
same destination, you might not get a full export but an incremental export related to what
you exported before (that information is stored in the inventory). If you start with a new
destination, you can be sure that inventory is empty.
You create a destination in the form: SP 3D Interface SP 3D 10 Config SP 3D 10.05
Destinations
You can empty a destination in the form: SP 3D Interface SP 3D 20 Transfer SP 3D
20.02 Destination Data
To make sure that your export is not incremental, check the first column in your Excel
sheets. There should be only A letters and not A,M and D letters. The problem arises if
you try to append a worksheet with A,M,D letters, the end result is unpredictable and very
likely bad.
Use Validate Job and Start Job to validate and run these jobs. The Progress tab tells you how
the run went.
If you use Write XLS as the job goal, you need to click Cancel after each run when it is finished.
If you do not, your next run, even for a different export, will end in an error because of this
unfinished export job.


EN/DIN Specifications
The transfer types that need to be extracted from Standard Database are as follows:
SDB_CODE_LISTS - All codelists.
SDB_GENERIC_DATA - Generic dimensional data for EN/DIN specifications.
SDB_DIN_ALL_WO_CDL - EN/DIN specs.
The following dialog boxes specify the export job definitions for each of these exports. Matters of
interest in these dialog boxes include:
Destination - Specifies where you are going to use the export. If changes are made to data in
the standard database and exported to a destination, worksheets in Add/Modify/Delete can be
created based on previously exported data for the specific destination.
Bulkload mode - The default value is ADD_MODIFY_DELETE mode.
Item Mapping - Select SDB_ITEM_MAPPING or DIN_MAPPING depending on the export.
SDB_CODE_LISTS will use SDB_ITEM_MAPPING, SDB_DIN_ALL_WO_CDL and
SDB_GENERIC_DATA will use SDB_DIN_MAPPING
Template - The template is automatically populated when Item Mapping is chosen.
Transfer type - Predefined sets of worksheets to be exported.
Job goal - Select write XLS for a standalone job. The other job goals are designed for the
upcoming .NET interface.
Config - Select SDB config for everything.
Sheet config - This is not an input field, but is typed in automatically based on other selections
Use Validate Job and Start Job to validate and run these jobs. The Progress Tab tells you
how the run went.


SDB_CODE_LISTS - Selected Sheets tab gets populated based on the Transfer Type in the
upper part of the dialog box after you click Save.



SDB_DIN_CODE_LISTS - Selected Sheets tab gets populated based on the Transfer Type in
the upper part of the dialog box after you click Save.

SDB_GENERIC_DATA - This is a specific transfer type not related to any particular piping
specification. Use DIN_MAPPING to get EN/DIN standard data.


The selected Sheets tab is populated based on the selections in the upper part of the dialog box
after you click Save.

SDB_DIN_ALL_WO_CDL - Selected Sheets tab gets populated based on the Transfer
Type in the upper part of the dialog box after you click Save.
The selected Sheets tab is populated based on the selections in the upper part of the dialog
box after you click Save.
On the Selected Spec Items tab you need to select the specs to export. You can select
them one by one, or you can select them all with the Insert Specs command and then
delete the unnecessary specs with the Delete Record command. The Delete Record
command is on the top bar of the screen.


The selected Idents tab gets populated with idents when you click Validate Job or Start
Job.



Bulkloading into SmartPlant 3D
In order to use specs in SmartPlant 3D, you need to bulkload them into a catalog. Start with an
empty catalog that you can create with SmartPlant 3D tools. You can use either Project
Manager or the Database Wizard for that. For the catalog template in the case of an empty
catalog, you need to use the AppRepos template. For further information how catalogs are
created in SmartPlant 3D, please refer to the SmartPlant 3D documentation.
For successful creation of a catalog, you need to follow the correct order, correct bulkloading
methods, and you need to bulkload all the necessary files needed for a certain discipline.
This document deals only with the data needed for piping discipline.
The files that you need to bulkload are slightly different for ANSI and EN/DIN specs.
This appendix does not deal with ANSI specs.


EN/DIN Bulkloading
You need to bulkload files in the following manner. Bulkloading is presented below in two steps
for clarity. You can combine these two step in one bulkload task because the software
automatically selects the correct order.
First:
sdb_code_lists
Codelists are bulkloaded using a different section of the Bulkload dialog box. The order
of those files is not significant if there is no overlapping data. You will get warnings of
overlapping data if the same data is present in multiple files.

Second:
generic naming rules.xls
insulation data.xls
sdb_generic_data
SDB_DIN_ALL_WO_CDL


For SmartPlant 3D to work, you need to have generic naming rules in the catalog. For the piping
discipline, you also need insulation data for modeling. Those do not come from SDB, but they
are delivered with SmartPlant 3D catalog data. Intergraph Corporation also recommends
bulkloading Reports.xls.
For EN/DIN specific data, you load generic data and the actual spec data.

These are the requirements for getting the piping discipline to work. For other matters, such as
running isometrics and reports, creating drawings and modeling equipment, you need other data
in your catalog. For a complete list of the data required for each task, see Using Excel
Workbooks to Configure Reference Data (on page 49).




A
abstract part
A part that is only defined by a partial specification and that cannot be materially provided by the
organization that defines the specification.

Active Template Library (ATL)
Set of class templates and wizards supplied with Microsoft C++ Version 5.0 and later. You can
use an ATL when you create ActiveX controls and any other type of object that uses the
Component Object Model (COM) model. Using an ATL is generally preferred over Microsoft
Foundation Classes (MFC), because the implementations are smaller, easier to use, and more
closely tied to the COM model.

angle
The circular measurement taken from the intersection of two pipes at a turn or branch.

approval state
Recorded state of acceptance of information contained in objects within the database. The
approval states indicate a level of confidence in the information stored in the database and
govern the ability of users to alter specific data about a product.
arrangement (accommodation)
Those components of a system arranged in three-dimensional space with accurate dimensional
representation for installation. Various types include electrical, HVAC, machinery, outfitting, and
piping.

attribute
A single type of non-graphics information that is stored about an object such as diameter or end
preparation.
Glossary
Glossary


axis
An imaginary line used to define the orientation of a system or object normally defined in terms
of an x, y, and z-axis. Some 3-D graphic objects have an associated axis used to define the
center or axis for rotations.

B
basic design
Engineering definition of the model and its systems.

bill of material (BOM)
Hierarchical decomposition of a product into constituent assemblies and parts. Specific types of
BOMs exist (for example, an EBOM is a bill of material from the point of view of an engineering
department; an MBOM is a bill of material from the point of view of manufacturing).

bulkload
The process by which reference data in Microsoft Excel workbooks is loaded into the Catalog
database.
C
catalog
Repository of information about components and materials used in construction. When you use
catalog parts in the model, the software places an occurrence of the catalog part in the project.
This occurrence is a copy of the actual catalog part.

Catalog database
The database that contains the reference data. Each Plant/Ship database can reference a
different Catalog database.

chain
A set of continuous and tangent segments.

Glossary


change history
Process of recording information such as who, when, and why for any given modification.

change management
Software features or manual procedures for managing the consequence of change. For
example, software can support a change management feature to report drawings that need
updating as a result of a change in a 3-D model.

change propagation
Ability of the software to intelligently modify dependent design information to reflect change in a
higher order object.

class
Grouping of individual objects that share some very significant, common characteristics.

classification folder
A folder in the Catalog hierarchy that contains part classes. Classification folders are one level
above part classes. The ClassNodeType and R-ClassNodeDescribes sheets in the Microsoft
Excel workbooks define the classification folders.

codelist
A set of acceptable values for a particular property that can be referred to by an index number or
selected in a combo box. For example, the codelist for the material specification allows you to
select from a set of standard entries, such as ASTM A183-F316 Stainless Steel.

commodity code
A user-defined code that provides an index to parts in a catalog.
commodity item
A standard component found in a manufacturer catalog (an off-the-shelf component).

component
Physical part that a feature generates.

Glossary


concurrent access
Ability of the software to allow multiple users to simultaneously access and modify the design of
a model.

consolidated tasks
A collection of tasks run in batch. For example, the software allows you to extract a set of
drawings immediately or to schedule the batch extraction for a future time.

constraints
A logical restriction that controls how part symbols ports relate to each other and to reference
ports. There are four constraints: parallel, perpendicular, coincident, and distance.

contract
A Work Breakdown Structure object representing a scope of work, usually performed by an
external supplier. The contract is related to a project and appears in the Work Breakdown
Structure hierarchy.
coordinate
The location of a point along the X-, Y-, or Z-axis.

coordinate system
A geometric relation used to denote the location of points in the model. The most common
coordinate system is the rectangular coordinate system, whereby points are located by
traversing the X-, Y-, and Z-axes of the model. Normally, coordinate systems have their origin
defined as 0,0,0.
cutting plane
A plane that cuts through an object.

D
damage records
Data relating to the damage and repair of structure or components that occurred during or after
construction of a plant.

Glossary


data interchange
Capability to output the design, or portions of the design, in a standard format for use or
movement to another computer software system.

database
Repository for the product model data. The database contains information to describe individual
objects in the data model and the relationships between objects as appropriate.

database backup
Process of recording a backup copy of the complete database or the incremental changes since
the date that the last complete copy was created.

database break and recovery
Utilities used to restore a database after files are corrupted.

database copy
Functionality to copy large collections of model objects from one design project to another
design project.

database management
Functionality related to managing a product model database.

database monitor record
Transactions that occur in order to provide database (DB) recovery after a stop in response with
a minimum of lost data.

degree
The highest polynomial factor in the curve or surface mathematical definition. A line is a degree
1 curve, while a cubic B-spline is a degree 3 curve.

design alternative
Difference in a design represented by a separate version. A design alternative can be a new
design prepared as a proposed change, or one of several elective options that the builder or
customer selects. Each design alternative has an identification assigned so the user can
uniquely refer to the design alternatives.
Glossary


design approval log
Record of review and approval of parts of the design.

design data auto input
Automation in loading existing design data into a new design database.

design documents
Drawings, sketches, material lists, procedures, and so forth that are generated during the design
phase.
design object
Any object with properties that you can select. A design object can be related to one or more
contracts of different types, but related only to one contract of a given type.

design progress check
Analysis of the content of the design to some metric unit that gives an idea of the degree of
completion.

design review
Functionality to support rapid viewing of the design and markup of features with comments.

design service
Any general system services related to the design function.

design standard
Feature or object used in plant design that has been determined to the normal or approved way
of accomplishing a design requirement. In the context of computer software, the term refers to
computer functionality to support standards, not the standard itself.
detail schedule
Lowest level of schedule used to manage and track work progress.

Glossary


distributed systems
Systems consisting of sequential parts with a distributive characteristic (for example, pipes
distribute fluids, HVAC distributes air, cabling distributes power, and structure distributes loads).

distribution systems
Term synonymous and used interchangeably with the term distributed systems.

documentation
Drawings and other records that you must produce to document, obtain approval, or build the
design.

drawing tool
Tool that helps in the process of creating, modifying, or manipulating objects. Examples are
PinPoint and SmartSketch.

E
easting
A term that describes an east coordinate location in a coordinate system.

edge
A topological object that represents a trimmed curve bounded by a start and end vertex.

edge distance
The distance from the center of a bolt or rivet to the edge of a plate or flange.

element
Primitive geometric shape such as a line, circle, or arc.

equipment catalog
Catalog of equipment geometry and limited properties that the software uses to identify and
visualize equipment and its placement in the model. The catalog is not the source for the total
specification and ordering data for the object.

F
Glossary


fabricate
To cut, punch, and sub-assemble members in the shop.

face-to-face
The overall length of a component from the inlet face to the outlet face.

fasteners
Bolts and rivets used to connect structural members.

fence
Boundary or barrier that separates or closes off an area. To surround or close like a fence.
field adjustment
Material added to the neat design geometry of piping or structural parts to allow for fit up in the
case that extra material is required due to uncontrolled variance in the manufacturing and
construction process.

flavor
A different variation of a symbol. Each variation has different occurrence property values.
focus of rotation
A point or line about which an object or view turns.

full penetration weld
A type of weld where the weld material extends through the complete thickness of the
components being joined.

function points
Part of the requirements documentation, function points are the smallest granularity of a
requirement statement that describe specific detailed actions that the software performs.
functional block diagram
Schematic representation of a system (piping, electrical, ventilation) showing system parts and
their relationship. You use symbols to represent equipment and components. A connecting
network of lines illustrates their relationship. Taken together, the symbols and the network
illustrate the function of the system.

Glossary


furnishings
Parts, like movable articles and fittings that normally are not associated with a system (for
example, a chair).

G
generic specific
Object that is parametrically defined or defined to suit a family of specific parts (for example,
International Standards parametrics). For example, a 100 - 200 gpm pump in the catalog can
provide a general shape to appear in the model until a specific object has been identified. See
also specific and specific object.

GUIDs
Acronym that stands for Globally Unique Identifiers. The software automatically creates the
GUIDs sheet in the Excel workbooks when you create the Catalog database and schema. The
purpose of storing GUIDs within Excel workbooks is to help you keep track of what has been
loaded into the database. Storing GUIDs also helps to avoid the situation in which a
replacement Catalog database causes existing models to become invalid.

H
host location
The first Location created for a Site. This Host Location is defined when the Database Wizard
creates the Site database.

host server
The database server where the Site database was created using the Database Wizard.
Alternatively, if it is a restored database set, the Host Server is the database server where the
Site database is restored. The Host Server in a Workshare environment contains the origin for
the Site, Site Schema, Catalog, and Catalog Schema databases. Consequently, most Project
Management and reference data work must take place at the Host.

I
Glossary


initial design
Early stage of design work, generally before contract, used to estimate construction costs and
provide a rough concept of the intended plant. Contains information relating to a plant created
during its initial (concept) design period.

initial structural plan
Principal structural plan for the plant; also called a construction profile.

instantiation
Occurrence of a catalog object at a specific geometric location in the model.

interference checking
A process that identifies possible collisions or insufficient clearance between objects in the
model.

J
job order
Industrial authorization for accomplishing work; synonymous with a work order.

K
kinematics analysis
Analysis of mechanical motion.

ksi
Kips per square inch.

L
leg length analysis
Preferred term is welding length analysis.

Glossary


library
Resource of reference information that a software user can access in developing a plant design.

life cycle database
Information developed to assist in the maintenance and modernization of delivered plants.

link
Way to store information about another file in your document. You can update a link so that
changes in the file appear in your document.
lintel
A horizontal member used to carry a wall over an opening.

load group
A grouping in which all components feature uniform load limits and stress safety characteristics.
For example, a pipe clamp from load group 5 will have a maximum nominal load of 20 kN and
so will a threaded rod from load group 5.

location
A Location is defined by three user-defined inputs: 1) a unique name, 2) a unique name rule ID,
and 3) the server where the Site databases reside for that Location. A Location is defined and
created when the Site database is created using the Database Wizard. Additional Locations can
be created in the Project Management task. Each Location is a Site-level object, thus other
Plants within the same Site collection can use the Locations when the Plants are configured for
Workshare.
logical member
An object in the model used to represent the design topology.

M
machinery
Major pieces of equipment installed in a plant.

Glossary


macro
A sequence of actions or commands that can be named and stored. When you run the macro,
the software performs the actions or runs the commands. You can create the macros in Visual
Basic or other OLE-aware programming applications. Some of the other OLE-aware
programming applications are Visual Basic for Applications, Visual C++, and so forth.

maintenance envelope
A rectangular box around the part for clearance during maintenance operations.
maintenance records
Records of breakdown, repair, and overhaul of equipment.

material analysis
Analysis of a completed design work for extracting detailed material requirements; also called
material lists.

material list
An option category that controls the format and content of the bill of materials.

methods
Objects in the database that describe the manufacturing methods to the component parts of a
plant.

move from point
Starting point for an action. For example, when you move an equipment object, the Move From
point determines the point of origin for the move.

move to point
Ending point for an action. For example, when you move an equipment object, the Move To
point determines where you want the move to stop.

MTO neutral file
A non-graphic output file that can be fed into a material control system. MTO stands for Material
Take-Off.

N
Glossary


node
1) One of the set of discrete points in a flow graph. 2) A terminal of any branch of a network or a
terminal common to two or more branches of a network. 3) An end point of any branch or a
network or graph, or a junction common to two or more branches.

northing
A term that describes a north coordinate location in a coordinate system.

nozzle
A piping connection point to a piece of equipment.

nozzle standout
The shortest allowable distance between the connection point of a nozzle and the start point of a
turn on the leg connected to the nozzle.

NPD (Nominal Piping Diameter)
The diameter of a pipe.

O
object
A type of data other than the native graphic format of the application.

occurrence (of part or equipment)
Instantiation of a part of equipment in the plant that refers to the part library; an instance of a
specific object. The design can be built several times and therefore the occurrence can apply to
more than one hull. Typically, an occurrence points back to a specific object, either for its
complete definition, as in the case of a particular valve, or for its made from material, as in the
case of a steel plate part cut from sheets. Thus, when a designer selects a component from the
catalog and places it at a location in the space of the plant, the software creates an occurrence
of that object in the plant design.

occurrence property
A characteristic that applies to an individual object in the model. Occurrence properties are
designated with 'oa:' in the reference data workbooks. You can view and modify occurrence
properties on the Occurrence tab of the properties dialog boxes in the software. Depending on
the object, some occurrence properties are read-only.

Glossary


origin
In coordinate geometry, the point where the X-, Y-, and Z-axes intersect.

origin point
The point at which the coordinate system is placed, providing a full Cartesian coordinate system
with positive and negative quadrants. Points are placed at coordinates relative to the origin
point, represented by the X, Y, and Z values.

orthogonal
The characteristic of an element consisting completely of elements positioned at 90-degree
angles. A square is an orthogonal element.

orthographic
A depiction of an object created by projecting its features onto a plane along lines perpendicular
to the plane.

P
P&ID
Diagram that shows the topology, functional components, and special requirements of a piping
system; generally represents the engineering design of the system.

package
Set of closely related classes. (UML)

painting
Computation of paint surface and recording of paint system requirements.

parameter
A property whose value determines the characteristics or behavior of something.
part class
A group of similar objects. You can define part classes in the Excel workbooks. A part class can
have multiple parts. For example, a heat exchanger part class can contain heat exchangers
with different dimensions.

Glossary


part number
Unique identifier of a part.

PDS (Plant Design System)
A comprehensive, intelligent computer-aided design and engineering application for the process,
power, and marine industries. PDS consists of integrated 2-D and 3-D modules that correspond
to engineering tasks in the design workflow.

PinPoint
Tool that allows you to place, move, and modify elements with precision, relative to a reference
point.

principle of superposition
The principle that states that the stresses, strains, and displacements due to different forces can
be combined. This principle is only valid for linear analysis.

Product Data Management (PDM) System
Software intended to manage both product data and documents associated to the product data.
Functionality typically includes: object-based data modeling tools, user administration, business
rules, and document management. Document management typically includes document editing
or reviewing, document mark-up or redline, document storage, and full-text retrieval.

product structure
Hierarchical breakdown or decomposition of a product into constituent parts, volumes, or units.
(For example, a bill of material is one possible type of product structure.)
production planning
Functionality associated with the work breakdown and sequence of the construction of a plant.

promotion
Process of associating approval state with a product version. A product version begins its
existence at a working approval state. When the version is at some level of maturity, its approval
state is elevated to a higher approval state (that is, promoted). Then, further changes must be
carefully controlled and generally require the data set demoted to a working state. One or more
promotions can occur successively higher approval states (between working and approved) to
represent various intermediate levels of review or progressive approval.

Q
Glossary


query select sets
Set of objects that are selected in a query or queries on the database.

R
reference data
The data that is necessary to design plants or ships using the software. Reference data includes
graphical information, such as symbols. It also contains tabular information, such as physical
dimensions and piping specifications.

resource estimation
Rough estimate of material, manpower, and facility utilization for the design and construction of
the plant.

route
1) A line connecting a series of points in space and constituting a proposed or traveled route. 2)
The set of links and junctions joined in series to establish a connection.

S
satellite server
The database server where the replicated databases reside for Workshare. The Satellite Server
is not used unless Workshare is activated.

schema
A database that creates the structure of another database. For example, a schema specifies the
queries, tables, fields, and data types in a database.

schema update utility
Functionality used to assist in processing existing product models to an updated database
structure after users modify or add to the database structure.
site
The top level in the Project Management hierarchy. A Site configuration may contain several
Catalogs, each shared by multiple Plants.

Glossary


site administrator
Person responsible for managing the standards and general parameters for a given plant site
within a Site database.

site setup
Functionality associated with establishing a new plant site or hull for design development.

sketch and trace
User interface for rough definition of a required design feature that typically works in a 2-D
mode.

specifications
Contracted requirements for the plant.

stud
A bolt, threaded on both ends, used to connect components.

suspended floor
A concrete floor system built above and off the ground.
symmetric node
Type of vertex on a curve. A curve with a symmetric node has the same curvature on each side
of the node. A handle can be attached to a symmetric node for editing.

system
A conceptual design grouping that organizes parts in hierarchical relationships. A system
represents a functional view of the model and includes information such as system name, type,
properties, and design specifications for the objects assigned to the system.
T
tag number
User-specific, unique number assigned to an object (for example, CV-101 for a control valve,
HE-2002 for a heat exchanger).

Glossary


target point
The origin for coordinate measurements displayed by PinPoint. You can position the target
point anywhere on the drawing sheet or view.

tolerant geometry
A type of ACIS geometry - either an edge or a vertex - that is outside the tolerance for ACIS and
requires special handling.

trimmed surface
A surface whose boundary is fully or partially inside the 'natural' geometric definition of the
surface. Some or the entire control polygon extends outside the face boundary.

trunk
Feature that quickly reserves space for the distributive systems and other systems that have a
path. Along the trunk are stations that define the cross section and identify part or system
membership.
U
unit/module modeler
Facility of the system to structure collections of equipment and components into a single
identifiable object.

user attributes
A customized property in the reference data. The Custom Interfaces sheets in the Excel
workbooks define these properties. You can list the customized properties on the individual part
class sheets.
V
version control
Ability of the system to manage multiple versions of a single part of the design. Version control
should support conditional analysis and promotion status, as well as alternate design features
among hulls within a plant site.

Glossary


vertex
A topological object that represents a point in the three-dimensional model.

viewset
Set of objects (usually a subset of the entire database) that a view operation uses. Membership
or lack of membership for any object in a viewset does not affect the actual stored
representation of the object, but only its availability or desirability for viewing in the current
scenario.
W
weight and CG analysis
Routines that compute the weight of commodity materials as configured in a given design (for
example, plate and pipe) and determine total weight and center of gravity (CG) for a collection of
material and equipment, as well as the complete plant.

welding
Weld requirements for joining materials. Welding length analysis is the calculation of required
weld dimensions; also called leg length analysis.

wirebody
A topological object that represents a collection of edges jointed at their common endpoints.

wizard
Software routine attached to an application that provides guidance and expert help to a user to
complete one of the functionalities of the application.

work content
Estimation development of metrics from the database that relates to the work hour content of the
various construction units.

work order
Plant authorization for completing work; synonymous with a job order.

Glossary


working plane
The available 2-D plane of movement for endpoint selection.

workset
Set of objects (usually a subset of the entire database) used in an interactive change, add, or
delete operation. Membership or lack of membership for any object in a workset does not
necessarily affect the actual stored representation of an object. However, you can change or
delete an object in a workset that also results in a change or deletion of the stored object.
Similarly, when you add a new object (not currently stored) to a workset, the software also adds
the object container.

workspace
Area that represents the portion of the model data needed to perform the intended task and
includes the user modeling settings.

workspace document
Document into which you can extract a portion of the model data for a user task.

Workspace Explorer
Tree or list representation of objects in your workspace.


A
abstract part 325
Active Template Library (ATL) 325
Add Part Classes to Existing Classification
Folders 77
Add Part Classes to New Classification
Folders 76
Add User Attributes to a Class 67
Adding and Modifying Custom Interfaces
61
Adding Part Classes to the Catalog 75
Administrative Sheets 59
Align Component 144
AllCommon Reference Data 101
AllCommon Sheets 101
AllCommon Sheets and Disciplines 102
AllCommon.xls Workbook 101
angle 325
Anvil_Constant_Dir 145
Anvil_Constant_Sus 145
Anvil_Dyn_Config 145
Anvil_Dyn_Finish 145
Anvil_Dyn_PipeDia 145
Anvil_Dyn_ResOrient 145
Anvil_Dyn_ResType 146
Anvil_Dyn_Stroke 146
Anvil_Dyn_ValveType 146
Anvil_Dyn2_PipeDia 146
Anvil_FIG137_Nuts 146
Anvil_FIG167_Insulat 146
Anvil_FIG218_FlangeW 147
Anvil_FIG255_Insulat 147
Anvil_FIG292_FlangeW 147
Anvil_FIG299_Config 147
Anvil_FIG86_Finish 147
Anvil_Finish 147
Anvil_Rod_Finish 148
Anvil_Shoe_Base 148
Anvil_Shoe_Finish 148
Anvil_Shoe_Type 148
Anvil_Stanchion_Dia 148
Anvil_Strut_Finish 148
Anvil_Variable_ColType 149
Anvil_Variable_Dir 149
Anvil_Variable_RollMat 149
Anvil_Variable_Top 149
Anvil_WithWithout 149
Anvil_YesNo 149
Appendix
Importing SmartPlant Reference Data
Specs into SmartPlant 3D 313
Metadata Consistency 311
Name Limitations in Reference Data
293
Other Reference Data 295
Questions and Answers about Reference
Data 307
Select Lists (Codelists) 133
Units of Measure 261
approval state 325
ApprovalReason 150
arrangement (accommodation) 325
Aspect Code 150
Assembly Inclusion 151
Assembly YesNoAuto 151
Assembly_BBXAlignment 151
Assembly_RefPorts 151
Assembly_Variable_Dir 152
Assembly_WithWithout 152
attribute 325
Automated Flange Selection Option 152
Auxiliary Treatment 152
Axial Profile Category 153
axis 326
B
basic design 326
Bend To Bend Tangent Basis 153
bill of material (BOM) 326
Bolt Diameter Equivalence Option 153
Bolt Extension Option 153
Bolt Hole Patterns 105
Bolt Length Calculation Option 154
Bolt Length Round Off Option 154
Bolt Lubrication Requirements 154
Bolt Option 154
Bolt Type 154
Bolting Requirements 155
Bracket Category 157
Branch Reporting Ownership 157
bsWeldSide 158
bsWeldType 158
Bulk Load Database with Data 82
bulkload 326
Bulkload Dialog Box 86
Bulkload from the Command Line 88
Index
Index


C
Cable Nozzle Sheet 129
Cable Route Status 158
Cable Tray Component Class 158
Cable Tray Component Type 158
Cable Tray Materials 159
Cable Tray Part Data Basis 159
Cable Tray Ports Sheet 129
Cable Tray Type 159
Cable Type 159
Cap Screw Length Round Off Option 159
catalog 326
Catalog database 326
Catalog Hierarchy Sheets 73
Catalog Units of Measure Basis 160
CatalogRoot Sheet 74
chain 326
change history 327
change management 327
change propagation 327
Check Piping Mfg Priority 160
Check Piping Priority 160
Check Planning Priority 160
Clamp Option 160
Clamp Requirement 160
Clamp Selection Basis 161
class 327
classification folder 327
ClassNodeType Sheet 74
Cleaning Requirement 161
Cleaning Responsibility 161
Coating Color 161
Coating Type 161
codelist 327
Collar Category 161
commodity code 327
Commodity Code Builder Option 161
commodity item 327
Commodity Option 162
Compart Coating Color 162
Compart Coating Process 163
Compart Coating Responsibility 163
Compart Coating Status 163
Compart Coating Type 163
Compartment Authorization Class 163
Compartment Bulk Cargo Type 163
Compartment Bulkhead Tightness 164
Compartment Capacity Context 164
Compartment Cargo Context 164
Compartment Coating Applicability 164
Compartment Coating Certification 164
Compartment Coating Inspection 164
Compartment Compartment Group 165
Compartment Compartment Type 165
Compartment Contact Material Type 165
Compartment Damage Location 165
Compartment Damage Type 165
Compartment Design Requirement 165
Compartment Function Type 166
Compartment Insulation Category 166
Compartment Naval Nuclear Class 166
Compartment Naval Safety Category 166
Compartment Naval Security Class 166
Compartment Noise Category 166
Compartment Positional Rel Type 167
Compartment Property Context 167
Compartment Relevant Cargos 167
Compartment Structure Type 167
Compartment Surface Preparation 167
component 327
Component Insulation Exclusion Sheet
118
concurrent access 328
Conduit Ports Sheet 129
Conduit Selection Basis 167
Connection Type 168
consolidated tasks 328
constraints 328
Construction Type 168
contract 328
Control Point Subtype 168
Control Point Type 168
Controlling Access to Attributes 63
coordinate 328
coordinate system 328
Create Commodity Codes 39
Create Exclusive WBS Item 168
Create PDS Export Data Files 30
Creating and Distributing Naming Rules
123
Cross Section Cardinal Points 169
Cross Section Edges 169
Cross Section Shape Types 169
Custom Class Interface List Sheet 70
Custom Interfaces Sheet 68
Custom Interfaces Sheets 61
cutting plane 328
D
damage records 328
data interchange 329
database 329
database backup 329
database break and recovery 329
database copy 329
database management 329
Index


database monitor record 329
Deck Category 169
Define Component Insulation Exclusion
119
Define Manual Information after Translation
33
degree 329
Delivered Excel Workbooks 50
Describing the Common Sheets in the
Workbooks 57
design alternative 329
design approval log 330
design data auto input 330
design documents 330
design object 330
design progress check 330
Design Responsibility 169
design review 330
design service 330
design standard 330
Design Standard 169
detail schedule 330
DIN Wall Thickness Data Sheet 103
distributed systems 331
distribution systems 331
documentation 331
Documentation Comments 21
Door Frame Position 170
Door Type 170
Doors Windows Kinematics 170
Drawing Style Codelist 170
drawing tool 331
Drilling Template Pattern 170
E
easting 331
Eccentric Offset Basis 170
edge 331
edge distance 331
Edge Reinforcement Category 171
Edit the Piping Translation Rules Workbook
30
element 331
Elevation Plane Type 171
EMI 171
EMI Radiator 171
EMI Suceptor 171
End Preparation 171
End Standard 172
Environmental Zone 172
equipment catalog 331
Equipment Component Types 172
Equipment Insulation Material Sheet 117
Equipment Types 172
Examination 173
Exterior Surface Treatment 173
External Welded Pipe Part 173
F
fabricate 332
Fabrication Responsibility 173
Fabrication Type 173
Fabrication Type Basis 174
face-to-face 332
fasteners 332
Feature Type 174
fence 332
field adjustment 332
Fireproofing Exposure Type 174
Fireproofing Method 174
Fireproofing Type 174
Flange Category 174
Flange Face Surface Finish 175
Flange Facing 175
Flange Insulation Kit Type 175
flavor 332
Flip Component 175
Flow Direction 175
Fluid Code 176
focus of rotation 332
Front End Type 176
full penetration weld 332
function points 332
functional block diagram 332
furnishings 333
G
Gasket Inside Diameter Basis 176
Gasket Option 176
Gasket Outside Diameter Basis 176
Gasket Requirement Override 176
Gasket Requirements 177
Gasket Selection Based on Fluid Code
177
Gasket Selection for Mismatched Bolted
Ends Option 177
Gasket Style Number 177
Gasket Type 177
generic specific 333
GenericNamingRules.xls Workbook 125
Geometric Industry Standard 178
Geometry Type 179
Grid Plane Type 197
GUIDs 333
GUIDs Sheet 70
Index


H
Hand Wheel Orientation 197
Handrail Connection Type 197
Handrail End Treatment 197
Handrail Inline Connection Type 198
Handrail Offset 198
Handrail Orientation 198
Handrail Side Connection Type 198
Hazardous Fluid Category 198
Header Branch Size Basis Option 198
Heat Tracing Medium 199
HngSup Associated Part Type 199
HngSup Association Type 199
HngSup BOM Type 199
HngSup Bounding Box Type 199
HngSup Class Node Type 200
HngSup Command 200
HngSup Connect Obj 200
HngSup Connection Type 200
HngSup Cut Type 200
HngSup Discipline 201
HngSup ET Type 201
HngSup Face Selection Type 201
HngSup Joint Type 201
HngSup Manufacturer 201
HngSup Mating Joint Type 202
HngSup Part Class Type 202
HngSup Physical Connection 202
HngSup Port Category 202
HngSup Port Type 202
HngSup Rule Type 203
HngSup Strict Face Selection 203
HngSup Support Type 203
HngSup Type Selection Rule 203
host location 333
host server 333
HVAC Component Types 203
HVAC Insulation Material Sheet 117
HVAC Lining Material 204
HVAC Part Data Basis 204
HVAC Part Generation Basis 204
HVAC Width and Depth Basis 204
I
Icarus Column Base Option 204
Icarus Concrete Type 205
Icarus Exclude End Bent 205
Icarus Grating Type 205
Icarus Pipe Rack Type 205
Icarus Struct Steel Analysis 205
Icarus Third Column 205
IFC Process Status 206
IFC Required Action 206
IFC Type 206
IFCAspectCodeValue 205
Ignore Boundaries 206
Index Sheet 61
Industry Commodity Code Option 206
initial design 334
initial structural plan 334
Inlet Port Geometry Type 207
Installation Responsibility 207
instantiation 334
Instrument Functional Type 207
Insulation Material 207
Insulation Material Sheet 117
Insulation Purpose 207
Insulation Reference Data 115
Insulation Sheets 115
Insulation Specification Sheet 116
Insulation Temperature Basis 207
Insulation Thickness Basis 208
Insulation Thickness Table Sheet 116
InsulationData.xls Workbook 115
IntelliShip Data Integrity Msgs 208
IntelliShip Msgs 208
interference checking 334
Interior Surface Treatment 208
Is Bend Planar 208
J
Jacketed Closure Method 209
Jacketed Piping Basis 209
job order 334
K
kinematics analysis 334
ksi 334
L
Learning about Reference Data Types 26
leg length analysis 334
Legend Sheet 60
library 335
life cycle database 335
Lining Material 209
link 335
lintel 335
Load Case Liquid Pressure 209
Load Case Sea Pressure 209
load group 335
Load Span Classification 210
Index


79
location 335
logical member 335
Longitudinal Beam Category 210
Longitudinal Bulkhead Category 210
Longitudinal Profile Category 210
Longitudinal Seam Category 210
Longitudinal Tube Category 210
Looking at How the Catalog Database Fits
In 27
Loose Material Requirements 210
M
Mach Bolt Length Round Off Option 211
machinery 335
macro 336
maintenance envelope 336
maintenance records 336
Manufacturer 211
Manufacturing Method 211
Map Type 211
material analysis 336
Material Description Builder Option 212
material list 336
Material Sheet 111
Materials Grade 212
Materials of Construction Class 212
Materials Type 212
Member Fireproofing Application Method
213
Member Fireproofing Application Type 213
Member Fireproofing Exposure Type 213
Member Orientation 213
methods 336
Methods of Jacket Pipe Construction 213
Methods of Trimming 214
Min Bend To Bend Tangent Len Option
214
Minimum Reference Data 54
Mirror Behavior Option 214
Misc Requisition Classification 215
Module Type Sheets 121
Module Types Reference Data 121
ModuleTypes.xls Workbook 121
Moniker Information for Special Process
Sheets 98
Move Custom DLLs to SharedContent
Directory (Option 1) 124
move from point 336
move to point 336
MTO neutral file 336
Multiport Valve Op Req 215
N
Naming Rules Reference Data 123
Naming Rules Sheet 126
Naming Rules Sheets 125
node 337
northing 337
Note Purpose 215
nozzle 337
Nozzle Data Sheets 127
Nozzle Entrance Type 215
Nozzle Flange Type 215
Nozzle Function 215
nozzle standout 337
NPD (Nominal Piping Diameter) 337
Nut Creation Option 216
Nut Option 216
Nut Type 216
O
object 337
occurrence (of part or equipment) 337
occurrence property 337
OD to NPD Utility 47
Open or Blind Spacer Install State 216
Opening Category 216
Orifice Flange Tap Orientation 217
origin 338
origin point 338
orthogonal 338
orthographic 338
Outfitting Cross Sections Sheet 112
Outlet Port Geometry Type 217
P
P&ID 338
package 338
painting 338
Painting Responsibility 217
parameter 338
part class 338
Part Class Sheet 71
Part Class Sheets 71
Part Class Types 217
Part Data Basis 217
Part Data Source 218
part number 339
PDS (Plant Design System) 339
PDS Piping Reference Data Translator
Dialog Box 39
PinPoint 339
Pipe Bend Radius By User Option 218
Index


Pipe Bend Radius Multiplier Option 218
Pipe Bend Type 218
Pipe Bending Machine Type 218
Pipe Branch Cleanup Utility 43
Pipe Stock Usage 219
Piping Commodity Catalog Part Number
Basis Option 219
Piping Commodity Filter Cleanup Utility 41
Piping Commodity Override Option 219
Piping Commodity Procurement Data
Option 219
Piping Commodity Type 220
Piping Elbow Nozzles Sheet 128
Piping Generic Data Bolted Sheet 104
Piping Generic Data Female Sheet 110
Piping Generic Data Mechanical Sheet
111
Piping Point Usage 221
Piping Reference Data Spreadsheet Merge
Utility 44
Piping Spec Status 221
Piping Spec Version Management Option
221
Piping Specification Notes Option 222
Piping Straight Nozzles Sheet 128
Plain Piping Generic Data Sheet 102
Plane Of Flip 222
Plane of Turn 222
Plate Part Category 222
Populate Dimension Table Name Rules 31
Preface 15
Pressure Rating 222
principle of superposition 339
Product Data Management (PDM) System
339
product structure 339
production planning 339
Profile Part Category 223
ProfileEncasementType 223
promotion 339
Property Categories 223
Purchase Length Basis Option 224
Q
query select sets 340
R
R-ClassNodeDescribes Sheet 74
Rear End Type 224
reference data 340
Reference Plane View Directions 224
Reporting Requirement Basis 225
Reporting Type 225
Required Worksheets 35
Requisition Responsibility 225
Requisition Type 225
resource estimation 340
Respect Assembly Boundaries 226
Revision History Notes Option 226
Revision History Sheet 59
R-Hierarchy Sheet 75
Ring Number 226
Ring Profile Category 226
Rotation Offset Type 227
route 340
Route Direction 227
Route Layout 227
Route on Face 227
Rule Class Type 228
Rule Type 228
S
satellite server 340
Schedule Thickness 228
schema 340
schema update utility 340
Select List (Codelist) Column Descriptions
134
Select List (Codelist) Disciplines 134
Select List (Codelist) Namespaces 144
Selection Basis 229
Shell Category 230
Ship Design Loading Condition Type 230
Short Code Hierarchy 231
Signal Type 233
site 340
site administrator 341
site setup 341
Size Reduction Preference 234
Size Reduction Type 234
sketch and trace 341
Slab Boundary Reference 234
Slab Composition 234
Slab Continuity 234
Slab Corner Type 235
Slab Cross Section Symbol 235
Slab Direction Reference 235
Slab Face Position 235
Slab Fastener Type 236
Slab Layer Role 236
Slab Manufacturing Process 236
Slab Nosing Material 236
Slab Nosing Type 236
Slab Priority 236
Slab Reference Direction 237
Index


SmartMarine 3D Data Integrity Msgs 237
SmartMarine 3D Msgs 237
SmartPlant 3D Documentation Set 17
Space Access Type 237
Space Adjacency Contact Type 237
Space Adjacency Geometry Type 237
Space Arrangement Orientation 238
Space Arrangement Type 238
Space Item Purpose 238
Space Physical Orientation Type 238
Space Positional Relationship Type 239
Space Product Structure Type 239
specifications 341
Spectacle Position 239
Spool Break by Control Point 239
Spool Include Welded Parts 239
Spool Sequence Type 240
Spooling Basis 240
Standard Nozzle Data 127
Standard Nozzle Data.xls Workbook 127
Steamout Requirement 240
Stress Relief 240
Stress Relief Requirement 240
Struct 2L Back to Back Rule 241
Struct AC Left Right Both 241
Struct AC Pad Type 241
Struct AC Sizing Rule 241
Struct AC Splice Types 241
Struct AC To Do Messages 241
Struct Alignment 241
Struct Boundary Conditions 242
Struct Can Diameter Rule 242
Struct Can Length Compute Method 242
Struct Can Type 242
Struct Compute Rule 242
Struct Cone Length Compute Method 242
Struct Continuity 243
Struct Coord Sys Reference 243
Struct Custom Plate Part Type 243
Struct End Releases 243
Struct Eqp To Do Messages 243
Struct FC Chevron WPO 243
Struct FC End Controlling 244
Struct FC Offset Along 244
Struct FC Offset Direction 244
Struct FC Supported Edge 244
Struct FC Supporting CPs 244
Struct FC Supporting Side 244
Struct FC To Do Messages 245
Struct Feature Radius Type 245
Struct Feature To Do Messages 245
Struct Footing Comp Sizing Rule 245
Struct Footing To Do Messages 245
Struct Frm Conn Position Ref 245
Struct Insulation Purpose 246
Struct Member End Selection Rule 246
Struct Member Position Rule 246
Struct Plate Part To Do Messages 246
Struct Prismatic Footing Shapes 246
Struct SC To Do Messages 246
Struct Wall Boundary Size 247
Struct Wall Boundary Type 248
Struct Wall Connection Type 248
Struct Wall Reference Attribute 248
StructInsulationSetbackReference 248
Structural Load Case Source 249
Structural Member Priority 249
Structural Member Type 249
Structural WPO Intersection Index 249
stud 341
Supplementary Nut Requirement 249
Supplementary Washer Requirement 250
Supply Responsibility 250
Surface Preparation 250
suspended floor 341
symmetric node 341
system 341
T
tag number 341
Tap End Stud Bolt Length Round Off Option
250
target point 342
Testing Responsibility 250
Testing Type 250
Tightness 251
tolerant geometry 342
Translate PDS Reference Data 32
Translating and Migrating Reference Data
29
Transverse Beam Category 251
Transverse Bulkhead Category 251
Transverse Profile Category 251
Transverse Seam Category 251
Transverse Tube Category 251
Tray Specification Type 251
trimmed surface 342
trunk 342
Type 252
U
Undefined Service Limits Rule Option 252
Understanding Reference Data 25
Uniqueness of Objects 90
unit/module modeler 342
Index


UoM Conversion Utility 46
UOM Sheet 113
Use the OD to NPD Utility 47
Use the Pipe Branch Cleanup Utility 42
Use the Piping Commodity Filter Cleanup
Utility 41
Use the Piping Reference Data Merge
Utility 44
Use the UoM Conversion Utility 45
user attributes 342
Using Catalog Data in an Integrated
Environment 131
Using Catalog Hierarchy Sheets to Add Part
Classes 75
Using Excel Workbooks to Configure
Reference Data 49
Using the Bulkload Modes 79
Using the OD to NPD Utility 46
Using the Pipe Branch Cleanup Utility 42
Using the Piping Commodity Filter Cleanup
Utility 40
Using the Piping Reference Data Merge
Utility 43
Utility BOM Units 252
Utility Brace Orient 253
Utility_Holes 253
Utility_Nuts 253
Utility_PlateThickness 254
Utility_Tabs 254
Utility_YesNo 254
V
Valve Flow Pattern 254
Valve Model Number 254
Valve Operator Geometric Industry
Standard 255
Valve Operator Is Rotatable 255
Valve Operator Part Data Basis 255
Valve Operator Type 255
Valve Port Option 255
Valve Trim 256
Vendor 256
version control 342
vertex 343
Vertical Beam Category 256
Vertical Profile Category 256
Vertical Seam Category 256
Vertical Tube Category 256
Vessel Head Type 257
viewset 343
Voltage Grade 257
W
Washer Creation Option 257
Washer Option 257
Washer Type 257
WBS Assignment 258
WBS Auto Grouping Rule Type 258
WBS Item Purpose 258
WBS Project Purpose 258
WBS Pull In Associated Items 259
weight and CG analysis 343
Weld Type 259
welding 343
Welding Procedure Specification 259
Welding Requirement 260
What's New in Reference Data 23
wirebody 343
wizard 343
work content 343
work order 343
Working in an Integrated Environment 131
working plane 344
workset 344
workspace 344
workspace document 344
Workspace Explorer 344

Ref Data Guide Help 409

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Ref Data Guide Help 409

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

SmartPlant 3D

Reference Data Guide

S-ar putea să vă placă și